Home

User Guide for Voice/IP Gateways - Multi

Contents

1. 166 Hold Sequence ou eee 166 Retrieve Sequence 166 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Call Hold Enable 0 166 Call Transfer Enable 165 Select Channel cccccee 165 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Call Name Identification Enable 67 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Calling Party sesser 168 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 168 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Alerting Party s 169 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 169 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Busy Partyraiser naats 170 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 170 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Index Connected Party 171 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Allowed Name Types 171 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Caller ID iren sepen ense 172 Supplementary Services Parameters fields Transfer Sequence e 165 Supplementary Services Parameters screen ACCESSING eeeeeeeeeeeee 162 Supplementary Services parameters SCttiN Oe dee e E aque sens 162 Supplementary Services incompatible WILL SIP oriit tires 11 162 BRI eeehe oae eroe 11 support technical eee 347 Switch Information fields ISDN BRI Statistics cccecccessceeseceseeeseees 286 SysLog clientii nes
2. 135 Set SMTP Parameters 0 0 144 Set SNMP Parameters 0 132 Set Supplementary Services Parameters eceescecesreeeneeeeee 162 Set Voice FAX Parameters 97 setting Ethernet IP parameters 87 setting password 317 web browser GUI cee 320 setting RTP Parameters 296 setting user defaults eee 315 379 Index setup SAVING ceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 177 USER neee e a 315 setup saving user values 315 Shared Secret RADIUS screen field N a apa nasa Eeee sees topes 153 signaling cadences 135 Signaling Port H 323 Call Signaling field eee ee eee 112 Signaling Port SIP Call Signaling field ee eer ee 117 Signaling tones sses 135 Silence Compression call progress Held iiss raa e E 271 Silence Compression RADIUS Attributes ss noooosooor00r00000000e0e 155 Silence Compression SMTP logs 149 Silence Compression field 104 Single Port Protocol general description anea an 11 SIP compatibility cesses 11 SIP Call Signaling Parameter definitions 117 118 119 SIP Call Signaling screen fields Password proxy server 119 Proxy Domain Name IP Address hig AE eh ace 118 Proxy Polling Interval 119 Re Registration Time proxy S rVET eee dice ded caidas 119 Signaling Number proxy server Hii statin Roache aa 118 TTE Vallese naa 119 Use SIP Proxy
3. Call Control PHB Value is used to prioritize call setup IP packets 0 63 default 34 Voip Media PHB 0 63 default 46 n Value is used to prioritize the RTP RTCP audio IP packets 92 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The IP Datagram with Header Its Type of Service field amp DiffServ bits gt 0 4 8 16 19 24 31 VERS HLEN TYPE OF TOTAL LENGTH IDENTIFICATION FLAGS FRAGMENT OFFSET TIME TO LIVE PROTOCOL HEADER CHECKSUM SOURCE IP ADDRESS DESTINATION IP ADDRESS IP OPTIONS if any PADDING end of header DATA The TOS field consists of eight bits of which only the first six are used These six bits are called the Differentiated Service Codepoint or DSCP bits The Type of Service or TOS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PRECEDENCE D T R unused three precedence have eight values 0 7 ranging from normal precedence value of 0 to network control value of 7 When set the D bit requests low delay the T bit requests high throughput and the R bit requests high reliability Routers that support DiffServ can examine the six DSCP bits and prioritize the packet based on the DSCP value The DiffServ Parameters fields in the MultiVOIP IP Parameters screen allow you to configure the DSCP bits to values supported by the router Specifically the Voip Media PHB field relates to the prioritizing of audio packets
4. 102 voice quality improving 104 voice quality versus delay 108 Voice FAX Parameter definitions 108 109 110 Voice FAX Parameter Definitions 100 101 102 103 104 107 Voice FAX Parameter fields AutoCall Offhook Alert 105 106 AutoCall Offhook Alert fields 105 106 Generate Local Dial Tone 106 Offhook Alert Timer 0 106 Out of Band Mode DTMF 100 Phone Number Auto Call Offhook Alerte ores 106 Voice FAX Parameter fields Copy Channel eee 100 Default aare ie 100 DTMF Gain o eeooeneooeeossesesseeeese 100 DTMF Gain High Tones 100 DTMF Gain Low Tones 100 DTMF In Out of Band 100 Duration DTMP 100 Input Gain iioii eies 100 Output Gain oseese 100 Select Channel 008 100 VOICE Ginesi een 100 Voice FAX Parameter fields F x Hnablesscscscscccictvsesreactioceese 101 Voice FAX Parameter fields Max Baud Rate Fax 101 384 MultiVOIP User Guide Voice FAX Parameter fields Fax Volume 102 Voice FAX Parameter fields Jitter Value Fax ceeee 102 Voice FAX Parameter fields Mode Fax cccccccsssceesseeeeeeee 102 Voice FAX Parameter fields Silence Compression 104 Voice FAX Parameter fields Echo Cancellation 0 0 104 Voice FAX Parameter fields Forward Error Correction 104 Voice FAX Parame
5. MultiVolP MultiVOIP v5 08 DP Firmware Dec 15 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help ABET RBETSEN Se B Configuration Ethemet IP SMTP Parameters Voice Fax M Enable SMTP E Call Signaling s HAt ISDN BRI J Requires Authentication NMP A TUS Login Name VOIP UNIT 3 acmetech com SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces Mail Server IPAddress 192 168 1 5 NAT Traverse Supplemental Port Number 25 System Inform Mail Type ea Advanced c E Phone Book Text HIML Statistics Save Setup Subject Call Logs VOIP UNIT 3 Connection Help Reply ToAddiess technician acmetech com Contents Search Recipient Address Jadmin acmetech com Index 2 About Mail Criteria Number of Records 500 M Number of Days 4 Password 7 790000000 gt OO IRights Read write 7 SMTP Parameters Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable SMTP Y N In order to send log reports by email this box must be checked However to enable SMTP functionality you must also select SMTP in the Logs screen Requires Y N If this checkbox is checked the Authentication Multi VOIP will send Authentication information to the SMTP server The authentication information indicates whether or not the email sender has permission to use the SMTP server Login Name alpha This is the User Name for the numeric per MultiVOIP unit s email account e
6. Maximum Jitter Value 300 ms Optimization Factor p Prefix Suffix PrefixAnd Suffix User CID Prefix Suffix m Automatic Disconnection J Jitter Value 250 ms I Consecutive Packets Lost 30 L_ Call Duration 190 secs V Network Disconnection 300 98 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Note that Voice FAX parameters are applied on a channel by channel basis However once you have established a set of Voice FAX parameters for a particular channel you can apply this entire set of Voice FAX parameters to another channel by using the Copy Channel button and its dialog box To copy a set of Voice FAX parameters to all channels select Copy to All and click Copy m Voice Fax Parameters r Copy Channel Select Channel Channel 1 Copy Channel 1 Voice Fax Parameters to Ti Channels ie gf fg Bw S Bo gf wf S Bs ros E r ZENS r afe r r r P io 99 Copy Cancel Help Ok Cancel Copy Channel Defaut Help Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Voice FAX Parameters fields are described in the tables below Voice Fax Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Default When this button is clicked all Voice FAX parameters are set to their default values Select 1 4 410ST Channel to be configured is selected Channel 1 8 810ST here
7. MutOIP 200 v2 51 gt Settings gt MultivOIP 100 v7 50C gt MultVOIP 100 v7 01C gt Sii C MultivOIP 100 v7 50 gt MutivOIP 100 v7 504 amp Configuration if MultiVOIP 800 v3 01E gt Configuration Port Setup Mutivoip 100 v7 o1e Bb Date and Time Setup fe MultiVOIP 100 v7 514 gt 25 Download Factory Defaults A RouteFinder Manager 7 28 25 Download Firmware Broadband Manager 7 26 gt 29 Download User Defaults A Paint Shop Pro Set Password Multivoip 100 v7 51B gt i Uninstall Ra MultiVOIP 5 08 2D Upgrade Software Log Off GUEST Windows98 ZATE amp Shut Down QJ Exploring mvp24 Several basic software functions are accessible from the MultiVoip software menu as shown below MultiVOIP Program Menu Menu Selection Description Configuration Select this to enter the Configuration program where values for IP telephony and other parameters are set Configuration Port Setup Select this to access the COM Port Setup screen of the MultiVOIP Configuration program Date and Time Setup Select this for access to set calendar clock used for data logging 298 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance MultiVOIP Program Menu cont d Menu Selection Description Download Factory Defaults Select this to return the configuration parameters to the original factory values Download Fir
8. amp MultiVolP MultiVOIP 5 08 DP Firmwe Configuration Ethemet 7 IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Ctr Regional Parameters Ctr R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information CtreAlt y Call Signaling AlteC RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt Sttey ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt H Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Servi System Information Supplementary Services features derive from the H 450 standard which brings to voip telephony functionality once only available with PSTN or PBX telephony Supplementary Services features can be used under H 323 only and not under SIP Even though the H 450 standard refers only to H 323 Supplementary Services are still applicable to the SIP and SPP voip protocols 162 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration In each field enter the values that fit your particular network m Supplementary Services Parameters Select Channel Channel 1 bs Call Transfer rm Call Name Identification M Enable M Enable Allowed Name Type Transfer Sequence fs 1 I Calling Party T Busy Party Call Hold I Alerting Party I Connected Party MV Enable Caller Id Hold Sequence Call Wa
9. 229 Gateway H 323 ID 230 Gateway Prefix o s 230 H 323 Port Numbet 230 TP 2Address onnee n 229 Protocol Type 229 Remote Device is legacy Multi VOIP ou eeeceseeeees 232 Remove Prefix cccccesseeees 229 SIP Port Numbet 005 231 SPUR vacescstisk esses eas 231 Total Digits eici rs 229 Transport Protocol SIP 231 Use Gatekeeper 0 230 232 Use Proxy SIP eeeeeeeeeseeeeee 231 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook fields T1 Accept Any Numbet 185 Add Prefiksi renra 186 Advanced button 188 Description 186 Destination Pattern 00 186 Gateway H 323 ID 187 Gateway Prefix eseese 187 IP Addresser aas 186 Protocol Type cceeeeseeeeeee 186 Q 931 Port Numbet 187 Remove Prefix cccccesseeees 186 SIP Port Numbet 005 188 SIP UR steca cet nave ects 188 Total Digits 00 eee eeeeeeeeee 186 Transport Protocol SIP 188 Use Gatekeeper 187 189 Use Proxy SIP eeeeeeseeeeee 188 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook screen BD eras n Maes Peete eet 227 362 MultiVOIP User Guide Fields Bl eco a ithe ibid E 232 ol bs bese sored er E E 189 Address SNMP field 0 134 Advanced button Outbound Phonebook Bl AAEE EE E 232 A a EEE EEE 189 Advanced Features field group 104 ahn i 0 A ESEA 59 Alerting Party Supplementary Servi
10. 285 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI Statistics Field Definitions continued Field Values Description Name Switch Information TEI Assignment TEI 0 0 63 point to point Displays the value for each TEI through assignments assigned to the BRI port The TEI TEI 7 64 126 automatic Terminal Endpoint Identifier uniquely aasienanents identifies each device connected to the ISDN physical layer Switch Information D Channel Information Tx Packets 0 to 4294967295 Shows the number of packets transmitted on the channel When the value exceeds 4294967295 packets it will reset to zero and continue counting Rx Packets 0 to 4294967295 Shows the number of packets received on the channel When the value exceeds 4294967295 packets it will reset to zero and continue counting Switch Information SPID 0 SPID 0 numeric A SPID Service Profile Identifier is number 3 to 20 digits assigned by the ISDN provider and pertains to one channel of the BRI interface port in this case channel 0 The SPID identifies an ISDN terminal uniquely The SPID associates a set of services features with the terminal In Terminal mode the provider is a telco or PBX In Network mode MultiVOIP is the provider A SPID is only used when the Country field is set to USA in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen Status Not Checked Indicates whether SPIDO is correct Correct
11. 285 Loss of Sync field SDN BRI Parameters Layer 1 Interface 285 lost packets consecutive 110 lost pasSWOTd eects 317 320 Mac Address System Info eee 175 262 mail criteria SMTP records 146 Mail Server IP Address SMTP field E pes dap uatedestcni de Byes tebeelmevenhen teas 146 Mail Type SMTP logs field 146 mains frequency cceceeeceereeeeeees 17 management of voips remote 132 Max bandwidth coder 103 Max Baud Rate field 101 Max Retransmission SPP General Options field oo eee 121 Maximum Jitter Value field 108 Minimum Jitter Value field 107 Mode call progress field 266 Mode Fax field cccceeeeeeees 102 Mode SPP field eee cece 121 Index Mode statistics logs field 273 Mode field eeeeeeeseeeteeneeeeee 109 modem relay eceeeeseeeeeeseeeeee 108 modem traffic on voip network 108 Monitor Link fields Link Management Statistics Sree a codons ers enea 283 MOUNTING orien 10 mounting in rack 58 procedure fOor sessseseseeeseeeesseseee 60 Safety send Ansa eaei a iess 56 59 MTS web site firmware updates 302 305 Multiplexed UDP field 00 0 116 MultiVOIP FAQ on MTS web site 8 MultiVOIP Program Menu items 298 MultiVOIP Program Menu options Configuration cece 298 Configuration Port S
12. Accessing SMTP Parameters Pulldown Icon gt Multi VolP Multi VOIP v 5 08 DP Firmw Configuration Ethemet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctr H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters CtreAlt S Logs Traces Ctri lt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information CtreAlteyY Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt Shte ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar E Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt S Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional RADIUS MultiVOIP as Email Sender When SMTP is used the MultiVOIP will actually be given its own email account with Login Name and Password on some mail server connected to the IP network Using this account the MultiVOIP will then send out email messages containing log report information The Recipient of the log report email is ordinarily the VoIP administrator Because the MultiVOIP cannot receive email a Reply To address must also be set up Ordinarily the Reply To address is that of a technician who has access to the mail server or MultiVOIP or both and the VoIP administrator might also be designated as the Reply To party The main function of the Reply To address is to receive error or failure messages regarding the emailed reports 144 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The SMTP Parameters screen is shown below
13. Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Ethernet Parameters Packet Y N Select to activate Prioritization prioritization under 802 1p 802 1p protocol described below Frame Type Type II SNAP Must be set to match network s frame type Default is Type II 802 1p A draft standard of the IEEE about data traffic prioritization on Ethernet networks The 802 1p draft is an extension of the 802 1D bridging standard 802 1D determines how prioritization will operate within a MAC layer bridge for any kind of media The 802 1Q draft for virtual local area networks VLANs addresses the issue of prioritization for Ethernet networks in particular 802 1p enacts this Quality of Service feature using 3 bits This 3 bit code allows data switches to reorder packets based on priority level The descriptors for the 8 priority levels are given below 802 1p PRIORITY LEVELS LOWEST PRIORITY 1 Background Bulk transfers and other activities permitted on the network but should not affect the use of network by other users and applications 2 Spare An unused spare value of the user priority 0 Best Effort default Normal priority for ordinary LAN traffic 3 Excellent Effort The best effort type of service that an information services organization would deliver to its most important customers 89 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Para
14. Finally consider the longest entry in the Minneapolis Inbound Phonebook 17637175 Note that the main phone number of the Minneapolis PBX is 763 717 5170 The destination pattern 17637175 means that all calls to Minneapolis employees will stay within the suburban Minneapolis PBX and will not reach or be carried on the local PSTN 200 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Similarly the Inbound PhoneBook for the Baltimore VOIP shown first below generally matches the Outbound PhoneBook of the Minneapolis VOIP shown second below Notice the extended prefix to be removed 14103257 This entry allows Minneapolis users to contact Baltimore co workers as though they were in the Minneapolis facility using numbers in the range 7000 to 7999 Note also that a comma as in the entry 9 443 denotes a delay in dialing A one second delay is commonly used to allow a second dial tone to be generated for calls going outside of the facility s PBX system 201 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Outbound PhoneBook for the Minneapolis VOIP is shown below The third destination pattern 7 facilitates reception of co worker calls using local appearing extensions only In this case the Add Prefix field value for this phonebook entry would be 1410325 200 002 009 007 Baltimore overlay 200 002 009 007 Baltimore Office 202 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Configuring M
15. cece 155 Options From Details SMTP logs od a beeen eee ee eee 149 Options To Details RADIUS Attributes field 0 0000000000000 155 Options To Details SMTP logs field T E 149 Others Priorities Ethernet IP params 802 1 p field cscs sresti 90 out of band DTMF 101 Outbound Digits Received call progress field oo eee eee 269 Outbound Digits Received statistics logs field Zrusenie 274 Outbound Digits Received SMTP logs field asiri iscritti tst 148 Outbound Digits Sent call progress field sannserorica riian 269 Outbound Digits Sent RADIUS Attributes field cece 154 Outbound Digits Sent SMTP logs feldin anakan a 149 Outbound Digits Sent statistics logs felda aiaeei sisi 274 Outbound Digits Sent and DTMF Out of Band 149 Outbound Phonebook Entries List icon Bl EEE E 224 Tl O TEE 181 Outbound Phonebook entries list Ble EE S 226 e E E EEE EAEE EEE 183 outbound vs inbound phonebooks A E A EST 222 e E E EE ices hance 180 Out of Band DTMF and Outbound Digits Sent eetan aissis 149 Output Gain field eee 100 output level fax tones 102 375 Index Packet Prioritization 802 1p Ethernet IP parameters 89 packet priority and DiffServ 93 packetization RTP ranges amp INCFEMENLS ossee eere 296 packetization rates coder options and uu eee 295 Packets Lost call progress field 267 Packets Lost RADIUS
16. r2_brazilFtp cas could be transferred to enable a particular telephony protocol used in Brazil File Type File Names Description firmware bin file mvpt1Ftp bin This is the MultiVOIP firmware file Only one file of this type will be in the directory factory defaults fdefFtp cnf This file contains factory default settings for user changeable configuration parameters Only one file of this type will be in the directory H323 PDL file This file is specific to the particular version of the H 323 standard being used This file rarely needs to be updated inbound phonebook outbound phonebook InPhBk tmr OutPhBk tmr 329 This file updates the inbound phonebook in the MultiVOIP unit This file updates the outbound phonebook in the MultiVOIP unit Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 6 Contact MultiVOIP FTP Server You must make contact with the FTP Server in the voip using either a web browser or FTP client program Enter the IP address of the MultiVOIP s FTP Server If you are using a browser the address must be preceded by ftp otherwise you ll reach the web GUI within the MultiVOIP unit A ftp 192 168 2 2007 Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 Back mA Fie Edit View Go F ait lt Bttp 192 168 2 200 330 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 7 Log In Use the User Name and p
17. At the right hand side of the dialog box click OK If you know any specific parameter values that will apply to your system enter them Click Copy Channel Select Copy to All Click Copy At main Voice Fax Parameters screen click OK to exit from the dialog box 6 Enter telephone system information Go to Configuration ISDN BRI Enter parameters obtained from phone company or PBX administrator If the voip is connected to BRI extensions of a PBX or a phone company then select Terminal in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen If the voip is connected to ISDN terminal adapters and or ISDN phones then select Network in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen 7 Go to Configuration Regional Parameters Select the Country Region that fits your situation Click OK and confirm Click OK to exit from the dialog box 8 Go to Configuration Regional Parameters In the Country Selection for Built In Modem field drop down list select the country that best fits your situation This may not be the same as your selection for the Country Region field The selections in the Country Selection for Built In Modem field entail more detailed groupings of telephony parameters than do the Country Region values 9 Do you want the phone call logs produced by the MultiVOIP to be sent out by email to your Voip Administrator or someone else If NO skip to step 11 If YES continue with step 10 10 Go to Configuration SMTP SMTP lets you send
18. Default to 3 5 dB be changed only under the direction of 9 5 dB Multi Tech s Technical Support Jitter Value Default Defines the inter arrival packet Fax 400 ms deviation in milliseconds for the fax transmission A higher value will increase the delay allowing a higher percentage of packets to be reassembled A lower value will decrease the delay allowing fewer packets to be reassembled Mode Fax FRF 11 FRF11 is frame relay FAX standard using T 38 these coders G 711 G 728 G 729 G 723 1 T 38 not T 38 is an ITU T standard for storing currently and forwarding FAXes via email using sup X 25 packets It uses T 30 fax standards ported and includes special provisions to preclude FAX timeouts during IP transmissions 102 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Coder Parameters Coder Manual or Determines whether selection of Auto coder is manual or automatic matic When Automatic is selected the local and remote voice channels will negotiate the voice coder to be used by selecting the highest bandwidth coder supported by both sides without exceeding the Max Bandwidth setting G 723 G 729 or G 711 are negotiated Selected G 711 a u_ Select from a range of coders with Coder law 64 specific bandwidths The higher the kbps bps rate the more bandwidth is G 726 used The channel that you are 16 24 32 calling must have the
19. Specs amp Settings Hookup Software Installation Phone IP Starter Configuration Phonebook Starter Configuration Connectivity Test Troubleshooting Startup Tasks MultiVOIP Startup Tasks Summary The MultiVOIP must be configured to interface with your particular phone system and IP network To do so certain details must be known about those phone and IP systems Decide where you ll mount the voip Some modest minimum specifications must be met A data connection to the MultiVOIP unit whether via serial port USB2 0 with adaptor or web based must be made Connect power phone and data cables per diagram This is the configuration program It s a standard Windows software installation You will enter phone numbers and IP addresses You ll use default parameter values where possible to get the system running quickly Use Config Info CheckList page 24 The phonebook is where you specify how calls will be routed To get the system running quickly you ll make phonebooks for just two voip sites You ll find out if your voip system can carry phone calls between two sites That means you re up and running Detect and remedy any problems that might have prevented connectivity 21 Gathering Phone IP Details MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phone IP Details Absolutely Needed Before Starting the Installation The MultiVOIP will interface with both the IP network
20. a fxs_loopFtp cas h323 pdl 58 192 168 2 200 334 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Some FTP client programs are more graphically oriented see previous screen while others like the WS FTP client are more text oriented WS FTP LE 192 168 2 200 olx m Local System Remote Site Jc Progran Files Multi F 7 C Name Date t casfile cas factdef cnf H323 pdl nvptiftp bin r2_argentina r2_argent inaa r2_argent inaF r2_brazil cas r2_brazilani r2_brazilaniF r2_brazilFtp Refresh r2_china cas xj b C ASCII Binary T Auto 150 Here it comes Received 52 bytes in 1 0 secs 528 99 bps transfer succeeded 226 Transfer OK Closing connection Close Cancel Logw nd Help Options About 9 Verify Transfer The files transferred will appear in the directory of the MultiVOIP P ftp voip1 192 168 2 200 Microsoft Internet Explorer voip 192 168 2 200 A al casfile cas factdef cnt H323 pdl myptlftp bin OutPhBk tmr InPhBk tmr 10 Log Out of FTP Session Whether the file transfer was done with a web browser or with an FTP client program you must log out of the FTP session before opening the MultiVOIP Windows GUI 335 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Web Browser Interface Z MultivOIP Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help e gt 0 A a a GiB 3 BB Back F
21. fso zl feo zi E feo l eo l eo feo zi o zi Packetization rates can be set separately for each channel The table below presents the ranges and increments for packetization rates Packetization Ranges and Increments Coder Types Range in Kbps Increments in Kbps default value G711 G726 G727 5 120 5 5 G723 30 120 30 30 G729 10 120 10 10 Netcoder 20 120 20 20 296 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Once the packetization rate has been set for one channel it can be copied into other channels Packetization Time Select Channel iBall Packetization Rate OK G711 A law 64 Kbps 5 7 G727 40 16 Kbps 5 G711 U law 64 Kbps 5 G727 40 24 Kbps 5 X Cancel Copy Channel Copy Channel Copy Channel 1 RTP Parameters to I Copy to All Channels Cancel Iv BB sg 8 i Hep E E _ E r ja pa E r a Z ja T T T E E E T F E 297 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide MultiVoip Program Menu Items After the MultiVoip program is installed on the PC it can be launched from the Programs group of the Windows Start menu Start Programs MultiVOIP__ In this section we describe the software functions available on this menu N Acrobat Reader 5 0 Programs gl FullShot99 gt Feseia r fn RouteFinder Manager 7 26 gt Documents gt A Gun Wear HK Screen Saver gt
22. nnonn Device where Parameters n 0 255 Public IP Address device NAT Network The public IP address of the proxy NAT device which the MultiVOIP is behind An example of a NAT equipped SPP network is shown below About SPP Proxy NAT Device Parameters SPP Client Registrar System Registrar Private IP Voip A Proxy NAT device is sometimes used in a Client Registrar SPP voip system where the registrar voip is in a private network but serves client voips ona public network The Proxy NAT device isolates protects the registrar voip Proxy NAT Device from the public network In such cases you must check the Enable SPP Proxy NAT device checkbox Public IP Client Voip Public IP Public IP Client Voip Public IP Client Voip Public IP in the Phonebook Configuration screen of the Registrar voip The private registrar voip can then function with the client voips using the public IP address of the Proxy NAT device You must enter this address in the Public IP Address field 123 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 10 Set ISDN Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing ISDN BRI Parameters Pulldown Icon Multi VolP MultiVOIP 5 08 DP Firmw Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt 1 Voice Channels Ctr H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Paramete
23. will overwrite old file Drag this a porate on Voip unit 332 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance You may be asked to confirm the overwriting of files on the MultiVOIP Do so Confirm File Replace File transfer between PC and voip will look like transfer within voip directories 333 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 8B Download with FTP Client Program 8B1 In the local directory browser of the FTP client program locate the directory holding the MultiVOIP program files The default location will be C Program Files Multi Tech Systems Multi VOIP xxxx yyyy where x and y represent MultiVOIP model numbers and software version numbers 8B2 In the FTP client program window drag and drop files from the local browser pane to the pane for the MultiVOIP FTP server FTP client GUI operations vary In some cases you can choose between immediate and queued transfer In some cases there may be automated capabilities to transfer to multiple destinations with a single command SmartFTP 1 0 Build 969 ETP Commands View Tools Favorites Window Help ELI Merika AEE EEM Address 9 192 168 2 200 Login voip Password Port 21 192 168 2 200 Mie x E Local Brows 192 168 2 200 Name a myptt ftp bin fdefftp cnf a fxo_ground cas p 38 fxs_groi a fxs_groundFtp a fxs_loop cas
24. www regtp de en reg_tele start List of European fs_05 html telecom regulatory agencies by country from German telecom authority 259 Chapter 8 Operation and Maintenance 260 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Operation and Maintenance Although most Operation and Maintenance functions of the software are in the Statistics group of screens an important summary appears in the System Information of the Configuration screen group System Information screen This screen presents vital system information at a glance Its primary use is in troubleshooting This screen is accessible via the Configuration pulldown menu the Configuration sidebar menu or by the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Alt Y m System Information m Version Information Boot Version See Osu Firmware Version 5 08 DP Configuration Version 5 08 09 03 Phone Book Version 4 04 MAC Address 000805001374 Uptime gt 07 02 09 10 Hardware ID M P810 ST 32M Rev C 59F8 261 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide System Information Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Boot nn nn Indicates the version of the code that Version alpha is used at the startup booting of the numeric voip The boot code version is independent of the software version Firmware nn nn nn Indicates the version of the Version alpha MultiVOIP firmware numeric Configur nn nn Indicates
25. Alert Timer 0 3000 seconds Phone Number The length of time that must elapse before the offhook alert is triggered and a call is automatically made to the phone number listed in the Phone Number field Phone number used for Auto Call function or Offhook Alert Timer function This phone number must correspond to an entry in the Outbound Phonebook of the local MultiVOIP and in the Inbound Phonebook of the remote MultiVOIP unless a gatekeeper unit is used in the voip system MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Dynamic Jitter Dynamic Jitter Buffer Dynamic Jitter defines a minimum and a maximum jitter value for voice communications When receiving voice packets from a remote MultiVOIP varying delays between packets may occur due to network traffic problems This is called Jitter To compensate the MultiVOIP uses a Dynamic Jitter Buffer The Jitter Buffer enables the MultiVOIP to wait for delayed voice packets by automatically adjusting the length of the Jitter Buffer between configurable minimum and maximum values An Optimization Factor adjustment controls how quickly the length of the Jitter Buffer is increased when jitter increases on the network The length of the jitter buffer directly effects the voice delay between MultiVOIP gateways Minimum Jitter Value 60 to 40
26. Connection m COM Port Setup Connect Select Port COM1 x Disconnect Settings gt Baud Rate 115200 z Modem Setup bison sacs Init String PIRES 5 613200401 Init Response Koo Diisi SS Connect Response JcONNECT assis Hangup Sting aT oo NOTE If there is a Dial String specified in Modem Setup Configuration programs will try to initialize modem and dial this string 85 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 4B Fixing a Cabling Problem If the MultiVOIP cannot be located by the computer two error messages will appear saying Multi VOIP Not Found and Phone Database Not Read Multi OIP Multi olIP PDD x Multi OIP Not Found Phone Database not Read In this case the MultiVOIP is simply disconnected from the network For instructions on MultiVOIP cable connections see the Cabling section of Chapter 3 5 Configuration Parameter Groups Getting Familiar Learning About Access The first part of configuration concerns IP parameters Voice FAX parameters Telephony Interface parameters SNMP parameters Regional parameters SMTP parameters Supplementary Services parameters Logs and System Information In the MultiVOIP software these seven types of parameters are grouped together under Configuration and each has its own dialog box for entering values Generally you can reach the dialog box for these parameter groups in one of four ways pulldown m
27. Data Receive Positive 6 RD Data Receive Negative 354 MultiVOIP User Guide Cable Pinouts Pin Functions FXS FXO Interface FXS Pin Description FXO Pin Description 2 N C 2 N C 3 Ring 3 Tip 4 Tip 4 Ring 5 N C 5 N C 355 Cable Pinouts MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI RJ 45 Pinout Information The S T interface uses an 8 conductor modular cable terminated with an 8 pin RJ 45 plug An 8 pin RJ 45 jack located on the terminal is used to connect the terminal to the DSL Digital Subscriber Loops using this modular cable The table below shows the Pin Number Terminal Pin Signal Name and Network Pin Signal name for the S T interface Pin TE Signal NT Signal Pin 1 Not used Not used 1 2 Not used C Not used 2 3 Tx Rx 3 4 R Te 4 5 Rx Tx 5 6 T Re 6 7 Not used Not used 7 8 Not used C Not used 8 TE Terminal Equipment NT Network 356 MultiVOIP User Guide Cable Pinouts ISDN Interfaces ST and U The MVP410ST and MVP810ST are ISDN BRI voip units that use an S T outlet interface You will need an NT1 device to connect these units to any network equipment that has the U ISDN interface In the UK and in many European countries the telco supplies an NT1 device for ISDN BRI service An ISDN Basic Rate BRI U Loop consists of
28. Inbound Phonebook entry and an Outbound Phonebook entry that describe the end to end connection The phone station originating the call must be connected to the VOIP system The Outbound Phonebook for that VOIP unit must have a destination pattern entry that includes the called phone that is the phone completing the call The Inbound Phonebook of the VOIP where the call is completed must have a destination pattern entry that includes the digit sequence dialed by the originating phone station The PhoneBook Configuration procedure below is brief but it is followed by an example case For many people the example case may be easier to grasp than the procedure steps Configuration is not difficult but all phone number sequences destination patterns and other information must be entered exactly otherwise connections will not be made 223 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook configuration screens can be accessed using icons or the sidebar menu Phonebook Icons Description Phone Book leone Phonebook Configuration D ee ee amp B Phone Book Icons a A a py ke amp B Anne Danian a Phonebook E Bi S oSI Edit selected Inbound a Phonebook Entry CIETFEN Outbound Phonebook Entries List Boe A 2 e amp Ee Phone Book Icons A E m B28 2B Bi E Bute Te oi Edit selected Outbound B p B a i Phonebook Entry 224 MultiVOIP User Gu
29. Syslog Daemon is a freeware Syslog Daemon for the Windows platform It receives logs displays and forwards Syslog messages from hosts such as routers switches Unix hosts and any other syslog enabled device There are many customizable options available 13 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Telephony Services The H 450 standard an addition to H 323 brings to voip telephony more of the premium features found in PSTN and PBX telephony MultiVOIP units offer five of these H 450 features Call Transfer Call Hold Call Waiting Call Name Identification not the same as Caller ID and Call Forwarding The first four features are found in the Supplementary Services window the fifth Call Forwarding appears in the Add Edit Inbound phonebook screen Note that the first three features are closely related All of these H 450 features are supported for H 323 operation only they are not supported for SIP or SPP ISDN BRI MultiVOIP Front Panel LEDs LED Types The MultiVOIPs have two types of LEDs on their front panels 1 general operation LED indicators for power booting and ethernet functions and 2 channel operation LED indicators that describe the data traffic and performance in each VOIP data channel Active LEDs On the MVP810ST there are four sets of ISDN operation LEDs On the MVP410ST there are two sets of ISDN operation LEDs Each set contains one D LED and two sets of channel operation LEDs X
30. System Information Ctrl eAlt Y Call Signaling Alte RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl AlteSftey ISDN BRI Ctrl F Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal Supplementary Services S n Information Shortcut Ctrl Alt Y 173 Icon Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide This screen presents vital system information at a glance Its primary use is in troubleshooting m System Information Yersion Information Boot Version 2 03b Firmware Version 5 09 05 Configuration Version 5 09 00 00 Phone Book Version 4 04 MAC Address 000805001374 Uptime 00 00 46 30 Hardware ID E 59F8 Exit System Information Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Boot nn nn Indicates the version of the code that Version is used at the startup booting of the voip The boot code version is independent of the software version Firmware alpha Indicates version of MultiVOIP Version numeric firmware 174 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration System Information Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Configur nn nn nn Indicates version of MultiVOIP ation nn Configuration software which Version alpha includes screens for IP Parameters numeric SNMP Parameters SMTP Paramet
31. Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide the channel over which the call is being originated for example Calling Party Omaha Sales Office Line 2 If that voip channel is dedicated to a certain individual the descriptor could say that as well for example Calling Party Harold Smith in Omaha When the home voip receives a call from any remote voip the home voip sends a status message back to that caller This message confirms that the home voip s phone channel is either busy or ringing or that a connection has been made for example Busy Party Omaha Sales Office Line 2 These messages appear in the Statistics Call Progress screen of the remote voip Note that Supplementary Services parameters are applied on a channel by channel basis However once you have established a set of supplementary parameters for a particular channel you can apply this entire set of parameters to another channel by using the Copy Channel button and its dialog box To copy a set of Supplementary Services parameters to all channels select Copy to All and click Copy Supplementary Services Parameters Select Channel Channel 1 OK Default Cancel Copy Channel i Copy Channel Copy Channel 1 Supplementary Services I Copy to All Channels Cancel Mid lo eed e leo Hep B ge om oly Si Hi Be Be ee amp Se 2 A hae ele Isis R we 164 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Su
32. The required entry in the Lincoln Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 31 The string 1615492 would have to be added as a prefix The call would be directed to the Pierre voip s IP address 200 2 9 9 B The corresponding entry in the Pierre Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 1615492 1 Caller at Lincoln picks up phone receiver presses button on key phone set This button has been assigned to a particular voip channel any one of the three FXS ports 2 The caller at Lincoln hears dial tone from the Lincoln voip 3 The caller at Lincoln dials 3117 4 The Lincoln voip adds the prefix 1615492 and sends the entire dialing string 16154923117 to the Pierre voip at IP address 200 2 9 9 5 The Pierre voip matches the called digits 16154923117 to its Inbound Phonebook entry 1615492 6 The Pierre PBX dials extension 3117 in the office at Pierre Variations in PBX Characteristics The exact dialing strings needed in the Outbound and Inbound Phonebooks of the MVP2410 will depend on the capabilities of the PBX Some PBXs require trunk access codes like an 8 or 9 to access an outside line or to access the VOIP network Other PBXs can automatically distinguish between intra PBX calls PSTN calls and VOIP calls Some PBX units can also insert digits automatically when they receive certain dialing strings from a phone station For example a PBX
33. d Field Name Values and Description Ring Count 0 1 2 3 etc When No Response is condition for forwarding calls this determines how many unanswered rings are needed to trigger the forwarding Registration In an H 323 voip system gateways can Option register with the system using one of these Parameters identifiers a an E 164 identifier b a Tech Prefix identifier or c an H 323 ID identifier In a SIP voip system gateways can register with the SIP Proxy In an SPP voip system gateways can register with the SPP Registrar voip unit 5 When your Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries are completed click on Save Setup in the sidebar menu to save your configuration You can change your configuration at any time as needed for your system Remember that the initial MultiVOIP setup must be done locally using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI or remotely using the MultiVOIP web GUI contacting the remote MultiVOIP initially at its default IP address of 192 168 3 143 After the initial configuration is complete all of the MultiVOIP units in the VOIP system can be configured re configured and updated from one location using the MultiVOIP web GUI software program or the MultiVOIP program in conjunction with the built in modem 196 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration T1 Phonebook Examples The following example demonstrates how Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries work in a si
34. 292 Stas n e i 292 TYPE ane en ee 292 H 323 Multiplexing field 115 H 323 Port Number outbound phonebook field Ed ESE E OOR 230 H 323 version 4 features 6 11 H 323 Version 4 Parameters 116 H 450 features incompatible with SIP apenas asa 11 162 BRI AEE EEE 11 H 450 functionality LOSS O A A T 276 H 450 standard oe eee eee 14 Hardware ID System Info eee 175 262 Hold Sequence eee 163 166 hold caller on musical jingle for oo eee 165 ANA abete otete isar 359 icon variable version esseeeeeeeeeee 69 icons phonebook Elera ir 224 Pl E 181 identifying current firmware version E EET 306 implementing firmware upgrade 306 in band DTMF 101 Inbound Phonebook Entries List icon Bl E 224 Thorina Satan 181 Inbound Phonebook entries list Bl EE 234 Tied EE T 192 inbound vs outbound phonebooks A e E EE EE 222 Taranis inntin mnn eie a 180 Industry Canada requirements 350 info sources IP details cesses scabies saeia 79 ISDN BRI telephony details 79 SMTP details eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 80 voip email account 00 0 eee 80 Input Gain field oo eee 100 MultiVOIP User Guide installation Afl W eiiean 59 in a nutshell eee eee 18 TI TACK E cese ceeuceckactecste conned 58 ISDN BRI prerequisites 79 log reports by email 80 software detailed 8 67 voip email account c e 80 insta
35. Alt 4 gt Call Progress Details ISDN BRI Statistics Ctrl Q Shortcut Sidebar Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Logs Alt A IP Statistics Link Management ISDN BRI Statistics 264 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The Call Progress Details Screen 265 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call Progress Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Channel 1 n Number of data channel or time slot on which the call is carried This is the channel for which call progress details are being viewed Call Details Duration Hours The length of the call in hours Minutes minutes and seconds hh mm ss Seconds Mode Voice or FAX Indicates whether the call being described was a voice call or a FAX call Voice Coder G 723 G 729 The voice coder being used on G 711 etc this call IP Call Type H 323 SIP or Indicates the Call Signaling SPP protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP IP Call incoming Indicates whether the call in Direction outgoing question is an incoming call or an outgoing call 266 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Packet Details Packets Sent integer value The number of data packets sent over the IP network in the course of this call Packets Revd integer value The numbe
36. Attributes Packets Lost SMTP logs field 148 Packets lost statistics logs field 275 Packets Received call progress field BNE cae ere ete ee aceasta oy 267 Packets Received RADIUS Attributes field 154 Packets Received SMTP logs field BM ae tel aude meee eestor eat 147 Packets received statistics logs field BNE eet INE et ee eee ue 275 Packets Sent call progress field 267 Packets Sent RADIUS Attributes Packets Sent SMTP logs field 147 Packets sent statistics logs field 275 packets consecutive lost 110 Parallel H 245 field oo eee 116 parameters tracked by console 159 Password proxy server field 119 Password SMTP field 146 password lost forgotten 317 320 Password setting 317 web browser GUI 320 patentky eee reaa EER 2 PBX characteristics variations in l N E E dl eaihenn 257 A Da ME EE ES 215 PBX interaction ceccesceeseereees 10 Permissions SNMP field 134 personnel requirement for rack installation 59 to lift during installation 60 to lift unit during installation 56 Phone Book Version System Info eee 175 262 Phone Number Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field 706 Index Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences E E EE 135 phone IP details importance of writing down 78 phonebook FTP remote file transfers 326 pho
37. Band or the MultiVOIP detects DTMF tones at Band Inband its input and regenerates them at its output When DTMF Inband is selected the DTMF digits are passed through the MultiVOIP unit as they are received In 502c BRI software DTMF Out of Band can be checked or unchecked Out of Band RFC 2833 RFC2833 method Uses an RTP Mode SIP Info mode defined in RFC 2833 to transmit the DTMF digits SIP Info method Generates dual tone multi frequency DTMF tones on the telephony call leg The SIP INFO message is sent along the signaling path of the call You must set this parameter per the capabilities of the remote endpoint with which the voip will communicate The RFC2833 method is the more common of the two methods FAX Parameters Fax Enable Y N Enables or disables fax capability for a particular channel Modem Y N When enabled modem traffic can be Relay carried on voip system When disabled Enable modem traffic will bypass the voip system Modem Bypass mode Max Baud 2400 4800 Set to match baud rate of fax machine Rate 7200 9600 connected to channel see Fax machine s Fax 12000 user manual 14400 bps Default 14400 bps 101 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Valuee Description FAX Parameters cont d Fax Volume 18 5 dB Controls output level of fax tones To
38. Calls at UK y France National Rates Inbound versus Outbound Phonebooks To make the VOIP system transparent to phone users and to allow all possible free and reduced rate calls the VOIP administrator must configure the Outbound and Inbound phone books of each VoIP in the system The Outbound phonebook for a particular VOIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate locally typically in a PBX in a particular facility and reach any of its possible destinations at remote VOIP sites including calls terminating at points beyond the remote VOIP site The Inbound phonebook for a particular VOIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate remotely from any other VOIP sites in the system and to terminate on that particular VOIP Briefly stated the MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook lists the phone stations it can call its Inbound phonebook lists the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP Of course the phone numbers are not literally listed individually The phone stations that can originate or complete calls over the VOIP system are described by numerical rules called destination patterns These destination patterns generally consist of country codes area codes or city codes and local phone exchange numbers 222 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration In order for any VOIP phone call to be made there must be both an
39. Card Well Known Port Numbers The following description of port number assignments for Internet Protocol IP communication is taken from the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA web site WwWw iana org The Well Known Ports are assigned by the IANA and on most systems can only be used by system or root processes or by programs executed by privileged users Ports are used in the TCP RFC793 to name the ends of logical connections which carry long term conversations For the purpose of providing services to unknown callers a service contact port is defined This list specifies the port used by the server process as its contact port The contact port is sometimes called the well known port To the extent possible these same port assignments are used with the UDP RFC768 The range for assigned ports managed by the IANA is 0 1023 Well known port numbers especially pertinent to MultiVOIP operation are listed below Port Number Assignment List Well Known Port Numbers Function Port Number telnet 23 tftp 69 snmp 161 snmp tray 162 gatekeeper registration 1719 H 323 1720 SIP 5060 SysLog 514 359 Index MultiVOIP User Guide Index 360 MultiVOIP User Guide INDEX Alternate Phone Number field SPP Bl saciid oi iia 232 Dl eastestan inhosin 189 802 1p Priority Levels 89 90 abbreviated dialing inter office Bl us sais ea ieieh nuns A r
40. City but off the company s premises in an adjacent area code an area code different than the company s office but still a local call from that office e g Staten Island The first type of call requires an entry in the Outbound PhoneBook of the Miami VOIP and a coordinated entry in the Inbound phonebook of the New York VOIP These entries would allow the Miami caller to dial the New York office as if its phones were extensions on the Miami PBX The second type of call similarly requires an entry in the Outbound PhoneBook of the Miami VOIP and a coordinated entry in the Inbound Phonebook of the New York VOIP However these entries will be longer and more complicated Any Miami call to New York City local numbers will be sent through the VOIP system rather than through the regular toll public phone system PSTN But the phonebook entries can be arranged so that the VOIP system is transparent to the Miami user such that even though that Miami user dials the New York City local number just as they would through the public phone system that call will still be completed through the VOIP system This PhoneBook Configuration procedure is brief but it is followed by an example case For many people the example case may be easier to grasp than the procedure steps Configuration is not difficult but all phone number sequences and other information must be entered exactly otherwise connections will not be made 180 MultiVOIP User Guide T1
41. Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Series I analog VOIP phone book resides in the Host VOIP unit at Site B It applies to both of the Series I analog VOIP units Each of the Series II analog MultiVOIPs the MVP210 and the MVP410 requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks The MVP2410 digital MultiVOIP requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks as well 204 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration These seven phone books are shown below Phone Book for Series Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 102 200 2 9 8 2 Site B FXS channel 101 200 2 9 8 1 Site B FXO channel 421 200 2 9 6 0 Site E FXS channel 201 200 2 9 7 1 Site A FXS channel 1615 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip XXX Note 2 users access to local XXXX PSTN of Site D Pierre SD area code 615 3xxx 200 2 9 9 0 Allows remote voip users to call all PBX extensions at Site D Note Pierre SD using only four digits 1402 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip users access to local PSTN of Site F Lincoln NE area code 402 140226374 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip Note 1 users access to key Note 3 phone system extensions at Site F Lincoln 205 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Note 1 The x is a wildcard character Note 2 By specifying Channel 0 we instruct the
42. Copy Copies the Voice FAX attributes of Channel one channel to another channel Attributes can be copied to multiple channels or all channels at once Voice Gain Signal amplification or attenuation in dB Input Gain 31dB Modifies audio level entering voice to channel before it is sent over the 31dB network to the remote VOIP The default amp recommended value is 0 dB Output Gain 31dB Modifies audio level being output to to the device attached to the voice 31dB channel The default and recommended value is 0 dB DTMF Parameters DTMF Gain The DTMF Gain Dual Tone Multi Frequency controls the volume level of the DTMF tones sent out for Touch Tone dialing DTMF Gain 3dB to Default value 4 dB Not to be High Tones 31dB amp changed except under supervision of mute MultiTech s Technical Support DTMF Gain 3dBto Default value 7 dB Not to be Low Tones 31dB amp changed except under supervision of mute MultiTech s Technical Support 100 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description DTMF Parameters Duration 60 3000 When DTMF Out of Band is selected DTMF ms this setting determines how long each DTMF digit sounds or is held Default 100 ms Not supported in 5 02c BRI software DTMF Out of When DTMF Out of Band is selected In Out of
43. EE E 194 Add Prefix outbound field Bl E E EE T 229 Aa R OEE E E 186 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook field definitions Elaine 236 237 238 i EE E a EEA 194 195 196 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen EDP E AE N OEA EEA 236 a E E E EA E 194 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen fields E1 Accept Any Number 236 Add Prefix cccccccccssesesceceseesee 236 Channel Number 237 Description callee location 237 Enable Call Forwarding 237 Forward Condition 000 237 Forward Destination 00 238 Registration Option Parameters 238 Remove Prefix cc0eccecceeeee 236 Rin Count sscstseesssetisedes 238 Add Edit Inbound Phonebook screen fields T1 Accept Any Number 194 Add Pretix sscccsipcstidcotetecects 194 Channel Number 0 0 194 Description callee location 194 Enable Call Forwarding 194 Forward Condition 00 0000 195 Forward Destination 00 195 Registration Option Parameters 196 Index Remove Prefix cccceeseeeeee 194 Ring Count 196 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook field definitions BV ecscdss cote 228 229 230 231 232 A a EES 185 186 187 188 189 Add Edit Outbound Phonebook fields El Accept Any Numbet 228 Add Prefix ccccccecsseceeseesseeeeee 229 Advanced button cceee 231 Description 229 destination pattern
44. Firmware transfers the firmware including the H 323 protocol stack in the PC s MultiVOIP directory into the nonvolatile flash memory of the MultiVOIP Download Factory Defaults sets all configuration parameters to the standard default values that are loaded at the MultiTech factory Upgrade Software both implements the Download Firmware command and lets the user choose to retain the current configuration or to download factory default values Downloading Firmware 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program must be off when invoking the Download Firmware command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Download Factory Defaults command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download Firmware Download Firmware 09 a 3 Ss E Mult OIP 307 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 If a password has been established the Password Verification screen will appear Password Yerification Type in the username and password and click OK 4 The MultiVOIP ___ Firmware screen appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Mult OIP Firmware cance _ Click OK to download the firmware The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 308 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 5 The program will locate the firmware bin file in the MultiVOIP directory Highlight t
45. H 245 Values Y N FS Tun Description FS Fast Start or Fast Connect is a Q 931 feature of H 323v2 to hasten call setup as well as pre opening the media channel before the CONNECT message is sent This pre opening is a requirement for certain billing activities Under Parallel H 245 FS Tun this Fast Connect feature can operate simultaneously with H 245 Tunneling see description above Annex E AE Values Y N Description Multiplexed UDP call signaling transport Annex E is helpful for high volume voip system endpoints Gateways with lesser volume can afford to use TCP to establish calls However for larger volume endpoints the call setup times and system resource usage under TCP can become problematic Annex E allows endpoints to perform call signaling functions under the UDP protocol which involves substantially streamlined overhead This feature should not be used on the public Internet because of potential problems with security and bandwidth usage 116 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SIP Parameters Signaling Port 5060 IV Use SIP Proxy IV Allow Incoming Calls Through SIP Proxy Only r SIP Proxy Parameters Proxy Domain Name IPAddress Port Number Primary Proxy 5060 Alternate Proxy 1 5060 Alternate Proxy 2 5060 I Append SIP Proxy Domain Namein User ID UserName sda Password baa Re ReaistrationT ime 2600 secs Proxy Polling
46. IP products made by Multi Tech Systems Inc It describes two ISDN BRI MultiVOIP units models MVP810ST and MVP410ST The MVP810ST has four ISDN BRI interfaces and therefore eight ISDN B channels the MVP410ST has two ISDN BRI interfaces and therefore four ISDN B channels These MultiVOIP units can inter operate with other contemporary analog MultiVOIP units MVP810 MVP410 MVP210 MVP130 amp FXS FXO MultiVOIPs like the MVP130FXS MVPFX2 2 4 8 and MVPEFXS 8 16 24 with contemporary digital T1 E1 ISDN PRI MultiVOIP units MVP2410 and MVP3010 and with the earlier generation of MultiVOIP products MVP200 MVP400 MVP800 MVP120 etc The table below on next page describes the vital characteristics of the various models described in this manual How to Use This Manual In short use the index and the examples When our readers crack open this large manual they generally need one of two things information on a very specific software setting or technical parameter about telephony or IP or they need help when setting up phonebooks for their voip systems The index gives quick access to voip settings and parameters It s detailed Use it The best way to learn about phonebooks is to wade through examples like those in our chapters on T1 North American standard Phonebooks and E1 Euro standard Phonebooks Note that we have chapters on both T1 phonebooks and E1 phonebook even though this manual is about ISDN BRI voip units T1
47. Jarene niir inn 290 Port field SysLog Server 158 Port Number proxy server field 118 Port Number SMTP field 146 port number SNMP field 134 Port Number field SPP Outbound Phonebook BV i secetes EA cs ysseepsotei dues 232 Pd S ENERETT 189 power consumption 17 power frequency ceseeseeeeeees 17 PowerLED irpiri ua esses 15 powering of ISDN BRI phones MVP 4I10ST 8 10ST eee eee 63 Prefix Voice Fax Params field 109 Prefix Matched call progress field stibihle sien bunedyparheg mentors 269 Prefix Matched RADIUS Attributes field eo spa don ears et ae 154 Prefix Matched SMTP logs field 148 prerequisites for technical configuration 78 Primary Proxy SIP Call Signaling fieldics sricsivn wince e i 118 Primary Registrar SPP Call Signaling field eee 122 Priority H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 292 Priority Levels 802 1p 89 90 product CD eee eeeeeeeeees 18 use in software installation 67 product family BRI eee 9 Program Menu items 006 298 Protocol Type outbound phonebook Bl agescsichwattite a aici es 229 Til avestercek vet nith a ardent a 186 MultiVOIP User Guide Proxy Domain Name IP Address field terina heheh 118 Proxy Polling Interval SIP Call Signaling field ow 119 Proxy NAT Device Parameters Public IP Address eee 123 Q 931 Port
48. L u Grounding Screw NETWORK TERMINAL gt 3 MODE 4 MODE Ethernet Connection 1 QR i m j SDN f TA Ti 1 e e 1 n i s 1 1 1 1 1 NT1 Device is needed if PBX has U interface Figure 3 6 ISDN BRI Voip Connections for GND amp Remote Configuration Modem 6 Ensure that the unit is properly connected to earth ground by verifying that it is reliably grounded when mounted within a rack This can be accomplished by connecting a grounding wire between the chassis grounding screw see Figure 3 6 and a metallic object that will provide an electrical ground 7 Ensure that the MultiVOIP unit is properly connected to earth ground This can be accomplished by connecting a grounding wire between the chassis grounding screw see Figure 3 7 and a connector securely connected to the ground GND of the building s electrical system Ground Connection Details Ensure that the unit is securely and permanently connected to an earth ground GND with a ground wire of 18 gauge 18 AWG or thicker The ground wire needs to be installed between the grounding screw on the Multi VOIP chassis and a permanent earth ground Whether the MultiVOIP unit is used in a rack or on a desktop you must verify that the earth ground connection is permanent and reliable In order for the ground 64 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling connection to be considered permanent the grounding wire must c
49. MVP2400 2410 to choose any available data channel to carry the call Note 3 Note that Site F key system has only 30 extensions x7400 7429 This destination pattern 140226374 actually directs calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 into the key system as well This means that such calls which belong on the PSTN cannot be completed In some cases this might be inconsequential because an entire exchange fully used or not might have been reserved for the company or it might be unnecessary to reach those numbers However to specify only the 30 lines actually used by the key system the destination pattern 140226374 would have to be replaced by three other destination patterns namely 1402263740 1402263741 and 1402263742 In this way calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 would be properly directed to the PSTN In the Site D outbound phonebook the 30 lines are defined exactly that is without making any adjacent phone numbers unreachable through the voip system 206 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP2410 Digital VOIP Site D Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Bismarck 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to Rochester local PSTN using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate call
50. MultiVOIP Windows GUI because contact with the Windows GUI requires either a COM port or the USB2 0 to serial adaptor arrangement If you use this work around you must be sure to re set your command PC to its original IP address afterwards 26 Quick Hookups MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Hookup for MVP410ST amp MVP810ST ar a DODJI L S YNN quawdinba yromj u o uoyosuuos 4of papaau joy aonfiajul Ny ynm juawdinba yiomjau pup ENASI INASI SHod aovfiazun dioa u m q pasnbas ao1maq ILIN J dopv ppuru 10 auoyd NASI 0 SpP uuoI 10 aoyffo 09 2 40 X_d of 4OJ2aUUOD PI Wapopy puvuwop aul IMG NASI 0 Sjoauuos 4of 101S posnun UOP UUOI Spy UNASI quawdinba auoyd o buyqop i i i sens lt i wagon a El EA EA puewwog anwwwoo NOSI eNdsl zNasl punoly YUH 0 p uuop 6 dq 4aindwoo yw s0j2auU0D SLOPP UUOI NST Z SVY LSOLbdAW Mads SC Gd dIOAHINA P 40JD9UUOD S40JOQUUOD NCSI t SVY SOT 8SdAN 6urpunoip d auomyfos dIOAMINN 2 9D G208q 6uruuns sajndwoos 0 bunqop 21409 4amog 1S01L8 LSOLD dAW dnyooH dIOAINW NASI aaa ee 27 Software Installation MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Load MultiVOIP Control Software onto PC For more details see Chapter 4 Software Installation in this manual 1 MultiVOIP must be properly cabled Power must be turned on 2 Insert MultiVOIP CD
51. MultiVOIP using the two screws provided Position the left rack mounting bracket on the MultiVOIP using the two vertical mounting screw holes Secure the bracket to the MultiVOIP using the two screws provided Remove feet 4 from the MultiVOIP unit Mount the MultiVOIP in the rack enclosure per the rack manufacture s mounting procedure Figure 3 3 Bracket Attachment for Rack Mounting MVP410ST amp MVP810ST beee Figure 3 4 Attaching MultiVOIP to Rack Rail MVP410ST amp MVP810ST 60 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Cabling Procedure for MVP 410ST 810ST Cabling involves connecting the MultiVOIP to your LAN and telephone equipment 1 Connect the power cord supplied with your MultiVOIP to a live AC outlet and to the power connector on the back of the MultiVOIP as shown at top right in Figure 3 5 TSDN BRI Connections ISDN1 amp ISDN2 MVP410ST 8 10ST ISDN3 amp ISDN4 _MVP810ST on Grounding Screw TERMINAL 5 NETWORK MODE 4 MODE Ethernet Connection T Za Command Port Connection i NT1 1 Device 1 I aoe NT1 Device is needed if PBX has U interface Figure 3 5 Cabling for MVP 410ST 810ST 2 Connect the MultiVOIP to a PC by using a DB 25 male to DB 9 female cable Plug the DB 25 end of the cable into the Command port of the MultiVOIP and the oth
52. MultiVOIP web browser GUI or b by continuing to use the MultiVOIP Windows GUI If you want to do configuration work using the web browser GUI you must first set it up To do so follow the steps below A Set IP address of MultiVOIP unit using the MultiVOIP Configuration program the Windows GUI B Save Setup in Windows GUI C Close Windows GUI D Install Java program from MultiVOIP product CD on first use only E Open web browser F Browse to IP address of MultiVOIP unit G If username and password have been established enter them when when prompted H Use web browser GUI to configure or operate MultiVOIP unit The configuration screens in the web browser GUI will have the same content as their counterparts in the Windows GUI only the graphic presentation will be different For more details on enabling the MultiVOIP web GUL see the Web Browser Interface section of the Operation amp Maintenance chapter of this manual 96 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 8 Set Voice FAX Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Voice FAX Parameters Pulldown Icon Configuration Voice Channels SNMP Parameters Regional Parameters SMTP Parameters Logs Traces Supplementary Services System Information Call Signaling RADIUS NAT Traversal ISDN BRI gt Multi VolP Multi VOIP v5 08 DP Firmy Etherne
53. Open and then click the Autorun icon 3 When the Multi Tech Installation CD dialog box appears click the Install Software icon 68 MultiVOIP User Guide Software Installation 4 A welcome screen appears Multi Tech Systems Thank you for choosing Multi olP from Multi Tech Systems Click Next to continue installation Press Enter or click Next to continue 5 Follow the on screen instructions to install your MultiVOIP software The first screen asks you to choose the folder location of the files of the MultiVOIP software Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP 5 09 Installation Choose a location and click Next 69 Software Installation MultiVOIP User Guide 6 At the next screen you must select a program folder location for the MultiVOIP software program icon Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP 5 09 Installation BlinkBlink Power Batter CyberLink PowerDVD DYD Shrink FaxFinder Client Software ristell Stila Click Next Transient progress screens will appear while files are being copied 70 MultiVOIP User Guide Software Installation 7 A completion screen will appear Multi Tech Systems InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing the Multi OIP on your computer j Cancel Click Finish 8 When setup of the Multi VOIP software is complete you will be prompted to run the MultiVOIP software to configure the VOIP Software installation is complete
54. PBXs an 8 may be used to direct calls to the VOIP while 9 directs calls to the PSTN However some PBX units can be programmed to identify the destination patterns of all calls to be directed to the VOIP 3 PBX at Site D is programmed to divert all calls made to the 118 area code and exchange 943 into the VOIP network It would also be possible to divert all calls to all phones in area code 118 into the VOIP network but it may not be desirable to do so 4 The MVP3010 removes the prefix 0118 and adds the prefix 101 for compatibility with the analog MultiVOIP s phonebook scheme The is a delimiter separating the analog VOIP s phone number from the digits that the analog VOIP must dial onto its local PSTN to complete the call The digits 101 9435632 are forwarded to the Site B analog VOIP 5 The call passes through the IP network in this case the Internet 6 The call arrives at the Site B VOIP This analog VOIP receives this dialing string from the MVP3010 101 9435632 The analog VOIP seeing the 101 prefix uses its own channel 1 an FXO port to connect the call to the PSTN Then the analog VOIP dials its local phone number 9435632 to complete the call NOTE In the case of Reading Berkshire England both 1189 and 1183 are considered local area codes This is ina sense however a matter of terminology It simply means that numbers of the form 9xx xxxx and 3xx xxxx a
55. STUN H 323 POP3 and XMPP may require SRV support from clients Client implementations of older protocols like LDAP and SMTP may have been enhanced in some settings to support SRV DNS Server IP Address 4 places 0 255 IP address of specific DNS server to be used to resolve Internet computer names 94 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration About Service Records An SRV record holds the following information Service the symbolic name of the desired service Protocol this is usually either TCP or UDP Domain name the domain for which this record is valid TTL standard DNS time to live field Class standard DNS class field this is always IN Priority the priority of the target host Weight A relative weight for records with the same priority Port the TCP or UDP port on which the service is to be found Target the hostname of the machine providing the service An example SRV record might look like this _sip _tcp example com 86400 IN SRV 0 5 5060 sipserver example com This expression denotes a server named sipserver example com This server listens on TCP port 5060 for SIP protocol connections The priority given here is 0 and the weight is 5 95 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 7 Set up the Web Browser GUI Optional After an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit has been established you can choose to do any further configuration of the unit a by using the
56. This dialog box leads to 3 others one for each of the call signaling types supported H 323 SIP and SPP These dialog boxes can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or a sidebar menu Accessing Call Signaling Parameters Pulldown amp MultiVoIP Multi OIP 5 08 DP Firmware Dec 15 2005 Configuration Ethermet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt 1 Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alte L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl Alt y Call Signaling RADIUS Ctrl Alt U SIP Ctrl Alt S ft P NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt Sft SPP Ctrl Alt Sft S ISDN BRI Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Alt C Voice Fax fe Call Signaling H 323 SIP SPP ISDN BRI Accessing the Call Signaling Protocols Protocol H 323 Ctrl Alt 3 SIP Ctrl Alt Shft P SPP Ctrl Alt Shft S 111 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 JV Use Fast Start Signaling Port fi 720 I Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only r GateKeeper RAS Parameters IP Address RAS Port GateKeeper Name Primary GK 192 GS Sie Cancel Alternate GK 1 Oo 0 0 0 Help Alternate GK 2 Det Ole 0 RAS TTL Value GateKeeper Discovery Polling Interval I Use Online Alternate GateKeeper List r H323 Version 4 Options J H 323 Multiplexing Mux J H 24
57. Ty pe ss sisyssssssetiisistescsstas 89 Ethernet IP Parameter screen fields Enable DNS ccccccesseesseeeeees 94 Ethernet IP Parameters screen fields Call Control Priority 90 Call Control PHB 008 92 Diff SOry evamaria 92 DNS Server IP Address 94 Enable DHCP cccccsseeeeeee 91 Enable SRV ccccesceesecsseeeeees 94 FTP Server Enable 0 94 Gateway ia a A 91 Gateway Name 91 IP Addr S Sienan 91 IP M sk onenen inania 91 Others Priorities cceeceees 90 Packet Prioritization 802 1p 89 VEAN AD hs Acceich aster techie 90 VoIP Media Priority 90 Voip Media PHB eee 92 Ethernet IP Parameters screen ACCESSING eene aese ei 87 European Community Directives 349 factory default software settings 310 factory defaults downloading 310 factory repair for customers U S amp Canadas asccsescichesonevistcctenscnse 345 FAQ for MultiVOIPS ccceeeeeee 8 fast busy unobtainable tones 141 368 MultiVOIP User Guide Fast Connect 116 See Fast Start Fast Start compatibility 112 Fast Start plus H 245 Tunneling field a Ee EEEE E E spite ate 116 fax baud rate default 000 00 101 Fax Enable field 00 cceee 101 FAX Paramete s ccccccccceeseeee 101 fax tones output level 102 Fax Volume field 0 0 0008 102 FC
58. User Guide 3 Confirm Connection If the MultiVOIP is set for an available COM port and is correctly cabled to the PC the MultiVOIP main screen will appear If the main screen appears grayed out and seems inaccessible go to step 4 In the lower left corner of the screen the connection status of the MultiVOIP will be displayed The messages in the lower left corner will change as detection occurs The message MultiVOIP Found confirms that the MultiVOIP is in contact with the MultiVOIP configuration program Skip to step 5 84 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 4 Solving Common Connection Problems A Fixing a COM Port Problem If the MultiVOIP main screen appears but is grayed out and seems inaccessible the COM port that was specified for its communication with the PC is unavailable and must be changed An error message will appear Multi OIP COH B Error in Opencomm handle To change the COM port setting use the COM Port Setup dialog box which is accessible via the keyboard shortcut Ctrl G or by going to the Connection pull down menu and choosing Settings In the Select Port field select a COM port that is available on the PC If no COM ports are currently available re allocate COM port resources in the computer s MS Windows operating system to make one available Connection Help sonnect ot Hs Disconnect Ctrl D Settings Ctrl G Ctrl G B
59. as can be achieved using the Windows GUI As noted earlier logging functions cannot be handled via the web GUI And because network communications will be slower than direct communications over a serial PC cable command execution will be somewhat slower over the web browser GUI than with the Windows GUI 340 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance SysLog Server Functions MultiTech has built SysLog server functionality into the software of the MultiVOIP units SysLog is a de facto standard for logging events in network communication systems The SysLog Server resides in the MultiVOIP unit itself To implement this functionality you will need a SysLog client program sometimes referred to as a daemon SysLog client programs both paid and freeware can be obtained from Kiwi Enterprises among other firms Read the End User License Agreement carefully and observe license requirements See www kiwisyslog com SysLog client programs essentially give you a means of structuring console messages for convenience and ease of use MultiTech Systems does not endorse any particular SysLog client program SysLog client programs by qualified providers should suffice for use with MultiVOIP units Kiwi s brief description of their SysLog program is as follows Kiwi Syslog Daemon is a freeware Syslog Daemon for the Windows platform It receives logs displays and forwards Syslog messages from hosts such as routers switches
60. at this point You may proceed with Technical Configuration now or not at your convenience Technical Configuration instructions are in the next chapter of this manual 71 Software Installation MultiVOIP User Guide Un Installing the MultiVOIP Configuration Software 1 To un install the MultiVOIP configuration software go to Start Programs and locate the entry for the MultiVOIP program Select Uninstall Set Program Access and Defaults eS Windows Catalog ty Windows Update S WinZip Q Launch RealOne Player Programs an Accessories Macromedia FreeHand 9 IE Jasc Software IE Mozila Firefox Muttivorr 6 06 an SigmaTel MSCN Audio Player E Snagt 7 I Microsoft Office AS Acrobat Distiller 7 0 DX Adobe Acrobat 7 0 Professional I FaxFinder CallFinder Manager fm MultiVOIP 5 09 B Configuration B FaxFinder Client Software gt B Configuration Port Setup y B Date and Time Setup 5 Download Factory Defaults Z5 Download Firmware Z5 Download User Defaults B set Password 2 Upgrade Software 4cG a o 4 4 a a8 Ln 26 Col 1 REC TRK EXT ovR OZ fo Inbox Microso kA Jasc Paint shop J New Brochure Telephony Em 2 Two confirmation screens will appear Click Yes and OK when you are certain you want to continue with the uninstallation process Confirm File Deletion i 7 Are you sure you want to completely remove the selected application and al
61. available on your PC The default baud rate is 115 200 bps 176 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 21 Saving the MultiVOIP Configuration When values have been set for all of the MultiVOIP s various operating parameters click on Save Setup in the sidebar Configuration Phone Book Statistics Connection Help 22 Creating a User Default Configuration When a Setup complete grouping of parameters is being saved you will be prompted about designating that setup as a User Default setup A User Default setup may be useful as a baseline of site specific values to which you can easily revert Establishing a User Default Setup is optional Multi VOIP will be brought down OK Cancel Help 177 Chapter 6 T1 Phonebook Configuration North American Telephony Standards 178 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration T1 Versus E1 Telephony Environments Phonebooks for Series II analog MultiVOIP units MVP130 MVP130FXS MVP210 MVP410 and MVP810 and ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs MVP 410ST 810ST can be operated in either a North American telephony standards environment potentially operating with T1 digital MultiVOIPs or in a European telephony standards environment potentially operating with E1 digital MultiVOIPs The configuration of the phonebook is the same in either case However because the telephony environment is different in each case and the examples use
62. calls to Site A 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Rochester area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln area PSTN via FXO channel CH4 of the Site F VOIP 7 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln 263 key extensions with four digits 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre area PSTN via Site D PBX 31 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre PBX 492 extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 211 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 421 1 Call Completion Summaries Site A calling Site C Method 1 1 Dial 101 2 Hear dial tone from Site B 3 Dial 7175662 4 Await completion Talk Site A calling Site C Method 2 1 Dial 101 7175662 2 Await completion Talk Note Some analog VOIP gateways will allow completion by Method 2 Others will not Site C calling Site A 1 Dial 7175000 2 Hear dial tone from Site B VOIP 3 Dial 201 4 Await completion Talk 212 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Site D calling Site C 1 Dial 9 1
63. can be done remotely using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI The default IP address for the BRI MultiVOIP unit is 192 168 3 143 Remote system management can MultiVOIP User Guide be done via the MultiVOIP web browser GUI The MultiVOIP configuration software pack is included on the Product CD and the web browser accesses firmware in the MultiVOIP unit itself While the web GUI s appearance differs slightly its content and organization are essentially the same as that of the Windows GUI except for logging Current Perm rRegional Parameters Country Region USA v J Type _ Freq1 Dial Tone 350 440 0 0 0 _ Freq2 Cadence1 ms Cad2 Cad3 Cad4 Gain1 Gain 2 16 Busy Tone 480 620 500 500 5000 16 Ring Tone 480 440 2000 4000 16 Unobtainable Tone 480 620 Survivability Dial Tone 650 Reorder Tone 480 4 OK Cancel m Regional Parameters DialT one 350 RingTone 480 BusyTone 480 UnobtainableT one 480 Survivability DialTone 650 ReorderT one 480 The primary advantage of the web GUI is remote access for control and configuration The controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit itself must both be connected to the same IP network and their IP addresses must be known County Eesion AT Standard Tones Type Freg Freg Cadencefsecs On Ofr Gaint Gain2 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 000 4 000 2 000 4
64. can generally be considered a download from the perspective of the PC this type of download cannot be initiated from the MultiVoip software s Program menu command set Generally updated firmware must be downloaded from the MultiTech web FIP site to the PC before it can be loaded from the PC to the MultiVOIP Configuration Option The Configuration option in the MultiVOIP Program menu launches the MultiVOIP Configuration software program Configuration Port Setup The Configuration Port Setup option in the MultiVOIP Program menu brings up the COM Port Setup screen of the MultiVOIP configuration software COM Port Setup Select Port com M Baud Rate 115200 m Modem Setup Init String 4TSO 18E5 SB1152008D1 Init Response O D Dial String Connect Response CONNECT Hangup String ATHO NOTE If there is a Dial String specified in Modem Setup Configuration programs will try to initialize modem and dial this string 300 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Date and Time Setup The dialog box below allows you to set the time and date indicators of the MultiVOIP system Date and Time Settings z p Esn 17 E 11 17 25 AM X E Sarat 301 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Obtaining Updated Firmware Generally updated firmware must be downloaded from the MultiTech web FITP site to the user s PC before it can be download
65. code In general when there are fewer digits in your destination pattern you are asking the voip to handle calls to more destinations 2 The Four Types of Phonebook Digits Used Important Destination patterns to be entered in your phonebook will generally consist of a calling area codes b access codes c local exchange numbers and d specialized codes Steet Although voip phonebook entries may look confusing at first it s useful to remember that all the digits in any phonebook entry must be of one of these four types a calling area codes There are different names for these around the world area codes city codes country codes etc These codes are used when making non local calls They always precede the phone number that would be dialed when making a local call 41 Phonebook Tips MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions b access codes There are digits PSTN access codes that must be dialed to gain access to an operator to access the publicly switched long distance calling system North America to access the publicly switched national calling system Europe and elsewhere or to access the publicly switched international calling system worldwide There are digits PBX access codes that must be dialed by phones connected to PBX systems or key systems Often a 9 must be dialed ona PBX phone to gain access to the PSTN to get an outside line Som
66. ee 287 ISDN BRI Parameters TEI n Assignment eee 128 ISDN BRI Parameters fields Index COUnty isisisi ceisio 128 Dialing Options eee 128 Inter Digit Timer eee 128 Layer 1 Interface e 127 Operator sees eraa 128 Select BRI Interface 127 Switch Information 0 128 ISDN BRI Statistics screen fields Clear button cceceeeeeees 287 D Channel Information field BLOUP kee ae 286 Layer 1 Interface field group 285 Loss of Framing 285 Loss Of SYNC eeeeeeeecseeeeeeeeee 285 RX Packets secsistetsssesstecanidateettans 286 Select BRI Interface 285 SPIDOs vsscvouttite topar eisiea 286 SPIDI eurr nsina 287 State ir aaa a a R 285 Switch Information field group EE A EER 286 TX P cketSu nieis 286 ISDN BRI operating modes 63 ISDN BRI Parameter definitions 127 ISDN BRI telephony interfaces ISDN BRI telephony parameters 79 Java Installing oe eee eset eeeeee 338 web GUI and cceeeeeeeeeees 338 jitter buffer ee eeeeeees 107 Jitter Value Fax field 102 Jitter Value field oo cece 110 jitter dynamic s es 107 Keep Alive Timers NAT STUN 161 Keep Alive field eeeeeeeeeee 122 Knowledge Base online for Multi VOIPS ies ti irns aeee 8 Last button Logs Statistics screen 273 Last Error Link Management field Hartel lens ae aa E 283 Layer 1 In
67. eee 274 Outbound Digits Recvd 274 Outbound Digits Sent 274 Packets lOSt eeceeseeceereeeneeeees 275 Packets recvd eeeeeeeseeeeneeeeee 275 Packets senteci 275 Packets Sent eeseeeesreeeseeeeee 273 Server Details ceseeeeeee 274 Start Date Time 0 00005 273 SLALUS eo en na eines 273 Supplementary Services info 276 To gateway 273 Type call column 273 Voice coder 1 eeeeeceeseeeseeeeeeee 274 Logs Statistics function 272 Logs Statistics screen Delete File button 4 273 373 Index field definitions 273 274 275 276 First button sesser 273 Last button oo eee 273 Next button eee 273 Previous button sesse 273 logs and web browser GUI 157 logs by email illustration 150 Logs screen definitions 157 Logs screen field definitions 158 Logs screen parameters Enable Console Messages 158 Filters eare neess ese 158 GUI EEE E E 158 IP Address SysLog Server 158 Online Statistics Updation Interval sted sachin tes mints 158 Port SysLog Server 0 158 SMTP ed enun as 158 SNMP oa sbsschuesth es lpasckeatttanhab es 158 SysLog Server Enable 158 Turn Off Logs oeeo 158 logs screen ACCESSING u 156 long distance call savings A EE EAT 217 A A S EERE EATS 179 Loss Of Framing field ISDN BRI Statistics Layer 1 Interface
68. free calls BV E E S 218 TA PE E ENEE 179 Frequency custom tone field 142 Frequency tone pair scheme 138 140 Frequency 2 custom tone field 142 Frequency 2 tone pair scheme 138 140 frequency POWET ceeeeeeseeeee 17 FRETI ea nerea 102 From gateway statistics logs field TEE 273 front patel speicis 15 FTP client program eee 325 FTP client program obtaining 328 FTP client programs graphic vs textual orientation 335 FTP file transfers using FTP client program 328 using web browser s s s 328 FTP Server Enable Ethernet IP Parameters field cceceeee 94 FTP Server function as added feature ceeeee 325 enabling moicano 328 FTP Server contacting 4 330 FTP Server invoking download transfer using FTP client program 334 using web browse s s s 332 FTP Server logging in 331 FTP Server logging out 335 FTP transfers file tyPeS nereis eeeeeeeeees 326 329 phonebooks eee eee 326 Server location 326 FTP upgrade special instructions 325 function tracing on off logging 159 G711 coders RTP packetization VOICE LAX drene nisesh 296 G723 coders RTP packetization VOICE LAK aemaise 296 369 Index G726 coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX oo eeeeeeseceseceseceesteeeeees 296 G727 coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX oo eeeeeseceseseseeees
69. grounding in rack installations 59 MV PALOS T hiriei 64 MV P810S En greiere 64 grounding requirements 64 65 GUI log reporting type button 158 H 245 Tunneling field 115 H 323 compatibility eee eee 11 H 323 Annex E field eee 116 H 323 Call Signaling Parameter definitions 112 114 115 116 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only 112 Alternate GK 1 and 2 00 113 Annex E H 323 UDP multiplexing eee 116 Gatekeeper Discovery Polling nterval ieies soriire 113 H 245 Tunneling eee 115 H 323 Multiplexing 0 115 Parallel H 245 Tunneling with Fast Start aiia t i ra E 116 Primary GK 113 RAS TTL Value eee 114 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Register with GateKeeper 112 Signaling Port wo eee 112 Use Fast Start eee 112 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gatekeeper IP Address 113 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields RAS Port Gatekeeper 113 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gatekeeper Name 0 00 113 H 323 Call Signaling screen fields Gateway Name 113 Primary GK Gatekeeper 113 H323 COdEf icc cscciecvinasseiaes 103 H 323 fields Outbound Phonebook Bil EE EE 230 Dlg EAEE EESE 187 H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers GK N eoin 292 370 MultiVOIP User Guide IP Addressa 292 P rt eenen eine 292 POr eeni
70. incorrect or not being checked Incorrect 286 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance ISDN BRI Statistics Field Definitions continued Field Values Description Name Switch Information SPID 1 SPID 1 numeric SPID for channel 1 of the BRI number interface Otherwise same as SPIDO description above Status Not Checked Indicates whether SPID1 is correct Correct incorrect or not being checked Incorrect Clear Clears sets to zero all button ISDN BRI Statistics fields with numeric tally values these are Loss of Framing Loss of Sync Tx Packets Rx Packets 287 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide About Registered Gateway Details The Registered Gateway Details screen presents a real time display of the special operating parameters of the Single Port Protocol SPP These are configured in the Call Signaling screen and in the Add Edit Outbound PhoneBook screen Accessing Registered Gateway Details Pulldown Icon Statistics a Call Progress Ctri Alt A Logs Ctri 0 IP Statistics Ctrl P Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt w Link Management Ctrl 2 Alternate Servers Ctri Alt 4 gt ISDN BRI Statistics Ctr O Shortcut Sidebar Ctrl Alt W Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management ISDN BRI Statistics Reaistered Gateway Details E Servers 28
71. into drive Allow 10 20 seconds for Autorun to start If Autorun fails go to My Computer CD ROM drive Open Click Autorun icon 3 At first dialog box click Install Software 4 At welcome screen click Next 5 Follow on screen instructions Accept default program folder location and click Next 6 Accept default icon folder location Click Next Files will be copied 7 Select available COM port on command control computer 8 At completion screen click Finish 9 At the prompt Do you want to run MultiVOIP Configuration click No Software installation is complete 28 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phone IP Starter Config Phone IP Starter Configuration For full details see the Technical Configuration chapter of this manual 1 Open MultiVOIP program Start MultiVOIP xxx Configuration 2 Go to Configuration Ethernet IP Enter the IP parameters for your voip site Activate Packet Prioritization 802 1p if desired If you use a Domain Name Server DNS specify its IP address If DNS is used you can activate the Service Record SRV feature For details see the Technical Configuration chapter of the User Guide 3 Do you want to configure and operate the MultiVOIP unit using the web browser GUI It has the same functionality as the local Windows GUI but offers remote access If NO skip to step 5 If YES continue with step 4 29 Phone IP Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Star
72. just as they would with an ordinary PBX or telco switch When the phonebooks are set special dialing sequences are minimized or eliminated altogether Once the call destination is determined the phonebook settings determine whether the destination VOIP unit must strip off or add dialing digits to make the call appear at its destination to be a local call 10 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview H 323 SIP amp SPP Being H 323 compatible the BRI MultiVOIP unit can place calls to telephone equipment at remote IP network locations that also contain H 323 compatible voice over IP gateways It will interface with H 323 software and H 323 gatekeeper units H 323 specifications also bring to voip telephony many special features common to conventional telephony H 323 features of this kind that have been implemented into the MultiVOIP include Call Hold Call Waiting Call Identification Call Forwarding from the H 450 standard and Call Transfer H 450 2 from H 323 Version 2 The fourth version of the H 323 standard improves system resource usage esp logical port or socket usage by handling call signaling more compactly and allowing use of the low overhead UDP protocol instead of the error correcting TCP protocol where possible The MultiVOIP is also SIP compatible SIP means Session Initiation Protocol However H 450 Supplementary Services features can be used under H 323 only and not under SIP SPP Single Port Protocol is a no
73. l I of company s 14 employees l 204 16 49 73 PBX system extensions I I in Boise 200 to 240 I j I 91520 12 none none 204 Outgoing calls I 24 Channel 16 49 to Flagstaff i Digital VolP l KAES i MVP2410 6 3 none none 204 _ 3 digitcalls to I 16 49 Flagstaff a re a Penis extensions 600 630 hele pletion Santa Fe Office Area 505 I Santa Fe Voip Santa Fe Voip I Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook 204 16 49 74 I Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefixto Prefix IP Description l Remove __ to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove toAdd Addr Outgoing Calls 8 Channel I 91505 9 Incoming calls 91208 12 none none 204 Outgoing calls Analog VoIP I to PSTN 16 49 to Boise area MVP810 l Santa Fe local B I calls l 2 2 Incoming calls 77 3 none none a a set calls to PBX System i Ke Main Number i pe i po 444 3200 extensions I in Santa Fe 700 790 I 91520 12 none none 204 Outgoing calls R I 16 49 to Flagstaff PR 10 extensions 75 aea eee ee ee Il 6 3 none none 204 3 digit calls to 16 49 Flagstaff 75 employees extensions 600 630 rOle nmn Ai Flagstaff Voip Flagstaff Voip I Flagstaff Office I Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook I Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefixto Prefix IP Description I Area 520 E l Remove to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove t0Add Addr Outgoing Calls l 204 16 49 75 g
74. mvpttftp bin Note 1 You cannot upgrade 5 04 or earlier versions using FTP You must use upgradesoftware via the serial port using the Windows GUI Note 2 These ftp upgrade instructions do not apply to software release 5 07 and above Note 3 These instructions apply equally whether you use an FTP client to upload files or use a web browser in conjunction with Windows Explorer to upload files General FTP File Transfer Information MultiTech has built an FTP server into the MultiVOIP unit Therefore file transfers from the controller PC to the voip unit can be done using an FTP client program or even using a browser e g Internet Explorer or Netscape used in conjunction with Windows Explorer The terminology of downloads and uploads gets a bit confusing in this context File transfers from a client to a server are typically considered uploads File transfers from a large repository of data to machines with less data capacity are considered downloads In this case these metaphors are contradictory the FTP server is actually housed in the MultiVOIP unit and the controller PC which is actually the repository of the info to be transferred uses an FTP client program In this situation we have chosen to call the transfer of files from the PC to the voip downloads Be aware that some FTP client programs may use the opposite terminology i e they may refer to the file transfer as an upload
75. readily available under retail shareware and freeware licenses Read and observe any End User License Agreement carefully Two examples of this are the WSFTP client and the SmartFTP client with the former having an essentially text based interface and the latter having a more graphically oriented interface as of this writing User preferences will vary Examples here show use of both programs 4 Enable FTP Functionality Go to the IP Parameters screen and click on the FTP Server Enable box m IP Parameters m Diff Serv Parameters 34 Call Control PHB Frame Type TYPE 1 7 fas VoIP Media PHB IP Parameters I Enable DHCP IP Address 192 168 2 200 IP Mask 205 20200 4 20uy lt 2 VO Gateway x DNS Enable DNS DHS Sever Address FTP Server IV Enable 328 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 5 Identify Files to be Updated Determine which files you want to update Six types of files can be updated using the FTP feature In some cases the file to be transferred will have Ftp as the part of its filename just before the suffix or extension So for example the file mvptlFtp bin can be transferred to update the bin file firmware residing in the MultiVOIP Similarly the file fxo_loopFtp cas could be transferred to enable use of the FXO Loop Start telephony interface in one of the analog voip units and the file
76. same voice 40 kbps coder selected G 727 nine bps Default G 723 1 6 3 kbps as rates required for H 323 Here 64K of G 723 1 digital voice are compressed to 5 3 kbps 6 3K allowing several simultaneous 6 3 kbps conversations over the same G 729 bandwidth that would otherwise 8kbps carry only one Net Coder To make selections from the 6 4 7 2 8 Selected Coder drop down list the 8 8 9 6 Manual option must be enabled kbps Max 11 128 This drop down list enables you to bandwidth kbps select the maximum bandwidth coder allowed for this channel The Max Bandwidth drop down list is enabled only if the Coder is set to Automatic If coder is to be selected automatically Auto setting then enter a value for maximum bandwidth 103 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Advanced Features Silence Y N Determines whether silence Compression compression is enabled checked for this voice channel With Silence Compression enabled the MultiVOIP will not transmit voice packets when silence is detected thereby reducing the amount of network bandwidth that is being used by the voice channel Default on Echo Y N Determines whether echo cancellation is Cancellation enabled checked for this voice channel Echo Cancellation removes echo and improves sound quality Default on Forward Y N
77. se 349 FCC DECLARATION sisi isiscussissssveschiecbessocssutosctavvasysessheasiduys DEET Sa ETa ERTEKE E SES 349 Industry CONGG iiis cusecsecssinasiiassesisisondibesuseteceesseandbsk seshagssseivansdevasoseasesebets 350 FCC Part 68 Telecom icsccccccccsssscesscesssccssscessecesecesssecsseeesseecesseessseceesesaesseseeesaeens 350 Canadian Limitations Notice cc cccccccccecssccccecsseceeesseeceeeeeccsaesesseseesesseeesnenaeeees 351 WEEE Statement ccccccccsscccceessscesnsssecssnsccecussneceescsecenaesecesauecsenensessenneecsessseeens 352 APPENDIX A CABLE PINOUTS eeseesescosseseosoesessossesoossescososssesoesoesessossesosssese 353 APPENDIX A CABLE PINOUTS i proses segasesscosucsshestovesres neste A iea NE AEE EER eS 354 Command Cable meneen seeds Resins hehe Cue ga te Hag o ak As SE Se 354 Ethernet Connector rnemes e a EE cosghte Coa deas Contatel shes set 354 ISDN BRI RJ 45 Pinout Information o cccecccesc sete ceee eee eseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeaes 356 ISDN Interfaces ST And U noron ota eiieeii 357 APPENDIX B TCP UDP PORT ASSIGNMENTS ccscsscscssscscssssssesseseseees 358 WELL KNOWN PORT NUMBERS cecceessesscesecesecesecsecseecneecaeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeneesees 359 Contents MultiVOIP User Guide PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT LIST cccccccscscscecececececececeeesececeseseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 359 Chapter 1 Overview Overview MultiVOIP User Guide About This Manual This manual is about Voice over
78. simply refers to North American telephony standards whereas E1 refers to European telephony standards The printed Quick Start Guide shipped with your MultiVOIP and included on the MultiVOIP product CD in electronic form contains quick setup information for a minimal voip configuration Finally this manual is meant to be comprehensive If you notice that something important is lacking please let us know Additional Resources The MultiTech web site www multitech com offers both a list of Frequently Asked Questions the MultiVOIP FAQ and a collection of resolutions of issues that MultiVOIP users have encountered these are Troubleshooting Resolutions in the searchable Knowledge Base MultiVOIP User Guide Overview The table below summarizes the features of the MultiVOIP units described in this manual MultiVOIP BRI Product Family Description poeme 7 Model MVP810ST MVP410ST Function ISDN BRI voip ISDN BRI voip Capacity 4 ISDN lines 2 ISDN lines 8 B channels 4 B channels Chassis 19 1U rack mount 19 1U rack mount Mounting 1 BRI means Basic Rate Interface Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Introduction to ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs MVP410ST amp MVP810ST VOIP The Free Ride We proudly present Multi Tech s MVP 410ST 810ST generation of MultiVOIP Voice over IP Gateways All of these models allow voice fax communication to be transmitted at no add
79. since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software 280 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance About Link Management The Link Management screen is essentially an automated utility for pinging endpoints on your voip network This utility generates pings of variable sizes at variable intervals and records the response to the pings Accessing Link Management Pulldown Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Alt A Logs Ctl O IP Statistics Ctrl P Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt yw Link Management Alternate Servers Ctrl Alt 4 gt ISDN BRI Statistics Ctrl O Shortcut Icon Sidebar Ctrl 2 none Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics ISDN BRI Statistics 281 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide r Link Management m Monitor Link IP Address to Ping Ob Oe 0 Pings per Test ja Ping Size in Bytes 22 Response Timeout 1000 Time Interval between Tests jo min ms Start Now Clear m Link Status IP Address Pings Sent Pings Recei Round Trip Delay Min Ma Last Error 282 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Link Management screen Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Monitor Link fields IP Address to a b c d This is the IP address of the target Ping 0 255 endpoint to be pinged Pings p
80. site to voip site 218 voip system example digital amp analog with phonebook details voip system example digital only with phonebook details Bd PRR E ES 239 T a eeraa tria 197 voltage operating seeseseeeeseee 17 warnings safety seere 56 Warranty es on a 345 web browser GUI and logs 157 web browser GUI enabling 96 ANIALO Liss ssssyscssesthessecssveosstveuss terse 30 web browser interface browser version requirement 336 339 Beneral secede teas 336 Java requirement eee 336 prerequisite local assigning of IP addressa cinnin eas 337 video useability eee 336 385 Index web GUI Jav ANG rennene 338 remote control configuration and noaee A T Eat ESA CERP Eas 338 web GUI vs local Windows GUI COMPAFISON ossessi eeseeeeereeeee e 337 web GUI logging and 337 WEIGNE aeree eei Eoee e Niss 17 weight loading TD ee AE E E steer ies 59 weight of unit lifting precaution 0 0 0 eee 56 personnel requirement 56 Well Known Ports eee 359 well known port number SMTP e a n E ER s 146 well known port gatekeeper registration oseere 113 well known port H 323 params EIo erenn aaner 230 A a E EE 187 well known port Q 931 params F323 enata ude 112 well known port SIP Bl E tains 231 TH noes onion 188 well known port SNMP 134 XMT channel LED 15 Multi lech Systems S000385B 387
81. talking connection with another party while receiving another call Call Waiting while initiating another call Call Transfer or while performing some other call management function Hold phone The numbers and or symbols that the Sequence keypad caller must press on the phone characters keypad to initiate a call hold The call hold sequence can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or Call Waiting Y N Select to enable Call Waiting function Enable in voip unit Retrieve phone The numbers and or symbols that the Sequence keypad caller must press on the phone characters keypad to initiate retrieval of a two waiting call characters The call waiting retrieval sequence inlength can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or This is the phone keypad sequence that a user must press to retrieve a waiting call Customize able Sequence should be distinct from sequence that might be used to retrieve a waiting call via the PBX or PSTN 166 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Name Enables CNI function Call Name Identification Identification is not the same as Caller Enable ID When enabled on a given voip unit currently being controlled by the MultiVOIP GUI the home voip Call Name
82. that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the ISDN B channel port Default 16dB Cadence n n n n On off pattern of tone durations used msec On Off four integer time to denote supervisory tones specified values in by user Supervisory tones relate to milli seconds zero value for dial tone indicates continuous tone answering and disconnection of calls Although most cadences have only two parts an on duration and an off duration some telephony cadences have four parts Most cadences then are expressed as two iterations of a two part sequence Although this is redundant it is necessary to allow for expression of 4 part cadences 140 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 13 Set Custom Tones and Cadences optional The Regional Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box that allows you to customize DTMF tone pairs to create unique ring tones dial tones busy tones or unobtainable tones fast busy signal or re order tones telling the user that she must hang up an off hook phone or survivability tones an indication of call routing redundancy for your system This screen allows the user to specify tone pair attributes that are not found in any of the standard national regional telephony toning schemes To access this customization feature click on the Custom button on the Regional Parameters screen The Custom button is active only when Custom is select
83. the Yes button otherwise click No Yes No Cancel 4 A completion screen will appear InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on MuRiVOIP model version Click Finish 322 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Upgrading Software As noted earlier see the section Implementing a Software Upgrade above the Upgrade Software command transfers from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP unit firmware including the H 323 stack and factory default configuration settings As such Upgrade Software both implements the Download Firmware command and lets the user choose between retaining the current configuration values or downloading factory default values 1 From the Start menu invoke the Upgrade Software command Configuration Configuration Port Setup Date and Time Setup Download Factory Defaults Download Firmware Download User Defaults Set Password Uninstall Upgrade Software Tacos OP OE OH OH PP The Boot LED on the front panel of the MultiVOIP will come on 2 A confirmation screen appears and indicates that upgrading the software will involve rebooting the voip Mult OIP X Upgrade will Reboot the Multi OIP Do you want to continue Cancel Click OK to proceed 323 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 The Upgrade Configuration screen will appear It allows you to c
84. the network or Local terminal device to which the VOIP is Abbreviated attached Should this be the case then Number changing to a different Type of Number Plan might resolve the problem Unknown Support for the user to select the Called ISDN Numbering Plan and Number Type Telephone ISDN telephony CCITT E 164 E 163 Data Telex Telephony not in CEPT Data CCITT National x 121 Telex CCITT F 69 National Private Standard Reserved for extension Reserved There may be cases where the default Type of Number and or Numbering Plan may cause conflicts with the network or terminal device to which the VOIP is attached Should this be the case then changing to a different Type of Number might resolve the problem Typically setting the Called Party Type of Number to unknown and the Number Plan to Unknown will resolve such issues These problems normally occur for calls going to the ISDN from the VOIP numbers in the Inbound Phone Book 129 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI Parameter Definitions continued Field Name Values Description MSN Details MSN n Right most digits to be distinguished Multiple Subscriber Numbering MSN In Euro ISDN and some country specific variants it is possible to have several ISDN numbers for the same BRI or PRI connection This feature allows you to assign different ISDN numbers to different applications
85. two conductors from the telco central office to the customer premises The equipment on both sides of the U loop accommodates the extensive length of the U loop and the noisy environment in which it may operate At the customer premises the U loop is terminated by an NT1 network termination 1 device An NT1 device makes an end user s 4 wire terminal equipment compatible with the telco s 2 wire twisted pair ISDN BRI line The NT1 drives an S T bus The S T bus is usually made up of 4 wires but in some cases may be 6 or 8 wires S and T refer to connection points in the ISDN specification When a PBX is present S refers to the connection between the PBX and the terminal Terminal can mean any sort of end user ISDN device data terminals telephones FAX machines voip units etc Point T refers to the connection between the NT1 device and customer supplied equipment Terminals can connect directly to the NT1 device at point T or there may be a PBX private branch exchange i e a customer owned telephone exchange The figure below shows S and T connection points in an ISDN network Point S T 4 8 Wires Point T 1 N 48 Wires aN PBX Terminal Point S Terminal NT1 Point U 2 Wires Point S Terminal 357 Appendix B TCP UDP Port Assignments 358 MultiVOIP User Guide 8 Channel Analog Expansion
86. unit2 biggytech com a 80 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Config Info CheckList Type of Config Info MultiVOIP eis Gathered Configuration gE screen Ba u on which to enter Sle Config Info 4 IP info for voip unit Ethernet IP Parameters e IP address e Gateway e DNS IP if used e 802 1p Prioritization if used ISDN Layer 1 Interface ISDN BRI Parameters Choices Network Terminal Clock Master Status only a ISDN BRI Parameters channel designated as Terminal can be used as the Clock Master Switch Info ISDN BRI Parameters e Country e Operator e TEI Assignment e A Law or Mu Law Calling Party Number Type ISDN BRI Parameters Called Party Number Type amp ISDN BRI Parameters Plan Country Code Regional Parameters Email address for voip SMTP Parameters optional Reminder Be sure to Save Setup after entering configuration values 81 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Local Configuration Procedure Summary After the MultiVOIP configuration software has been installed in the Command PC which is connected to the MultiVOIP unit several steps must be taken to configure the MultiVOIP to function in its specific setting Although the summary below includes all of these steps some are optional 1 Check Power and Cabling 2 Start MultiVOIP Configuration Program 3 Confirm Connection 4 Solve Common Connection Pro
87. where call call originated was completed or answered Descript Identifier of site Descript Identifier of site where call where call was originated completed or answered Options When selected log Options When selected log will not use will not use Silence Silence Compression and Compression and Forward Error Forward Error Correction by party Correction by call answering call originator 155 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 16 Set Log Reporting Method You can access the Logs Traces screen by pulldown menu sidebar menu or keyboard shortcut The Logs Traces screen lets you choose how the VoIP administrator will receive log reports about the MultiVOIP s performance and the phone call traffic that is passing through it Log reports can be received in one of three ways A in the MultiVOIP program GUI B via email SMTP or C at the MultiVoipManager remote voip system management program SNMP Accessing Logs Traces Screen Pulldown Icon amp Multi VolP Multi VOIP 5 08 DP Firmwe Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Cul M Regional Parameters Ctl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl AlteY Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt Sttey ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar E Configuration Ctrl Alt L Et
88. which allows the caller to specify the extension to which they wish to be connected 256 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Site F calling Site D A voip call from a Tavistock key extension to extension 3117 on the PBX in Inner London A The required entry in the Tavistock Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 3 The string 02073988 is added preceding the 3 The call would be directed to the Inner London voip s IP address 200 2 9 9 B The corresponding entry in the Inner London Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 020739883 1 The caller in Tavistock picks up the phone receiver presses a button on the key phone set This button has been assigned to a particular voip channel 2 The caller in Tavistock hears dial tone from the Tavistock voip 3 The caller in Tavistock dials 02073983117 4 The Tavistock voip sends the entire dialed string to the Inner London voip at IP address 200 2 9 9 5 The Inner London voip matches the called digits 02073983117to its Inbound Phonebook entry 020739883 which it removes Then it adds back the 3 as a prefix 6 The Inner London PBX dials extension 3117 in the office in Inner London Variations in PBX Characteristics The exact dialing strings needed in the Outbound and Inbound Phonebooks of the MVP3010 will depend on the capabilities of the PBX Some PBXs require trunk access codes li
89. which this string MultiVOIP is trying to register A primary gatekeeper and two alternate units are listed 113 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Defns cont d GateKeeper RAS Parameters Field Name Values Description RAS TTL in seconds The H 323 Gatekeeper Time Value to Live value As soon as a MultiVOIP gateway registers with a gatekeeper allowing the gatekeeper to control its call traffic a countdown timer begins The RAS TTL Value is the interval of the countdown timer Before the TTL countdown expires the MultiVOIP gateway needs to register with the gatekeeper in order to maintain the connection If the MultiVOIP does not register before the TTL interval expires the MultiVOIP gateway s registration with the gatekeeper will expire and the gatekeeper will no longer permit call traffic to or from that gateway Calls in progress will continue to function even if the gateway becomes de registered Gatekeeper integer The interval between the voip Discovery 60 300 gateway s successive attempts Polling to connect to and be governed Interval by a higher level gatekeeper The Primary GK is the highest level gatekeeper Alternate GK1 is second Alternate GK2 is the lowest order gatekeeper Use Online When selected voip will seek an alternate Alternate gatekeeper when none of the 3 gatekeepers Gatekeeper shown on this screen ar
90. 0 ms The minimum dynamic jitter buffer of 60 milliseconds is the minimum delay that would be acceptable over a low jitter network Default 150 msec 107 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Dynamic Jitter Maximum Jitter Value 60 to 400 ms The maximum dynamic jitter buffer of 400 milliseconds is the maximum delay tolerable over a high jitter network Default 300 msec Optimizat ion Factor 0 to 12 The Optimization Factor determines how quickly the length of the Dynamic Jitter Buffer is changed based on actual jitter encountered on the network Selecting the minimum value of 0 means low voice delay is desired but increases the possibility of jitter induced voice quality problems Selecting the maximum value of 12 means highest voice quality under jitter conditions is desired at the cost of increased voice delay Default 7 Modem Relay To place modem traffic onto the voip network an application called modem relay use Coder G 711 mu law at 64kbps MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description CID Manipulation Disable checked Caller ID is disabled when checked OR and enabled when not checked unchecked When CID is disabled the CID from the
91. 00 2 9 7 201 EROAA Client ie i ee A E te Site F Site B ite B a Tavistock UK Reading Berkshire UK A APARO URR N Area Code 0178 200 2 9 5 Sf A a a 1 Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook MVP r Unit 100 kar 200 2 9 8 Host Holds phonebook for both Series 1 analog VOIPs pad Other extensions x7401 x7429 Ree 7 N S 263 7400 P sa 7 118 943 5632 ite C Reading Area Residential 246 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Series I analog VOIP phone book resides in the Host VOIP unit at Site B It applies to both of the Series I analog VOIP units Each of the Series II analog MultiVOIPs the MVP210 and the MVP410 requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks The MVP3010 digital MultiVOIP requires its own inbound and outbound phonebooks as well These seven phone books are shown below Phone Book for Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 102 200 2 9 8 2 Site B FXS channel Reading UK 101 200 2 9 8 1 Site B FXO channel Reading UK 201 200 2 9 7 1 Site A FXS channel Birmingham 421 200 2 9 6 0 Site E FXS channel Carlisle UK 018226374 200 2 9 5 0 Gives remote voip users access to key phone Note 3 system extensions at Tavistock office Site F The key system might be arranged either so that calls go through a human operator or
92. 000 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 250 0 250 0 000 0 000 Euston 16 12 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview Once you ve begun using the web browser GUI you can go back to the MultiVOIP Windows GUI at any time However you must log out of the web browser GUI before using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI Logging of System Events MultiTech has built SysLog Server functionality into the software of the MultiVOIP units SysLog is a de facto standard for logging events in network communication systems Logs MV Enable Console Messages Logs I Tum Off Logs GUI C SMTP C SNMP SysLog Server IV IP Address Port 514 Online Statistics Updation Interval 5 Sec The SysLog Server resides in the MultiVOIP unit itself To implement this functionality you will need a SysLog client program sometimes referred to as a daemon SysLog client programs both paid and freeware can be obtained from Kiwi Enterprises among other firms See www kiwisyslog com SysLog client programs essentially give you a means of structuring console messages for convenience and ease of use MultiTech Systems does not endorse any particular SysLog client program SysLog client programs by any qualified provider should suffice for use with MultiVOIP units Kiwi s brief description of their SysLog program indicates the typical scope of such programs Kiwi
93. 132 SNMP Parameter fields Address vi audeestissescentieiidesaectens 134 Community Name 2 134 Community Name 1 134 Enable SNMP Agent 134 Permissions 1 cceeseeeseeeeee 134 Permissions 2 ccscccesceeseeeeee 134 Port Number ceeeeeeeseeeeee 134 SNMP Parameters setting 132 software uninstalling detailed 72 software Multi VOIP uninstalling oseese 321 software configuration SUMMATY nosssssssssseeseeseteeeseeees steets et 67 380 MultiVOIP User Guide software installation d taled skorin ie 67 software loading esesesseeseeeseeeeee 67 software version numbers 69 software MultiVOIP moving around in eee 86 software Multi VOIP screen surfing IN eters 86 Solving Common Connection Problems yeer 85 sound quality improving 104 special instructions for FTP upgrades Sedat E E EE EE 325 SPIDO field ISDN BRI Statistics Switch Information 286 SPID1 field ISDN BRI Statistics Switch Information 287 SPP Call Signaling screen Mode SPP Protocol 5 121 SPP Call Signaling screen fields Alternate Registrars and 2 122 Client Options s es 122 General Options 0 0 0 eee 121 Keep Alive ccceeceeseeeseeeeeee 122 Max Retransmission SPP General Options 121 Polling Interval eee 122 Primar
94. 144 email log reports ceeeeteeeee 144 email logs illustration 150 EMC Safety R amp TTE Directive Compliance 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 349 Enable Call Fwdg Bl tii aii T 237 Plivien ardeditesie Save aie 194 Enable STUN field 161 Enable Accounting RADIUS field Hun Aree iia a Bein 153 Enable Call Hold eee 166 Enable Call Transfer 4 165 Enable Call Waiting 166 Enable Caller Name Identification 167 Enable Console Messages field 158 Enable DHCP Ethernet IP Parameters field cccceceee 91 Enable DNS Ethernet IP Parameters Held cach Ae Ree tokens tees 94 Enable SMTP field c ceee 145 Enable SNMP Agent 0 132 Enable SNMP Agent field 134 Index Enable SRV Ethernet IP Parameters feld sess lets eh ase inleei hides 94 enabling SMTP ee eeeeeeeeees 144 enabling web browser GUI 96 ANALOL eed csesepitesecotek E Ee 30 Error Correction RADIUS Attributes ceeecsseceeseeeseeeee 155 Error Correction SMTP logs 149 error correction forward 104 error message COM port conflict eee 85 Multi VOIP Not Found 86 Phone Database Not Read 86 ethernet cable pinout ee 354 Ethernet interface ccccceeesees 10 Ethernet IP parameter definitions 89 90 91 92 94 Ethernet IP Parameter fields 802 1p Priority Levels 89 90 Frame
95. 304 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The MultiTech web site also lists firmware by filename in its Directory of Firmware Directory of Firmware File Version MVP410ST 8105ST Installation Software and Firmware This file contains the MultiVOIP 410ST 810ST software and firmware for H 323 SPP and SIP installations This firmware also supports WEB Java configuration View the README file for more information View the README Models MVP410ST EU MVP410ST GB IE MVP810ST EU MVP810ST GB IE Multi OIP 2400 2410 Install software and firmware This file contains the Multi OIP 2400 2410 software and firmware for H 323 and SIP installations This file also supports WEB Java configuration Follow instructions in the README file View the README Models MVP2400 MVP2410 MY P210 410 810 Installation Software and Firmware This file contains the Multi VOIP 210 410 810 software and firmware for H 323 SPP and SIP installations This file also supports WEB Java configuration Follow instructions in the README file View the README Models MVP210 MVP410 MVP810 305 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Implementing a Software Upgrade MultiVOIP software can be upgraded locally using a single command at the MultiVOIP Windows GUI namely Upgrade Software This command downloads firmware including the H 323 stack and factory default settings from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP unit When u
96. 325 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide You can download firmware default configuration parameters and phonebook data for the MultiVOIP unit with this FTP functionality These downloads are done over a network not by a local serial port connection Consequently voips at distant locations can be updated from a central control point The phonebook downloading feature greatly reduces the data entry required to establish inbound and outbound phonebooks for the voip units within a system Although each MultiVOIP unit will require some unique phonebook entries most will be common to the entire voip system After the phonebooks for the first few voip units have been compiled phonebooks for additional voips become much simpler you copy the common material by downloading and then do data entry for the few phonebook items that are unique to that particular voip unit or voip site 326 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance To transfer files using the FTP server functionality in the MultiVOIP follow these directions 1 Establish Network Connection and IP Addresses Both the controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit s must be connected to the same IP network An IP address must be assigned for each IP Address of Control PC IP Address of voip unit 1 IP address of voip unit n 2 Establish User Name and Password You must establish a user name and optionally a password for contacting the voip over the
97. 410ST EU MVP410ST GB IE MVP810ST EU MVP810ST GB IE 302 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Once the updated firmware has been located it can be downloaded from the web ftp site using commands common to web ftp downloading File Download Security Warning X Do you want to run or save this file Name isdn_bri_506ak exe Type Application 6 10 MB From ftp multitech com Run Save While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not tun or save this software What s the risk As with other downloads you will want to put it in a fitting directory File Download Se Save As 2 Save in Multi Tech Systems z QO j N Es Fe O Admin Utility O TalkkAnytime 10 08 Dc D FaxFinder Client Software MultiVOIP 5 064k Th My Recent Multi Tech Device Manager O eie MultOIP 1 06 E MultiVOIP 1 07 MultiVOIP 1 08 Desktop MultiVOIP 2 06 MultiVOIP 5 08 Ly MultiVOIP 6 06 MultiVOIP 6 07 DNS MultivOIP 6 08 MultiVOIP 2410 4 06 PE MultiVOIP 2410 4 08 e O MultiVOIP 3010 4 06 O MultiVOIP SS 3 08 My Computer amp My Network File name fiscn_bri_506ak exe x Places Save astype Application O O H 303 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide The progress of the file transfer will be shown until finally the download is complete Download complete zx X
98. 5 Download User Defaults option description MultiVOIP program MENU eiennenn e ereen 299 downloading firmware machine perspective sses 300 325 downloading user defaults 315 downloads vs uploads FTP 325 DTMF Out of Band and Outbound Digits Sent cecsessesceesescees 149 DTMF Capability call progress field e EEA EE E E 148 Bo ka epee nee n n n ee tee Serres 274 DTMF Gain High Tones field 700 DTMF Gain Low Tones field 700 DTMF Gain field ccceeeeeee 100 DTMF In Out of Band field 101 367 Index DTMF inband eee eeeeeeeeeee 101 DTMF out of band eee 101 DTMF custom tone pairs 142 Duration call progress field 266 Duration DTMF field 101 Duration RADIUS Attributes field sb tnd pleats ase cd ype EEEN 154 Duration SMTP logs field 147 Duration statistics logs field 213 Dynamic Jitter Buffer field 107 Dynamic Jitter field group 107 Dynamic Jitter fields 0 0 0 108 E1 references in BRI manual about 8 earth ground oes 64 65 Echo Cancellation field 104 echo FEMOVING eecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 104 Edit selected Inbound Phonebook Entry icon BV EAA TS 224 A N EEA gush a 181 Edit selected Outbound Phonebook Entry icon BV EATS 224 A a E A T 181 email account for voip unit 145 email address for voip 80
99. 5 Tunneling Tun J Parallel H 245 FS Tun I Annex E AE The tables below describes all fields in the general H 323 Call Signaling screen H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Use Fast Start Y N Enables the H 323 Fast Start procedure May need to be enabled disabled for compatibility with third party VOIP gateways Signaling Port port Default 1720 H 323 number Register with Y N Check this field to have traffic Gatekeeper on current voip gateway controlled by a gatekeeper Allow Y N When selected incoming calls Incoming Calls are accepted only if those calls Through come through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Only 112 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Defns cont d Field Name Values Description GateKeeper RAS Parameters Primary GK 3 This is the preferred gatekeeper Gatekeeper for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate GK A first and a second alternate Gatekeepers gatekeeper can be specified for 1and2 use by the current voip for situations where the Primary GK is busy or otherwise unavailable Gatekeeper n n n n IP address of the GateKeeper IP Address forn 0 255 RAS Port 1719 Well known port number for GateKeepers Must match port number of GateKeeper 1719 Gatekeeper alpha Optional The name of the Name numeric GateKeeper with
100. 5077175662 2 9 gets outside line On some PBXs an 8 may be used to direct calls to the VOIP while 9 directs calls to the PSTN However some PBX units can be programmed to identify the destination patterns of all calls to be directed to the VOIP PBX at Site D is programmed to divert all calls made to the 507 area code and exchange 717 into the VOIP network It would also be possible to divert all calls to all phones in area code 507 into the VOIP network but it may not be desirable to do so The MVP2410 removes the prefix 1507 and adds the prefix 101 for compatibility with the analog MultiVOIP s phonebook scheme The is a delimiter separating the analog VOIP s phone number from the digits that the analog VOIP must dial onto its local PSTN to complete the call The digits 101 7175662 are forwarded to the Site B analog VOIP The call passes through the IP network in this case the Internet The call arrives at the Site B VOIP This analog VOIP receives this dialing string from the MVP2410 101 7175662 The analog VOIP seeing the 101 prefix uses its own channel 1 an FXO port to connect the call to the PSTN Then the analog VOIP dials its local phone number 7175662 to complete the call 213 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Site D calling Site F A voip call from Pierre PBX to extension 7424 on the key telephone system in Lincoln Nebraska A The requ
101. 6 uploads vs downloads FTP 325 USB2 0 port use with eee 26 USB2 0 to serial adaptor avoiding NEEd FOL oirra haves aie ages 26 USB2 0 to serial adaptor use of 26 Use Fast Start H 323 Call Signaling field orrori rai 112 Use Gatekeeper Outbound Phonebook field Bl E Riedinvieids bites 230 Plait ssid a eaveriicet 187 Use Online Alternate Gatekeeper List H 323 Call Signaling field 114 Use Proxy SIP field Bl EE Siete 231 Thee ea ae 188 Use Registrar field Outbound Phonebook a E E EE 232 Theirinn iie Beake 189 Use SIP Proxy field eee 117 User CID field eisi insest 109 user default configuration creating EE EE 177 user defaults downloading 315 user defaults setting 0 315 user name Windows GUL 317 User Name proxy server field 118 Index user values software saving 315 variations in PBX characteristics BLD ss E depen e eth fos 257 TT sceeetecttedertesnsecsinconsseteic testes tes 215 version numbers software 69 version firmWware ccccceeeeeees 306 VLAN ID Ethernet IP Parameters field voce eirin r ieri 90 Voice Coder call progress field 266 Voice coder statistics logs field 274 Voice delay siek 107 108 Voice Gain field eee eee 100 voice packets recovering lost corrupted 104 voice packets consecutive lost 110 voice packets delayed 107 108 voice packets re assembling
102. 72 2439 MUZ Cabling Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP O Figure 3 1 Unpacking the MVP 410ST 810ST 57 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Rack Mounting Instructions for MVP410ST amp MVP810ST The MultiVOIPs can be mounted in an industry standard EIA 19 inch rack enclosure as shown in Figure 3 2 Figure 3 2 Rack Mounting MVP410ST or MVP810ST 58 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling Safety Recommendations for Rack Installations Ensure proper installation of the unit in a closed or multi unit enclosure by following the recommended installation as defined by the enclosure manufacturer Do not place the unit directly on top of other equipment or place other equipment directly on top of the unit If installing the unit in a closed or multi unit enclosure ensure adequate airflow within the rack so that the maximum recommended ambient temperature is not exceeded Ensure that the unit is properly connected to earth ground by verifying that it is reliably grounded when mounted within a rack If a power strip is used ensure that the power strip provides adequate grounding of the attached apparatus When mounting the equipment in the rack make sure mechanical loading is even to avoid a hazardous condition such
103. 8 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance r Registered Endpoints Description IP Address Port Register Duration _ Status No of Entries ff Details Count of Registered Numbers jo List of Registered Numbers X 289 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Registered Gateway Details Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings Description alphanumeric This is a descriptor for a particular voip gateway unit This descriptor should generally identify the physical location of the unit e g city building etc and perhaps even its location in an equipment rack IP Address n n n n The RAS address for the gateway for n 0 255 Port Port by which the gateway exchanges H 225 RAS messages with the gatekeeper Register The time remaining in seconds before the Duration TimeToLive timer expires If the gateway fails to reregister within this time the endpoint is unregistered Status The current status of the gateway either registered or unregistered No of The number of gateways currently Entries registered to the Registrar This includes all SPP clients registered and the Registrar itself Details Count of If a registered gateway is selected by Registered clicking on it in the screen The Count of Numbers Registered Numbers will indicate the number of registered phone numbers for the se
104. 9 47 Success Voice 01 17 2002 amp 11 16 02 00 01 25 Success _ 01 17 2002 amp 11 21 02 00 00 33 Success Voice 01 17 2002 amp 11 51 26 00 00 00 Unsuccess Voice Voice 1 2 3 P 5 6 technical details will then appear in the log report that is automatically Call Logs SLNo From IP Addr To IP Addr 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 202 054 039 100 204 026 122 105 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 204 026 122 105 202 054 039 100 150 emailed to the VoIP administrator OutBound Digits Prefix Matched 4470 4470 4470 763717 Ms 470 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 15 Set RADIUS parameters You can access the RADIUS screen by pulldown menu sidebar menu or keyboard shortcut In general RADIUS is concerned with authentication authorization and accounting The MultiVOIP BRI units support only the accounting function The accounting function is well suited for billing of voip telephony services In the Attributes secondary screen accessed by clicking on Select Attributes the voip administrator can select the parameters to be tallied by the RADIUS server Accessing RADIUS Parameters Pulldown Icon Configuration Ethernet 1P Parameters Ctrl Alt 1 Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Ctrl Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctr Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary S
105. 91520 9 Incoming calls 91505 12 none none 204 16 Outgoing calls I l to PSTN 49 74 to Santa Fe I 8 Channel l Flagstaff local area I Analog VoIP I cal MVP810 l 6 6 Incoming calls 2 3 none none 204 16 3 digit calls to l I to extensions 49 74 Santa Fe l I of company s employees l l PBX system extensions PBX System I a 91208 12 204 16 aay T A 2 none none 204 jutgoing calls l Main Number l 49 73_ 10 Boise area l 7 3 none none 204 16 3 digit calls to i Re I 49 73 Boise 30 extensions we I employees I I extensions esa i i ao i 700 790 46 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Sample Phonebooks Enlarged Phonebook Example to extensions of company s PBX system in Flagstaff Boise Voip Boise Voip Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefix to Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove Outgoing Calls 91208 9 Incoming calls 91505 12 none Outgoing calls to PSTN to Santa Fe Boise Area area a 7 incoming calls 3 digit calls to to extensions Santa Fe of company s employees PBX system extensions in Boise 200 to 240 91520 Outgoing calls to Flagstaff area 6 3 none none 204 3 digit calls to 16 49 Flagstaff 73 employees extensions 600 630 Santa Fe Voip Santa Fe Voip Inbound Phonebook Outbound P
106. Advanced Phone Book Statistics Download Connection Help ET ETESIE Configuration E Advanced E Phone Book E Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book Add Entry Edit Entry E Statistics Save Setup E Connection Help EB p Inbound Phone Book 0044207 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Mab blame Number of Entries 11 p Details ChannelNo 1 Description Calls to Inner London r Registration Options m H323 Register as E 164 Tech Prefix H323 1D SIP Register With SIP Proxy SPP Register With SPP Registrar 234 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration 4 The Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen appears r Add Edit Inbound Phone Book J Accept AnyNumber Remove Prefix 0044207 Add Prefix 9 7 Channel Number Hunting hd Description Access to Inner London m Call Forward ME kz r Forward Condition I Unconditional J Busy I No Response Forward Destination H323 call Phone or IP address SIP call Phone or IP address or IP address port or Phone IP address port or SIP URL or Ph IP address SPP call Phone or IP address port or Phone IP address port Ring Count fo r Registration Options H323 Register as T E164 Tech Prefix m SPP I H3231D J Register With SPP Registrar SIP J Regis
107. BRI line is blocked Mode Transparent Transparent no changes are made to User the caller ID received from the BRI line Prefix User The entire caller ID received from Suffix the BRI line is replaced with the value listed in the User field oe Prefix The value listed in the Prefix field is added to the beginning of the caller ID number that has been received from the BRI line Suffix The value listed in the Suffix field is added to the end of the caller ID number received from the BRI line Prefix and Suffix The values listed in the Prefix and Suffix fields are added to the beginning and end respectively of the caller ID number received from the BRI line Default Transparent User CID string The option selected in the Mode usmg 0 9 field determines which of these sand fields is used with t to Caller i ields is used with respect to Caller Prefix string ID If Transparent is selected using 0 9 A and none of these fields is used instead Suffix string the Caller ID from the BRI line is using 0 9 used without alteration You can and use in this field either the values PrefixAnd two strings from the User CID field the Suffix using 0 9 Prefix field the Suffix field or and both the Prefix and Suffix 109 fields Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values
108. Biotin tae ates 186 378 MultiVOIP User Guide repair procedures for customers U S amp Canada oe eeeeeeeeeees 345 Reply To Address email logs field aR leds da Eat EEEE Esen E 146 Requires Authentication SMTP field eE E E EEEE 145 Re Registration Time proxy server PE EE EEE 119 Resolutions Multi VOIP troubleshooting 0 0 0 0 eee 8 Response Timeout Link Management field 283 Retransmission SPP General Options field oo eee 121 Retransmission Interval RADIUS screen field ce eeseceeseeeneees 153 Retrieve Sequence 163 166 REG 2782 secs os nnua otia 94 REG 283 3isc ish csscusitiestusvessayietiertuys 101 REC 3087 irie eeir esterne isora 188 REC 3489 siett eiere iners 160 RECATA a aarin eean 92 RFCS OTt eari nee aaie a sa 92 REC2833 ieii seirineise 148 269 274 REC3246 rrisin 92 REC768 inea irainen aaas 359 REC793 ireira aan 359 ring cadences custoM 0 143 Ring Count forwarding condition Blwscin atin E ards 238 PL iii state Ginette 196 ring tone CUSCOM eeeeeeeeeee 142 TING CONES 00 eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 141 Round Trip Delay Link Management field 283 Round Trip Delay field Bl avesaiasties train Mabe Ss 234 TA nwastsc biotch ET 191 RTP packetization ranges amp INCFEMENLS iiet osso esiis 296 RTP Parameters screen 296 Rx Packets field ISDN BRI Statistics D Channel Information PEE EEA E PERIE ea nee 286 Safety Recommendat
109. C Declaration 0 ccccceee 349 FCC Part 68 Telecom rules 350 FCC registration numbet 351 FCC rules Part 15 0 349 FDX LED 0 0 0 ceecccccesseceeeteeeees 15 Filters Console Message Settings 159 Filters button Console Message SettingS eatit ieies istis 158 firmware list MTS web site 305 firmware upgrade implementing 306 Firmware Version System Info eeeeseeeeeeees 262 Firmware Version System Info 174 firmware version identifying 306 firmware downloading 307 313 firmware obtaining updated 302 forgotten password 317 320 Forward Address Number Thren ate Fb ess 195 Forward Condition Call Fwdg EEL reann Gia seuec oles iin 237 Taa EN states 195 Forward Destination Inbound PhBk j m EE EE E A eee 238 A a EEEE 195 Forward Error Correction call progress field ssssneeseeeese 271 Forward Error Correction RADIUS Attributes onnisti 155 Forward Error Correction SMTP JOZE osiris enerne 149 Forward Error Correction field 104 forward on busy Eleroane n oes 237 Va EEE E E AE EEE 195 Forward upon No Response Bl aude con holes os 237 ds ene Pere eae eer EEE eee 195 forwarding dual conditions E1 MultiVOIP User Guide busy amp no response s 237 forwarding dual conditions T1 busy amp no response 4 195 frame relay and fax eee 102 Frame Type field 0 cece 89
110. Call Control Tun FS Tun Displays the H 323 version 4 Status AE Mux features in use for the selected call These include tunneling Tun Fast Start with tunneling FS Tun Annex E multiplexed UDP call signaling transport AE and Q 931 Multiplexing Mux See Phonebook Configuration Parameters in T1 or E1 chapters for more on H 323v4 features Silence SC SC stands for Silence Compression Compression With Silence Compression enabled the MultiVOIP will not transmit voice packets when silence is detected thereby reducing the amount of network bandwidth that is being used by the voice channel Forward Error FEC FEC stands for Forward Error Correction Correction Forward Error Correction enables some of the voice packets that were corrupted or lost to be recovered FEC adds an additional 50 overhead to the total network bandwidth consumed by the voice channel Default Off 271 Operation and Maintenance About Logs MultiVOIP User Guide Accessing Statistics Logs Pulldown Icon Statistics Call Progress Ctri Alt A Logs Ctrl O IP Statistics Ctrl P Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt4we Link Management Ctrl 2 Altemate Servers CtreAlted gt ISDN BRI Statistics Ctrl Q d Loge Details Shortcut Sidebar Statistics Call Progress Ctrl O IP Statistics Link Management ISDN BRI Statistics The Logs Screen r Log
111. CtrtAlteY Alb Ctr Alt U Ctrl Alt Sht e Ctrl F El Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces Supplementary Services Shortcut Icon V Ctrl Alt Sft 160 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Descriptions for NAT Traversal screen fields are presented in the table below NAT Traversal Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Enable Y N Enables STUN client functionality in STUN the MultiVOIP STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs Network Address Translation is a protocol that allows a server to assist client gateways behind a NAT firewall or router with their packet routing Name IP n n n n IP address of the STUN server Server 0 255 Port Server numeric The data port TDM time slot at NAT STUN default which STUN info will be transmitted 3478 and received Keep Alive 60 3600 The interval at which the STUN client Timers in sends indicator Keep Alive NAT STUN seconds packets to the STUN server to determine whether or not the STUN server is available 161 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 18 Set Supplementary Services Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Supplementary Services Parameters Pulldown Icon
112. Description Auto Disconnect Automatic Disconnect ion The Automatic Disconnection group provides four options which can be used singly or in any combination Jitter Value 1 65535 milli seconds The Jitter Value defines the average inter arrival packet deviation in milliseconds before the call is automatically disconnected The default is 300 milliseconds A higher value means voice transmission will be more accepting of jitter A lower value is less tolerant of jitter Inactive by default When active default 300 ms However value must equal or exceed Dynamic Minimum Jitter Value Call Duration 1 65535 seconds Call Duration defines the maximum length of time in seconds that a call remains connected before the call is automatically disconnected Inactive by default When active default 180 sec This may be too short for most configurations requiring upward adjustment Consecutive Packets Lost Network Discon nection 1 65535 1 to 65535 seconds Default 30 sec Consecutive Packets Lost defines the number of consecutive packets that are lost after which the call is automatically disconnected Inactive by default When active default 30 Specifies how long to wait before disconnecting the call when IP network connectivity with the remote site has been lost 110 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 9 Set Call Signaling Parameters
113. Determines whether forward error Error correction is enabled checked for this Correction voice channel Forward Error Correction enables some of the voice packets that were corrupted or lost to be recovered FEC adds an additional 50 overhead to the total network bandwidth consumed by the voice channel Default Off 104 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description AutoCall Offhook Alert Parameters Auto Call AutoCall The AutoCall option enables the local Offhook Offhook MultiVOIP to call a remote MultiVOIP Alert Alert without the user having to dial a Phone Directory Database number As soon as you access the local MultiVOIP voice fax channel the MultiVOIP immediately connects to the remote MultiVOIP identified in the Phone Number box of this option If the Pass Through Enable field is checked in the Interface Parameters screen AutoCall must be used The Offhook Alert option applies only to FXS channels The Offhook Alert option works like this if a phone goes offhook and yet no number is dialed within a specific period of time as set in the Offhook Alert Timer field then that phone will automatically dial the Alert phone number for the voip channel The Alert phone number must be set in the Voice Fax Parameters Phone Number field if the voip system is working without a gatekeeper u
114. Guide 2 The Add Edit Outbound PhoneBook screen appears Add Edit Outbound Phone Book m Phone Number Details T Accept AnyNumber Destination Pattern Total Digits fo Cancel Remove Prefix Add Prefix Help Advanced IP Address Description m Protocol Type ISIR m H 323 JV Use GateKeeper Gateway H 323 ID OoOo O Gateway Prefix oo H 323 Port Number 1720 SIP I Use Proxy r Transport Protocol TCP C UDP SIP Port Number 5060 SEURE s SPP I Use Registrar Port Number fi 000 Alternate Phone Number Enter Outbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit Note that the Advanced button gives access to the Alternate IP Routing feature if needed Alternate IP Routing can be implemented in a secondary screen as described after the primary screen field definitions below 184 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration The fields of the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen are described in the table below Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Y N When checked Any Number Number appears as the value in the Destination Pattern field The Accept Any Number feature works differently depending on whether or not an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protoc
115. IOST cee ceeceeseceseeeeeeees 61 MVPS81OST onosai 6l Cadence custom field 143 Cadence 2 custom field 143 Cadence 3 custom field 143 Cadence 4 custom field 143 Cadence field 0 ceeee 139 140 cadences CUSLOM cccccceeeereeee 143 cadences signaling 135 Call Control PHB field 92 Call Control Priority Ethernet IP parameters field 90 Call Control Status Call Progress Details statistics la ka Eee eee e ee 271 Call Control Status call progress field aimantar ri 271 Call Direction SMTP logs field 148 Call Duration field 0 0 0 0 110 Call Forward Parameters inbound phonebook El E E Sepak fete auton 237 Trpia arne 195 Call Forwarded To logs statistics field 276 Call Holdeni ienei 14 163 Call Hold Enable 0 cee 166 Call Mode RADIUS Attributes field pooh Gent EE E NA E T 154 Call Mode SMTP logs field 147 Call Name Identification 14 163 Call Name Identification Calling Party ooeec 168 Call Name Identification Alerting Party ieee 169 Call Name Identification Alerting Party sses 170 Call Name Identification Alerting Party ceceeeeeeee 171 Index Call On Hold Call Progress Details statistics Held rna 270 Call on Hold call progress field 270 Call Progress Statistics 264 Call Progress Details statistic
116. IP network When connection is made via a local serial connection between the PC and the voip unit no user name is needed ZJ MultiVOIP 2410 v4 03 Firmware Sep 06 2002 Microsoft Internet Explorer m File Edit View Favorite Back z Address http 192 168 2 200 a MultiVOIP 2410 gt Configuration Multi ec i Phone Book Systems Statistics Change Pass Save amp Reboo Logout Current Permission Read Write Help Password Change Old Password New Password Reconfirm Password As shown above the username and password can be set in the web GUI as well as in the Windows GUI 327 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 Install FTP Client Program or Use Substitute You should install an FTP client program on the controller PC FTP file transfers can be done using a web browser e g Netscape or Internet Explorer in conjunction with a local Windows browser a e g Windows Explorer but this approach is somewhat clumsy it requires use of two application programs rather than one and it limits downloading to only one VOIP unit at a time With an FTP client program multiple voips can receive FTP file transmissions in response to a single command the transfers may occur serially however Although MultiTech does not provide an FTP client program with the MultiVOIP software or endorse any particular FTP client program we remind our readers that adequate FTP programs are
117. IP system is making calls between the offices where the VOIPs are located Consider for example the Wren Clothing Company This company has VOIP equipped offices in London Paris and Amsterdam each served by its own PBX VOIP calls between the three offices completely avoid international long distance charges These calls are free The phonebooks can be set up to allow all Wren Clothing employees to contact each other using 3 4 or 5 digit numbers as though they were all in the same building United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site London a Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Paris ___ _ Free VOIP Calls France 218 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Local Rate Calls Within Local Calling Area of Remote VOIP In the second use of the VOIP system the local calling area of each VOIP location becomes accessible to all of the VOIP system s users As a result international calls can be made at local calling rates For example suppose that Wren Clothing buys its zippers from The Bluebird Zipper Company in the western part of metropolitan London In that case Wren Clothing personnel in both Paris and Amsterdam could call the Bluebird Zipper Company without paying international long distance rates Only London local phone rates would be charged This applies to calls completed anywhere in London s local callin
118. Identification sends an identifier and status information to the administrator of the remote voip involved in the call The feature operates on a channel by channel basis each channel can have a separate identifier If the home voip is originating the call only the Calling Party field is applicable If the home voip is receiving the call then the Alerting Party Busy Party and Connected Party fields are the only applicable fields and any or all of these could be enabled for a given voip channel The status information confirms back to the originator that the callee the home voip is either busy or ringing or that the intended call has been completed and is currently connected The identifier and status information are made available to the remote voip unit and appear in the Caller ID field of its Statistics Call Progress screen This is how MultiVOIP units handle CNI messages in other voip brands H 450 may be implemented differently and then the message presentation may vary Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Calling If the home voip unit is originating Party the call and Calling Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will be sent to the remote voip CNI unit being called The Caller Id field gives the remote voip administrator a plain language identifier o
119. Interval jeo secs TTL Value feo secs OK Cancel Help The tables below describes all fields in the general SIP Call Signaling screen SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description SIP Proxy Parameters Signaling Port Port number on which the MultiVOIP UserAgent software module will be waiting for any incoming SIP requests Use SIP Proxy Y N Allows the MultiVOIP to work in conjunction with a proxy server 117 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions contd Field Name Values Description SIP Proxy Parameters Allow Y N When selected incoming calls Incoming Calls are accepted only if those calls Through SIP come through the gatekeeper Proxy Only Primary Proxy This is the preferred SIP proxy server for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate ae A first and a second alternate SIP Proxy 1 and 2 proxy server can be specified for use by the current voip for situations where the Primary proxy server is busy or otherwise unavailable Proxy Domain n n n n Network address of the proxy Name IP where server that the voip is using Address n 0 255 Append SIP Y N When checked the domain Proxy Domain Name in User ID name of the SIP Proxy serving the MultiVOIP gateway will be included as part of the User ID for that gateway If unchecked
120. L SPP Use Registrar Port Number fi 0000 Alternate Phone Number J Remote Device is MultolP 110 120 200 400 800 Enter Outbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit Note that the Advanced button gives access to the Alternate IP Routing feature if needed Alternate IP Routing can be implemented in a secondary screen as described after the primary screen field definitions below 227 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The fields of the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen are described in the table below Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Y N When checked Any Number Number appears as the value in the Destination Pattern field The Any Number feature works differently depending on whether or not an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the IP Address in the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Destination Patterns When external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the external routing device used Gatekeeper f
121. LEPHONY ENVIRONMENTB sscssccececeessseceeececsesssnsceeeeeceenas 217 E1 STANDARD INBOUND AND OUTBOUND MULTIVOIP PHONEBOOKS 0006 217 Free Calls One VOIP Site to ANOthe rn cccccccccccccccccccccscccecececececscesscessessssseseseees 218 Local Rate Calls Within Local Calling Area of Remote VOIP 0 0000 219 National Rate Calls Within Nation of Remote VOIP Site 221 Inbound versus Outbound PhOn DOOKS ccccccccccececesesssscececececscecscscsesssssesseeseees 222 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE cccessesssceeececsessnsececeeeceesenssseceeeeeenes 226 E1 PHONEBOOK EXAMPLEG sssscsccccccecsssscccecccecsesseaccecececsessnaeaecececsessseaececeesenes 239 3 Sites All E Example siorr oinin a Ea i EE R ETES 239 Configuring Digital amp Analog VOIPs in Same System 246 Call Completion S timmiaries senere eeren te voter eves dean E EES E EAS 254 Variations in PBX CHArACter istics ccccccccccccccecececececececececesecececeseceseseseseseseseseeees 257 International Telephony Numbering Plan Resources 258 CHAPTER 8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE eessseesseceessecesssecssssessoceessee 260 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE cccccccessssessccecececeessaececcceceeneseeecececsesenssaeeeeseeenes 261 System Information SCCM cccccesccescesecesecssecnseeseeeseeeseesseeeeeeseeeseceaecnsecnsecaeenas 261 Statisties Sereen S nores itate eie AE A E E E EE E Ei 264 About Call Progresser E A EAEN E EOE EOIN 264 Ab
122. London is access codes are used in listed as 0207 However in combination a leading 1 or 0 international calls the leading must sometimes be dropped 0 is dropped U K Country Code Phonebook Entry 0044207 International J E Leading Zero Access Code Dropped from Area Code 42 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Tips 4 Using a Comma Detail Commas are used in telephone dialing strings to indicate a pause 1 second pause to allow a dial tone to appear common on PBX and key in many PBX systems systems Commas may be used not needed in all only in the Add Prefix field of the Inbound Phonebook 5 Ease of Use The phonebook setup determines how easy the voip system is to use Generally you ll want to make it so dialing a voip call is very similar to dialing any other number on the PSTN or through the PBX 6 Avoid Unintentional Calls to Official Emergency Numbers Dialing a voip call will typically be somewhat different than ordinary dialing Because of this it s possible to set up situations quite unwittingly where phone users may be predisposed to call official numbers without intending to do so Conversely a voip PBX system might also make it difficult to place an official emergency call when one intends to do so Study your phonebook setup and do some test dialing on the system to avoid these pitfalls 7 Inbound Outbound Pattern Matching In
123. MP Parameters Remote Voip Management SNMP and MultiVoipManager are not supported for BRI MultiVOIPs Please skip to step 12 This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar To make the MultiVOIP controllable by a remote PC running the MultiVoipManager software check the Enable SNMP Agent box on the SNMP Parameters screen Accessing SNMP Parameters Pulldown Icon amp MultiVolIP Multi OIP 5 08 DP Firmwe ant Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctrl Alt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctr Call Signaling Alte RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt S tev ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl M Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI Regional 132 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration In each field enter the values that fit your particular system ReadOny pubie Read Write aa Read Onl Read Write I 133 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The SNMP Parameter fields are described in the table below SNMP Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable SNMP Y N Enables the SNMP code in the Agent firmware of the MultiVOIP This must be enabled for the MultiVOIP to communicate wit
124. MT and RCV 6 SG odode ododo O5OGO odode Mutti Multieci Figure 1 2 MVP 410ST 810ST LEDs 14 MultiVOIP User Guide Overview ISDN BRI MultiVOIP LED Descriptions MVP 410ST 810ST Front Panel LED Definitions LED NAME DESCRIPTION General Operation LEDs one set on each MultiVOIP model Power Indicates presence of power Boot After power up the Boot LED will be on briefly while the MultiVOIP is booting It lights whenever the MultiVOIP is booting or downloading a setup configuration data set Ethernet FDX LED indicates whether Ethernet connection is half duplex or full duplex FDX and in half duplex mode indicates occurrence of data collisions LED is on constantly for full duplex mode LED is off constantly for half duplex mode When operating in half duplex mode the LED will flash during data collisions LNK Link Activity LED This LED is lit if Ethernet connection has been made It is off when the link is down i e when no Ethernet connection exists While link is up this LED will flash off to indicate data activity D Channel Operation LEDs one for each ISDN line D ISDN D channel amp physical layer indicator One D LED for each ISDN BRI connection The D LED is off when the BRI physical layer is de activated It flashes when a connection is being established on the physical layer It is on when the physical layer has been activat
125. Muti Voice Fax over IP Networks User Guide for Voice IP Gateways ISDN BRI Modas MVP4105T MVPS105T Multi lech Systems User Guide 000385B ISDN BRI MultiVOIP Units Models MVP410ST amp MVP810ST This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without prior expressed written permission from Multi Tech Systems Inc All rights reserved Copyright 2007 by Multi Tech Systems Inc Multi Tech Systems Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Furthermore Multi Tech Systems Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation of Multi Tech Systems Inc to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes Check Multi Tech s web site for current versions of our product documentation Record of Revisions Revision Description A Doc re organization Follows S000249K 08 29 06 Describes 5 08 software release B Describes 5 09 software release Revised Voice Fax Parameters screen 01 12 07 Patents This Product is covered by one or more of the following U S Patent Numbers 6151333 5757801 5682386 5 301 274 5 309 562 5 355 365 5 355 653 5 452 289 5 453 986 Other Patents Pending Trademark Multi Tech and the Multi Tech logo are registered trademarks of M
126. NA a 231 Tea A ce EA EA 188 triggering log report email 146 Troubleshooting Resolutions for Multi VOIPS 000 eeececeseceeeeeseeeeee 8 TTL Value SIP Call Signaling field EEEE EAEE noes 119 Turn Off Logs field eee 158 Tx Packets field ISDN BRI Statistics D Channel Information 286 Type call statistics logs field 273 Type H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field ceeecsseeeeee 292 Type of tone Regional Parameters held hesctccs heer eee 138 Type SIP Proxies Statistics Servers feldunai honaren n i 293 Type SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ccceceesseceeees 294 Type of Service IP header field amp DiffServ aciona ara 93 U interface description seses 357 UDP multiplexed H 323 Annex E field iscinktchincle ets 116 UDP TCP compared BD E E 231 IP Statistics context 277 Deitel Barth E 188 unconditional forwarding Biases AREE 237 383 Index Uninstall option description MultiVOIP program menu 299 uninstalling MultiVOIP software 72 321 unobtainable tone custom 142 unobtainable tones 141 UNPacking ce eecesesseesecneeeeeneeeeeees 57 MVPSIOST ooer 57 MVPS8IOST 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 57 Up Time System Info eee 175 262 update interval logging 157 updated firmware obtaining 302 Upgrade Software option description MultiVOIP program menu 299 upgrade firmware s s s 30
127. Number outbound phonebook field BD ahcghittess tors hati tains 230 TA hs getiees E EE 187 quality Of ServiCe ceeeeseeseeteees 11 rack mounting QLOUNCING 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 Safety s s eo aan 56 59 rack mounting instructions 58 rack mounting procedure 60 rack equipment weight capacity Of eee 59 rack mountable voip models 56 RADIUS accounting parameters CUStOMIZING 0 cee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 155 RADIUS Accounting parameters CUStOMIZING ec eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 154 RADIUS Attributes Bytes Received n se 154 Bytes Sent eee cires 154 Call Modenie niini 154 Call Status eee 154 Channel Numbet 00 0 154 Coderen rann a 154 Options soniais niies 155 Options siiin niais 155 Description callee 6 155 Description caller 05 155 Disconnect Reason 00 154 Duration e ceeceeseeseeeteeeeeeeee 154 From Gateway Number 155 From IP Address eceeeees 155 Outbound Digits sent 154 Packets LOSt eeeseeeesreeeseeeee 154 Packets Received 00 154 Packets Senteinde 154 Prefix Matched ccee 154 Select All i205 ckadeanie ae 154 Server Details cece 154 Start Date Time 0 154 To Gateway Numbet 155 To IP Address eeeeeeseeeeee 155 377 Index RADIUS Attributes definitions 154 RADIUS Att
128. Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the call has been completed to Omaha Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Caller ID This is the identifier of a specific channel of the home voip unit The Caller Id field typically describes a person office or location for example Harry Smith or Bursar s Office or Barnesville Factory Default When this button is clicked all Supplementary Service parameters are set to their default values Copy Copies the Supplementary Service Channel attributes of one channel to another channel Attributes can be copied to multiple channels or all channels at once 172 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 19 View the System Information screen and set the updating interval optional This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu sidebar menu or keyboard shortcut Accessing System Information Screen Pulldown Sidebar gt MultiVolP MultiVOIP 5 08 DP Firm Configuration Ethemet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt l Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctr R SMTP Parameters CtreAlt S Logs Traces Ctri Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H
129. PhoneBook Configuration Phonebook configuration screens can be accessed using icons or the sidebar menu Phonebook Icons Description Phone Book leone Phonebook Configuration D ee ee amp B Phone Book Icons a A a py ke amp B Anne Danian a Phonebook E Bi S oSI Edit selected Inbound a Phonebook Entry CIETFEN Outbound Phonebook Entries List Boe A 2 e amp Ee Phone Book Icons A E m B28 2B Bi E Bute Te oi Edit selected Outbound B p B a i Phonebook Entry 181 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook Pulldown Menu Phone Book Outbound Phone Book Alt O gt List Entries Ctrl L Inbound Phone Boo Ls Alt gt AddeEntry cCtri 4 Edit Entry Ctrl E Inbound Phonebook Shortcut Outbound Phonebook Shortcut Alt I Alt O Phonebook Sidebar Menu Configuration Advanced Phone Book Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Statistics 182 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration 1 Select Outbound Phone Book List Entries Fields in the Details section will differ depending on the protocol H 323 SIP or SPP of the selected list entry to which the details pertain ce amp Area 200 022 209 007 Click Add 183 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User
130. R VoIP Wren Clothing Co Te CJ Fa Amsterdam Office 29 82 Country Code 31 Te E1 Area City Code 020 74 71 29 81 E 688 4800 242 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s London facility 200 002 009 007 Lyon 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam 200 002 008 005 Rotterdam 200 002 009 007 Paris company office empl extensions 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam company office employees The Inbound PhoneBook for the London VOIP is shown below NOTE Commas are allowed in the Inbound Phonebook but not in the Outbound Phonebook Commas denote a brief pause for a dial tone allowing time for the PBX to get an outside line 243 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s Paris facility 200 002 008 005 Rotterdam 200 002 010 003 London Inner 200 002 010 003 London Outer 200 002 010 003 Guildford 200 002 010 003 London company office empl extensions 200 002 008 005 Amsterdam company office employees The Inbound PhoneBook for the Paris VOIP is shown below 244 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP in the company s Amsterdam facility 200 002 010 003 London inner 200 002 010 003 Guildford 200 002 009 007 Pa
131. RT INSTRUCTIONG cccsscssssssssssssssssssscsssseees 19 INTRODUCTION irre sec ses sopudets de satoctateecdeped ace cblsepedies e dbeassupedeauaueectuszeeoa dees seas exe 20 SAFETY WARNINGS coc cusececssy cocnsecesvevedte E dace caus E A ERSE EE rE ESE 20 Lithium Battery Caution ossssesseeesesseseeesrereesesresresrsressrsreesesresresereresesrensesrestsse 20 Safety Warnings TelecoMesue senene eite eeraa a e eaea 20 MULTIVOIP STARTUP TASKS eitir rer eo a a EE a e EE E EEEE ENEE AROEN svbonete 21 Phone IP Details Absolutely Needed Before Starting the Installation 22 Gather IP Information ccccccccccssccssscssseessecsscccsseesseeeeecsseceseeceseeeseeceseeseseesseeeseeeneeees 22 Gather Telephone Information nesini ana Ea E AEEA S EE EEE As 22 Obtain Email Address for VOIP for email call log reporting 23 Contig Info Check Lists cscop d schol E a essence nae E e E ae E ENS Identify Remote VOIP Site to Call Identify VOIP Protocol to be Used Placement e R ENEE E ARENE T uae odbessaeedlyscsyasts ANELSE Command Control Computer Setup Specs amp Settings aessesssesecerersereesree 26 Load MultiVOIP Control Software onto PC 28 Phone IP Starter Confi guration c ccccccccccccccssscesecesecesecssecssecseesseeseeeseeseeeseensees 29 Phonebook Starter Configuration With remote VOIp 1 ccccseseeeseeeseeteeeeees 34 Outbound Phonebook asra tess ass cess ass oh waa ec heins hg eases EEA EENE AETIA UERS 34 Inbo
132. RTP and RTCP packets and the Call Control PHB field relates to the prioritzing of non audio packets packets concerning call set up and tear down gatekeeper registration etc The MultiVOIP Call Control PHB parameter defaults to 34 decimal 22 hex 100010 binary consider vis a vis TOS field above for Assured Forwarding behavior The MultiVOIP Voip Media PHB parameter defaults to the value 46 decimal 2E hex 101110 binary consider vis a vis TOS field above To disable DiffServ configure both fields to 0 decimal 93 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description FTP Parameter fields FTP Server Enable Y N Default disabled See FTP Server File Transfers in Operation amp Maintenance chapter MultiVOIP unit has an FTP Server function so that firmware and other important operating software files can be transferred to the voip via the network DNS Para meter fields Enable DNS Y N Default disabled Enables Domain Name Space System function where computer names are resolved using a worldwide distributed database Enable SRV Y N Enables service record function Service record is a category of data in the Internet Domain Name System specifying information on available servers for a specific protocol and domain as defined in RFC 2782 Newer internet protocols like SIP
133. Records integer This is the number of log records that must accumulate to trigger the sending of a log summary email Number of Days integer This is the number of days that must pass before triggering the sending of a log summary email 146 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The SMTP Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box Custom Fields that allows you to customize email log messages for the MultiVOIP The MultiVOIP software logs data about many aspects of the call traffic going through the MultiVOIP The Custom Fields screen lets you pick which aspects will be included in the email log reports m Custom Fields MV Select All m Fields IV Channel Number IV Start Date Time M Duration MV Call Mode IV Packets Sent IV Packets Received M Bytes Sent V Bytes Received Help IV Packets Lost V Coder Cancel I Outbound Digits Received JY Prefix Matched IV Call Status lv Call Type V Call Direction V DTMF Capability V Server Details IV Outbound digits sent JV Disconnect Reason From Details r To Details V Gateway Name V Gateway Name JV IP Address JV IP Address V Description V Description V Options JV Options Custom Fields Definitions Field Description Field Description Select All Log report to include all fields shown Channel Data channel Start Date and time the Number carrying call Date phone call began T
134. SPP Indicates the Call Signaling protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP Status column success or Displays the status of the call i e failure whether the call was completed successfully or not IP Direction incoming Indicates whether the call is outgoing incoming or outgoing with respect to the gateway Mode column From column voice or FAX gateway name Indicates whether the event being described was a voice call or a FAX call Displays the name of the voice gateway that originates the call To column gateway name Displays the name of the voice gateway that completes the call Special Buttons Previous Displays log entry before currently selected one Next Displays log entry after currently selected one First Displays first log entry Last Displays last log entry Delete File Deletes selected log file 273 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Details Voice coder G 723 G 729 The voice coder being used on G 711 etc this call Disconnect Values are Indicates whether the call was Reason Normal and disconnected simply because the Local desired conversation was done disconnection or some other irregular cause occasioned disconnection e g a technical error or failure DTMF Capability inband Indi
135. Statistics Screen 284 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance ISDN BRI Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Select BRI ISDNn In this field you can choose the ISDN Interface i port for which you want to view the For n 1 2 108T status The 410ST has two ISDN BRI For n 1 4 810ST ports or interfaces the 810ST has four ISDN BRI ports or interfaces Each interface has two channels Layer 1 Interface Status inactive F1 Shows the current Layer 1 status of the sensing F2 ISDN connection Each status deactivated F3 description inactive sensing etc awaiting signal F4 corresponds to a particular state label identifying input F5 F1 F8 and G1 G4 synchronized F6 activated F7 lost framing F8 deactive G1 pending activation G2 active G3 pending deactivation G4 State F1 F8 for Terminal Shows the 1 430 state name for Layer 1 mode ports An F state name indicates this port is G1 G 4 for Network in Terminal mode F1 F8 as set in the mode ports ISDN BRI Parameters screen A G state name indicates that this port is in Network mode G1 G4 as set in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen Loss Of integer Shows the number of lost framing Framing events on the ISDN physical layer Loss of integer Shows the number of lost Sync synchronization events on the ISDN physical layer
136. UI However all additional configuration can be done via the web GUI The content and organization of the web GUI is directly parallel to the Windows GUI For each screen in the Windows GUI there is a corresponding screen in the web GUI The fields on each screen are the same as well Current Permission Read Write rRegional ee Country Region USA k A Type Fregi Freq2 Cadencet ms Cad2 Cad3 Cad4 Gain 1 Dial Tone 350 440 0 0 0 0 Busy Tone 480 620 500 500 500 5000 j Cancel Ring Tone 480 440 2000 4000 Unobtainable Tone 480 620 Survivability Dial Tone 650 650 Reorder Tone 480 620 4 IIL The Windows GUI gives access to commands via pulldown menus sidebar menus keyboard shortcuts and in some cases via command icons whereas the web GUI has sidebar menus only m Regional Parameters Country Region Standard Tones 16 DialT one 350 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 16 RingTone 480 2 000 4 000 2 000 4 000 16 Cancel BusyTone 480 0 500 0 500 0 500 0500 16 UnobtainableTone 480 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 16 Am Survivability DialTone 650 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 ReorderT one 480 0 250 0 250 0 000 0 000 Help The web GUI however cannot perform logging in the same direct mode done in the Windows GUI However when the web GUI is used logging can be done by email SMTP 337 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide The gra
137. Unix hosts and any other syslog enabled device There are many customizable options available 341 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Before a SysLog client program is used the SysLog functionality must be enabled within the MultiVOIP in the Logs menu under Configuration The IP Address used will be that of the MultiVOIP itself In the Port field entered by default is the standard well known logical port 514 342 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Configuring the SysLog Client Program Configure the SysLog client program for your own needs In various SysLog client programs you can define where log messages will be saved archived opt for interaction with an SNMP system like MultiVoipManager set the content and format of log messages determine disk space allocation limits for log messages and establish a hierarchy for the seriousness of messages normal alert critical emergency etc A sample presentation of SysLog info in the Kiwi daemon is shown below SysLog programs will vary in features and presentation Kiwi Syslog Daemon Registered version 7 0 2 Display 00 Default Time 17 02 08 17 02 07 17 02 06 17 02 06 17 02 04 17 02 03 17 02 02 17 02 01 17 02 00 17 01 59 17 01 58 17 01 57 17 01 56 17 01 55 17 01 54 17 01 53 17 01 52 17 01 51 17 N1 5n Priority Syslog Warning Local0 Debug Local5 Alert System4 Debug Local3 Info Lpr Crit
138. a voip is busy but still receives a call attempt from any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Busy Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the channel or phone station is busy in Omaha 170 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Connected If the home voip unit is receiving a Party call and Connected Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will tell the originating remote CNI voip unit that the attempted call has been completed and the connection is made This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Connected Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omaha voip completes an attempted call from any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Connect Party Omaha Sales
139. ading Factory Defaults Downloading Firmware isecen ni o iS Setting and Downloading User Defaults nssonosooeeseseseeeeeesreerrsreererrreresseess 313 Setting a Password Windows GUI csscssecessseceseceenseceeneeensecesneeeaecesneeeaeeees 317 Setting a Password Web Browser GUI u sccesscseseceenseceseeeensecesneeeseceeneeeneeesee 320 Un Installing the MultiVOIP Software ossoseeneeseseeeseresreeersererrsreerssresresereess 321 Upgrading SoftWare eea E E eE di ea tee ea eaa E TEASA eSa 323 FTP SERVER FILE TRANSFERS DOWNLOADS c c cccessssceceesececeeseeeessneeeeeenaeees 325 Special FTP Upgrade Instructions for SW version 5 06 and earlier 325 General FTP File Transfer Information cccccccesccesecesecsseeneensenseeeeeeeeneennees 325 WEB BROWSER INTERFACE cos essvosnseuieeds causceserutbds sou ites consti sues E E E 336 SYSLOG SERVER PUNCTIONS rsen Ea AE SES r 341 CHAPTER 9 WARRANTY SERVICE AND TECH SUPPORT s0c0008 344 LIMITED WARRANTY set eetet ciosa ese aons a E ES SEE AEEA EE ESEE 345 REPAIR PROCEDURES FOR U S AND CANADIAN CUSTOMERS ssseseeeeseeeeeeerrereeee 345 TECHNICAL SUPPORT sete ee iosi sesele Ere EErEE OEE E nE EEEE So Erek KEKEE Eos 347 Contacting Technical Support ccccsccesceceseceesceensecesccecsseceeeeecsseceeeeecnaeceeneeenaeees 347 CHAPTER 10 REGULATORY INFORMATION csscsssssssssscssccssssscesecees 348 EMC Safety and R amp TTE Directive Compliance n
140. al recognition of their conformity FCC Declaration NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation 349 Regulatory Information MultiVOIP User Guide Warning Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Industry Canada This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement Canadien sur le mat riel brouilleur FCC Part 68 Telecom 1 Thi
141. al support personnel available to help you get the most out of your Multi Tech product If you have any questions about the operation of this unit or experience difficulty during installation you can contact Tech Support via the following Contacting Technical Support Country By E mail By telephone France support multitech fr 33 1 64 61 09 81 India support 91 124 340778 multitechindia com U K support 44 118 959 7774 multitech co uk US amp tsupport 800 972 2439 Canada multitech com Rest of support 763 785 3500 World multitech com Internet http www multitech com _forms email_tech_support htm Please have your product information available including model and serial number 347 Chapter 10 Regulatory Information 348 MultiVOIP User Guide Regulatory Information EMC Safety and R amp TTE Directive Compliance The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following European Community Directives Council Directive 89 336 EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and Council Directive 73 23 EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and Council Directive 1999 5 EC of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutu
142. an overlap receiving mode or providing a value in second dial tone Default is 2000 which is 2 milliseconds seconds Range 250 ms to 10000 ms 1 4 sec to 10 sec Switch Information Country see table Country in which MultiVOIP is operating below with ISDN Operator see table Indicates phone switch manufacturer model below or refers to telco so as to specify the switching system in question ISDN is implemented somewhat differently in different switches different software stacks are used PCM Law A Law or A Law is an analog to digital compression MU Law expansion standard used in Europe MU Law is the North America standard Refer to the PCM Law defaults based on country and operator below TEI n Terminal or TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier is a Assignment Network or number to uniquely identify each device both connected to the ISDN TEI Assignment Automatic displays the value for each TEI assigned to Point to the BRI port Depending on the layer 1 Point interface selection Terminal or Network and the country selection some fields are grayed Network out inactive as they have no meaning for Automatic this configuration The TEI range is zero to 63 Point to for Fixed and 64 to 126 for Automatic Multipoint assignment Fixed Point An interface in Network mode has the added to Point 0 option of Point to Multipoint Automatic TEI 63 TEI 0 amp This added option should be used in cases TEI 1 acti
143. and the phone system You must gather information about the IP network and about the phone system so that the MultiVOIP can be configured to operate with them properly A summary of this configuration information appears on page 24 Config Info CheckList Gather IP Information Ask your computer network Info needed to operate administrator all MultiVOIP models IP Network Parameters s9 Record for each VOIP Site in System e IP Address e IP Mask e Gateway e Domain Name Server DNS Info optional e Determine whether or not 802 1p Packet Prioritization will be used Gather Telephone Information ISDN BRI Phone Parameters Needed for MVP810ST Ask phone company or telecom manager MVP410ST ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Parameters N Record them for this VOIP Site e In which country is this voip installed e Which operator switch type is used e What type of line coding use required A law or u law e Determine which BRI ports will be network side and which BRI ports will be terminal side e If you are connecting the Multi VOIP to network equipment with a U interface an NT1 device must be connected between them 22 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Gathering Phone IP Details Phone IP Details Often Needed Wanted Obtain Email Address for VOIP for email call log reporting required if log reports of VOIP call traffic Optional ar
144. anual describes how to get the manual up and running The CD media is produced using Adobe Acrobat for viewing and printing the user guide To view or print your copy of a user guide load Acrobat Reader on your system The Acrobat Reader is available as a free download from Adobe s Web Site www adobe com prodindex acrobat readstep html This MultiVOIP User Guide is also available on Multi Tech s Web site at http www multitech com Viewing and printing a user guide from the Web also requires that you have the Acrobat Reader loaded on your system To select the MultiVOIP User Guide from the Multi Tech Systems home page click Documents and then click MultiVOIP Family in the product list drop down window All documents for this MultiVOIP Product Family will be displayed You can then choose User Guide Multi VOIP Product Family to view or download the pdf file Entries organized by model number in the knowledge base and troubleshooting resolutions sections of the MultiTech web site found under Support constitute another source of help for problems encountered in the field 18 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Chapter 2 Quick Start Instructions 19 Gathering Phone IP Details MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Introduction This chapter will get your MultiVOIP up and running quickly For more details see the relevant specific chapters of this manual Safety Warnings Lithium Batte
145. ar to an email address except that the sip prefix is used 188 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Def ns cont d Field Name Values Description SPP Fields Use Registrar Values Y N Description Select this checkbox to use registrar when voip system is operating in the Registrar Client SPP mode In this mode one voip the registrar as set in Phonebook Configuration screen has a static IP address and all other voips clients point to the registar s IP address as functionally their own However if your voip system overall is operating in Registrar Client mode but you want to make an exception and use Direct mode for the destination pattern of this particular Add Edit Phonebook entry leave this checkbox unselected Leave this checkbox unselected if your overall voip system is operating in the Direct SPP mode In this mode all voips in system are peers and each has its own static IP address Port Number Values numeric Description When operating in Registrar Client mode this is the port by which the gateway receives all SPP data and control messages from the registrar gateway This ability to receive all data and messages via one port allows the voip to operate behind a firewall with only one port open When operating in Direct mode this is the Port by which peer voips receive data and
146. are assuming here that the MultiVOIP will operate in conjunction with a PBX You must configure both the Outbound Phonebook and the Inbound Phonebook A starter configuration only means that two voip locations will be set up to begin the system and establish voip communication Outbound Phonebook 1 Open the MultiVOIP program Start MultiVOIP xxx Configuration 2 Go to Phone Book Outbound Phonebook Add Entry 3 On a sheet of paper write down the calling code of the remote voip area code country code city code etc that you ll be calling Follow the example that best fits your situation North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Technician in Seattle area Technician in central 206 must set up one voip London area 0207 to set there another in Chicago up voip there another in area 312 downtown Birmingham area 0121 Answer Write down 312 Answer write down 0121 Euro International Call Example Technician in Rotterdam country 31 city 010 to set up one voip there another in Bordeaux country 33 area 05 Answer write down 3305 34 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Starter Config 4 Suppose you want to call a phone number outside of your building using a phone station that is an extension from your PBX system if present What digits must you dial Often a 9 or 8 must be dialed to get an outside line through the PBX i e to c
147. as loading heavy equipment in rack unevenly The rack used should safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it supports Ensure that the mains supply circuit is capable of handling the load of the equipment See the power label on the equipment for load requirements full specifications for MultiVOIP models are presented in chapter 1 of this manual Maximum ambient temperature for the unit is 60 degrees Celsius 140 degrees Fahrenheit at 20 90 non condensing relative humidity This equipment should only be installed by properly qualified service personnel Only connect like circuits In other words connect SELV Secondary Extra Low Voltage circuits to SELV circuits and TN Telecommunications Network circuits to TN circuits 59 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide 19 Inch Rack Enclosure Mounting Procedure Attaching the MultiVOIP to a rack rail of an EIA 19 inch rack enclosure will certainly require two persons Essentially the technicians must attach the brackets to the MultiVOIP chassis with the screws provided as shown in Figure 3 3 and then secure unit to rack rails by the brackets as shown in Figure 3 4 Because equipment racks vary screws for rack rail mounting are not provided Follow the instructions of the rack manufacturer and use screws that fit 1 Position the right rack mounting bracket on the MultiVOIP using the two vertical mounting screw holes Secure the bracket to the
148. assword established in item 2 above The login screens will differ depending on whether the FTP file transfer is to be done with a web browser see first screen below or with an FTP client program see second screen below 331 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 8 Invoke Download Downloading can be done with a web browser or with an FTP client program 8A Download with Web Browser 8A1 In the local Windows browser locate the directory holding the MultiVOIP program files The default location will be C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP xxxx yyyy where x and y represent MultiVOIP model numbers and software version numbers 8A2 Drag and drop files from the local Windows browser e g Windows Explorer to the web browser Exploring Multi VOIP 2410 4 03 Aa Danah iniiai i PA ftp 77voip1 192 168 2 2007 Microsoft Intemet Explorer Fie Edit View Go Favorites Tools Help eae Fonverd Up Cut Copy dress C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOl x Name casfile cas factdef cnf H323 pdl myptl ftp bin a fxs_loopFtp cas icrosoft Office a h323 pdl Address ry tp M MultiTech System is InPhBk tmr into browser window Multi Tech Systen a Lhsstrs Mutivoir T a LogsMaster log A New file from PC E MultivOIP 24i D MultiVOIP 24 E MultivoIP 30i E MultivOIP 30 E MultvolP 5 91 MulVoIP 6 0 E MultiVoip3000
149. ation MultiVOIP User Guide Enter Inbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP The fields of the Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen are described in the table below Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Values Y N Number Description When checked Any Number appears as the value in the Remove Prefix field The Any Number feature of the Inbound Phone Book does not work when an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls received from phone numbers not matching a listed Prefix shown in the Remove Prefix column of the Inbound Phone Book will be admitted into the voip on the channel listed in the Channel Number field Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Prefixes Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination often a local PBX Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination often a local PBX Channel 1 24 or T1 channel number to which Number Hunting the call will be assigned as it enters the local telephony equipment often a local PBX Hunting directs the call to any available channel Description Describes the facility or geographical location at which the call origi
150. ation procedure detailed analog eeeeeerees 83 SUIMIMALY 0 5 desckcescesviigetenvened stevens 82 local voip configuration 76 local Windows GUI vs web GUI COMPAFISON ese seeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeee 337 local rate calls to remote voip sites BUD hinrere 219 ST araara aa S 200 MultiVOIP User Guide Log statistics logs field 273 log report email customizing 147 149 log report email triggering 146 log reporting method setting 156 lop reports i nnn 80 log reports amp SMTP 144 log reports by email 005 144 logging Options sesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 157 logging update interval 157 logging web GUI and 337 Login Name SMTP field 145 Logs Statistics fields Bytes tecyd aitoren tiiis 275 Bytes Sent sniionss ioris 275 BYteS SOMt sc ssscscvsessedstyspuseissscsces 273 Call Forwarded to 00 0 eeeeeeee 276 Call Transferred to 276 Disconnect Reason 0 274 DTMF Capability 274 Duration ccceeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 273 From gateway 273 Gateway Name callee 275 Gateway Name caller 275 H 450 functionality 276 IP Address callee 0 275 IP Address caller 08 275 IP Direction column 273 LOG F nenun er 273 Mod en unari 273 Options callee c eee 275 Options caller 0 00 eee 275 Outbound digits 0
151. automatically in the background as a plug in supporting the MultiVOIP web GUI No overt user actions are required 339 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide thew Wier erer FA dan Setter T LzenUlh e LU currert 2 TAINAS a verns leses Lad hrir Aali 2 Tons Frito ay Lumens H Fisdy darase OIC Eh Setirg 3 Cries T me lor Wiican Lh Staap Gy Hisce acos R Miter Lxzel E EN e zaklat Gereh o Welcome to the Java 2 Platform Fe ecome wo the Java 2 Standard Editior Purim Evomris Thie zo7idee c nplete tuntime s gt sort fe Faraz applications The mrt tarinmi ine des t Dee Y Pisia andat whia rawta nimrir g ta dawal sau JEU Site WEY IUW IF References Res tar Dasr Trizin piarchi ee nimentaNen fre aed ifa irr eo ite gta i prudish Se tas Cave 2 Plates web ex foz r12 sZortnes 92 mthe Jara 3 Fiann Coptic 2203 Pav ITO raras Ex L Som Seon Boe Pak Ake Calas WLU A alagera My amp ier After the Java program has been installed you can access the MultiVOIP using the web browser GUI Close the MultiVOIP Windows GUI Start the web browser Enter the IP address of the MultiVOIP unit Enter a password when prompted A password is needed here only if password has been set for the local Windows GUI or for the MultiVOIP s FTP Server function See Setting a Password Web Browser GUI earlier in this chapter The web browser GUI offers essentially the same control over the voip
152. be added before completing call to destination IP Address n n n n the IP address to which the for call will be directed if it n 0 255 begins with the destination pattern given Description alpha Describes the facility or numeric geographical location at which the call will be completed Protocol Type SIP or H 323 Indicates protocol to be used in or SPP outbound transmission Single Port Protocol SPP is a non standard protocol designed by Multi Tech 186 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 fields Use Gatekeepr Y N Indicates whether or not gatekeeper is used Gateway alpha The H 323 ID assigned to the H 323 ID Homeric destination MultiVOIP Only valid if Use Gatekeeper is enabled for this entry Gateway numeric This number becomes Prefix registered with the GateKeeper Call requests sent to the gatekeeper and preceded by this prefix will be routed to the VOIP gateway H 323 Port 1720 This parameter pertains to Number Q 931 which is the H 323 call signaling protocol for setup and termination of calls aka ITU T Recommendation 1 451 H 323 employs only one well known port 1720 for Q 931 signaling If Q 931 message oriented signaling protocol is used 1720 must be chosen as the H 323 Port Number 187 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP U
153. ber carrying call Date phone call began Time Duration Length of call Call Voice or fax Mode Packets Total packets sent Packets Total packets Sent in call Received _ received in call Bytes Total bytes sent in Bytes Total bytes received Sent call Received in call Packets Packets lost in Coder Voice Coder Lost call Compression Rate used for call will be listed in log Outbound The DTMF dialing Prefix When selected the Digits digits received by Matched phonebook prefix Sent this gateway from matched in the remote processing the call gateway will be listed in log presuming that DTMF is set to Out of Band Call Successful or Status unsuccessful Server The IP address etc of the traffic control server if any Details being used whether an H 323 gatekeeper a SIP proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server The Options field refers to non mandatory server features that might be activated For example with H 323 various H 323 Version 4 options might be listed Multiplexing Tunneling etc 154 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration RADIUS Attributes Field Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description From Details To Details Gateway Originating Gatew N Completing or Number gateway answering gateway IP Addr IP address where IP Addr IP address
154. blems A Fixing a COM Port Problem B Fixing a Cabling Problem 5 Familiarize yourself with configuration parameter screens and how to access them 6 Set Ethernet IP Parameters 7 Enable web browser GUI optional 8 Set Voice Fax Parameters 9 Set Call Signaling parameters The choice of H 323 SIP or SPP is made in the Outbound Phonebook but details are configured in the Call Signaling Parameters screen 10 Set ISDN BRI Parameters 11 Set SNMP Parameters not supported for BRI MultiVOIPs 12 Set Regional Parameters Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences 13 Set Custom Tones and Cadences optional 14 Set SMTP Parameters applicable if Log Reports are via Email 15 Set RADIUS parameters Optional Used only if system interfaces with RADIUS server for billing or other accounting functions 16 Set Log Reporting Method GUI locally in MultiVOIP Configuration program SNMP remotely in MultiVoipManager program or SMTP via email 17 Set NAT Traversal STUN parameters Optional Applicable only under SIP Call Signaling when the UDP transport protocol is used 82 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 18 Set Supplementary Services Parameters The Supplementary Services screen allows voip deployment of features that are normally found in PBX or PSTN systems e g call transfer and call waiting 19 View System Info screen and set the updating interval optional 20 Set Baud Rate of COM port co
155. cates whether the DTMF out of band dialing digits are carried Expressions Inband or Out of Band The F corresponding field values differ eey for the 3 different voip protocols for different i Call Signaling For H 323 this field can display protocols Out of Band or Inband For H 323 SIP or SIP it can display either Out of SPP Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband Outbound Digits 0 9 The DTMF dialing digits Received received by this gateway from the remote gateway presuming that DTMF is set to Out of Band Outbound Digits 0 9 The digits transmitted by the Sent MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for this call Server Details a b c d The IP address of the traffic standard IP control server if any being used octets for a b whether an H 323 gatekeeper a c din the range SIP proxy or an SPP registrar 0 to 255 gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server 274 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Details Packets sent integer value The number of data packets sent over the IP network in the course of this call Packets received integer value The number of data packets received over
156. ces 169 170 171 Allow Incoming Calls Through Gatekeeper Only H 323 Call Signaling field eee 112 Allow Incoming Calls Through SIP Proxy Only SIP Call Signaling fielde atic teara 118 Allowed Name Type Alerting Party 169 170 171 Calling Party 0 eeeeeeeeeeee 168 Allowed Name Types Call Name ID Alerting Party oseese 169 Busy Partye scema 170 Calling Party eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 168 Connected Party eee 171 Alternate GK Gatekeepers 1 and 2 H 323 Call Signaling fields 113 Alternate IP Address field Bel eho E Oise tots 234 Tae e ait 191 Alternate IP Routing Fee ee ee es 227 A D EEE AE REESE 184 Alternate Phone Number field SPP Bil NEEE E E EEEE 232 Alternate Phone Number SPP Add Edit Outbound Phonebook Bi E E EE EE TA 232 Ti E E EEE TS 189 Alternate Proxy 1 and 2 SIP Call Signaling fields eee 118 Alternate Registrar 1 and 2 SPP Call Signaling fields eee 122 Alternate Routing field definitions MultiVOIP User Guide BV esos sees E 234 DD D E E bie Seats 191 Alternate Routing field definitions El Alternate IP Address 234 Round Trip Delay eee 234 Alternate Routing field definitions T1 Alternate IP Address 191 Round Trip Delay eee 191 Annex E H 323 field 00 0 0 116 Append SIP Proxy Domain Name in User ID proxy server 118 Auto Disconnect field group 110 AUutoCall vi
157. chnical Configuration Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description Server The IP address of Outbound The dialing digits Details the traffic control PiSits Sent sent by this gateway server if any to the remote being used gateway presuming whether an H 323 that DTMF is set to gatekeeper a SIP Out ofBanid proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server Disconnect Indicates whether the call was disconnected simply Reason because the desired conversation was done or some other irregular cause occasioned disconnection e g a technical error or failure Values are Normal and Local disconnection From Details To Details Gateway Originating Gatew N Completing or Number gateway answering gateway IP Addr IP address where IP Addr IP address where call call originated was completed or answered Descript Identifier of site Descript Identifier of site where call where call was originated completed or answered Options When selected log Options When selected log will not Silence will not use Silence Compression and Compression and Forward Error Forward Error Correction by call Correction by party originator answering call 149 Technical Configuration To use the SMTP Para meters screen SMTP MultiVOIP User Guide r Logs I Enable Console Messa
158. d here must reflect those differences we have separate chapters for phonebook configuration in North American T1 environments Chapter 6 and for that in European E1 environments Chapter 7 Consult the chapter that best fits the needs of your voip system Phonebook configuration examples shown for Series II analog MultiVOIPs are fully applicable to ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs except where the telephony interface is concerned Configuring T1 NAM Telephony MultiVOIP Phonebooks When a VoIP serves a PBX system it s important that the operation of the VoIP be transparent to the telephone end user That is the VoIP should not entail the dialing of extra digits to reach users elsewhere on the network that the VoIP serves On the contrary VOIP service more commonly reduces dialed digits by allowing users served by PBXs in facilities in distant cities to dial their co workers with 3 4 or 5 digit extensions as if they were in the same facility Furthermore the setup of the VoIP generally should allow users to make calls on a non toll basis to any numbers accessible without toll by users at all other locations on the VoIP system Consider for example a company with VOIP equipped offices in New York Miami and Los Angeles each served by its own PBX When the VOIP phone books are set correctly personnel in the Miami office should be able to make calls without toll not only to the company s offices in New York and Los Angeles but also to an
159. dated Standard Tones fields Type column dial tone Type of telephony tone pair for ring tone which frequency gain and busy tone cadence are being presented unobtainable tone fast busy survivability tone re order tone Frequency 1 freq in Hertz Lower frequency of pair Frequency 2 freq in Hertz Higher frequency of pair 138 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Regional Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Standard Tones fields cont d Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute This applies to the dial ring busy setting and unobtainable tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the ISDN B channel port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute This applies to the dial ring busy setting and unobtainable fast busy tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the ISDN B channel port Default 16dB Cadence n n n n On off pattern of tone durations msec On Off four integer time used to denote phone ringing values in phone busy connection milli seconds unobtainable fast busy dial tone zero value for 0 indicates continuous tone dial tone survivability and re order Default indicates values differ for different continuous tone countries regions A
160. dress 192 168 3 143 which is the MultiVOIP s default IP address For permanent use you will need to change the IP address from the default value to a value that fits your voip system 16 MultiVOIP User Guide Specifications Parameter oon Model MVP410ST MVP810ST Operating 100 240VAC 100 240VAC Voltage 1 2 0 6A 1 2 0 6A Current Mains 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Frequencies Power 12 watts 18 watts Consumption Mechanical 1 75 Hx 1 75 Hx Dimensions 17 4 Wx 17 4 Wx 8 5 D 8 5 D 4 5cm H x 4 5cm H x 44 2 cm Wx 44 2cm W x 21 6 cm D 21 6 cm D Weight 6 61 lbs 6 75 lbs 3 00 kg 3 06 kg 17 Overview Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Installation at a Glance The basic steps of installing your MultiVOIP network involve unpacking the units connecting the cables and configuring the units using management software MultiVOIP Configuration software and confirming connectivity with another voip site This process results in a fully functional Voice Over IP network Related Documentation The MultiVOIP is shipped with a printed Cabling Guide that is meant simply to get the unit connected properly The MultiVOIP User Guide the document you are now reading comes in electronic form and is included on your system CD It presents in depth information on the features and functionality of Multi Tech s MultiVOIP Product Family The Quick Start Instructions chapter of this m
161. e MultiVOIP software 279 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide IP Statistics Field Definitions cont d RTP Packets Voice signals are transmitted in Realtime Transport Protocol packets RTP packets are a type or subset of UDP packets Transmit integer Number of RTP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of RTP packets received by this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden RTP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software value RTCP Packets Realtime Transport Control Protocol packets convey control information to assist in the transmission of RTP voice packets RTCP packets are a type or subset of UDP packets Transmit integer Number of RTCP packets transmitted ted value by this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of RTCP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden RTCP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway
162. e available from a List list The list will reside on the Primary Y N gatekeeper or one of the Alternate gatekeepers The gatekeeper holding the list would download that list onto the voip gateways within the system 114 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 Version 4 Parameters H 323 Y N Signaling for multiple phone Multiplexing calls can be carried on a single Mux port rather than opening a separate signaling port for each call This conserves bandwidth resources H 245 Values Y N Tunneling Description H 245 messages are Tun encapsulated within the Q 931 call signaling channel Among other things the H 245 messages let the two endpoints tell each other what their technical capabilities are and determine who during the call will be the client and who the server Tunneling is the process of transmitting these H 245 messages through the Q 931 channel The same TCP IP socket or logical port already being used for the Call Signaling Channel is then also used by the H 245 Control Channel This encapsulation reduces the number of logical ports sockets needed and reduces call setup time 115 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide H 323 Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description H 323 Version 4 Parameters Parallel
163. e battery has an estimated life expectancy of ten years When the battery starts to weaken the date and time may be incorrect If the battery fails the board must be sent back to Multi Tech Systems for battery replacement Warning There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Safety Warnings Telecom 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 This product must be disconnected from power source and telephone network interface when servicing 3 This product is to be used with UL and UL listed computers 4 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 5 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines 6 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning 7 Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak not even to report a gas leak 8 To reduce the risk of fire use only a UL listed 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord 9 Never install a telephone jack in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 56 MultiVOIP User Guide Unpacking Your MVP 410ST 810ST MultiVOIP When unpacking your MultiVOIP check to see that all of the items shown in Figure 3 1 are included in the box If any box contents are missing contact MultiTech Tech Support at 1 800 9
164. e to be sent by email SMTP Parameters Preparation Task MEMO To LT Department Ask Mail Server ra Ghia ascoan for VOTE administrator to set up email account with password for the MultiVOIP unit itself Be sure to give a unique identifier to each individual MultiVOIP unit voip unit2 biggytech com Get the IP address of the vine mail server computer as well 23 Gathering Phone IP Details Config Info CheckList MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Type of Config Info Gathered MultiVOIP Configuration screen on which to enter Config Info Info Obtained Info Entered Zo IP info for voip unit e IP address e Gateway e DNS IP if used e 802 1p Prioritization if used Ethernet IP Parameters ISDN Layer 1 Interface Choices Network Terminal Clock Master Status only a channel designated as Terminal can be used as the Clock Master ISDN BRI Parameters ISDN BRI Parameters Switch Info e Country e Operator e TEI Assignment e A Law or Mu Law ISDN BRI Parameters Calling Party Number Type ISDN BRI Parameters Called Party Number Type amp Plan ISDN BRI Parameters Country Code Regional Parameters Email address for voip optional SMTP Parameters Reminder Be sure to Save Setup after entering configuration values 24 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instruction
165. econdary screen This feature provides an alternate path for calls if the primary IP network cannot carry the traffic Often in cases of failure call traffic is temporarily diverted into the PSTN However this feature could also be used to divert traffic to a redundant backup unit in case one voip unit fails The user must specify the IP address of the alternate route for each destination pattern entry in the Outbound Phonebook m Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details Destination Pattern 0334 C Total Digits 42 Remove Prefix 0334 OC Add Prefs IP Address 200 G62 O09 OOF Description Access to Lyon area Alternate Routing Altemate IP Address S OK Round Trip Delay Cancel 233 E1 Phonebook Co nfiguration MultiVOIP User Guide Alternate Routing Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Alternate n n n n Alternate destination for outbound data traffic IP where in case of excessive delay in data transmission Address n 0 255 Round milliseconds The Round Trip Delay is the criterion for Trip judging when a data pathway is considered Delay blocked When the delay exceeds the threshold specified here the data stream will be diverted to the alternate destination specified as the Alternate IP Address 3 Select Inbound PhoneBook List Entries Multi oIP Multi OIP v6 08 CP Firmware Jul 22 2005 Configuration
166. ed It flickers to indicate D channel traffic If the voip is running in terminal mode and its BRI line is unplugged the D LED goes off However if the voip is running in network mode and its BRI line is unplugged its LED will flash at regular interval B Channel Operation LEDs one for each B channel XMT Transmit This indicator blinks when voice packets are being transmitted onto the B channel RCV Receive This indicator blinks when voice packets are being received on the B channel 15 Overview MultiVOIP User Guide Computer Requirements The computer on which the MultiVOIP s Windows configuration program is installed must meet these requirements e must be IBM compatible PC with MS Windows operating system e must have an available COM port for connection to the MultiVOIP However this PC does not need to be connected to the MultiVOIP permanently It only needs to be connected when local configuration and monitoring are done The MultiVOIP can also be configured and monitored using the MultiVOIP web based configuration program In this case the command computer does not need to be an IBM compatible PC nor does it need to be running a Microsoft Windows operating system The MultiVOIP web based configuration program can be accessed by a web browser running on any operating system for example Linux MacIntosh or IBM compatible computers To access the MultiVOIP by its web GUL use the IP ad
167. ed from that PC to the MultiVOIP Note that the structure of the MultiTech web FTP site may change without notice However firmware updates can generally be found using standard web techniques For example you can access updated firmware by doing a search or by clicking on Support The MultiTech web site may also contain special notices or alerts that are not included in manuals Multi ecli Systems Help Resolutions FAQs Updates Software Firmware Drivers Directory of Firmware for Multi Tech Products Product Firmware This page organizes the firmware available for Multi Tech products If you have been given a file name by tech support you can go directly to the Firmware Listing by Filename page V 90 56K modem firmware is listed on its own V 90 Modem Firmware page Use the lt ctr1 gt F hot key on either of these pages to quickly find the file name you were given by your support technician MultiVOIP Firmware Important Product Alert Potential Problems when Uninstalling MultiVOIP software Before updating your MultiVOIP firmware please read this important Product Alert File Version Size 506K 6 402 048 bytes MVP410ST 8105T Installation Software and Firmware This file contains the MultiVOIP 410ST 810ST software and firmware for H 323 SPP and SIP installations This firmware also supports WEB Java configuration View the README file for more information View the README Models MVP
168. ed in the Country Region field Custom Tone Par Sotinos Tore Pae Ds Tore 141 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Custom Tone Pair Settings fields are described in the table below Custom Tone Pair Settings Definitions Field Name Values Description Tone Pair dial tone busy tone ring tone unobtainable tone survivability tone re order tone TONE PAIR VALUES Identifies the type of telephony signaling tone for which frequencies are being specified About Defaults US telephony values are used as defaults on this screen However since this dialog box is provided to allow custom tone pair settings default values are essentially irrelevant Frequency 1 frequency in Frequency of lower tone of pair Hertz This outbound tone pair enters the MultiVOIP at the input port Frequency 2 frequency in Frequency of higher tone of pair Hertz This outbound tone pair enters the MultiVOIP at the input port Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair This figure and mute describes amplification that the setting MultiVOIP applies to outbound tones entering the MultiVOIP at the input port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair This figure and mute describes amplification that the setting MultiVOIP applies to outbound tones entering the MultiVOIP at t
169. enu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar 86 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 6 Set Ethernet IP Parameters This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu toolbar icon keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Ethernet IP Parameters Pulldown Icon gt MultiVolP MultiVOIP 5 08 DP Firmwe amp Multi olP Multi OIP v5 Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctrl H ee eae Canfiquration egio arameters trl lEthemet IP Parameters SMTP Dacre chides Ethernet IP Parameters Logs Traces Ctr AlteL Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl AlteY Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal CtrleAlt S tty ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar El Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl Alt I Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI 87 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the values that fit your particular network SVoice F 3 Excellent Effort 7 O Best Effort 7 Multi olP 216 133 69 77 88 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Ethernet IP Parameters fields are described in the tables and text passages below Note that both DiffServ parameters Call Control PHB and VoIP Media PHB must be set to zero if you enable Packet Prioritization 802 1p Nonzero DiffServ values negate the prioritization scheme
170. er Number of party called in To string transfer Call Forwarded phone number Number of party called in To string forwarding About IP Statistics Accessing IP Statistics Pulldown Icon Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management Alternate Servers ISDN BRI Statistics Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt d Ctri 0 CtritAlt w Ctrl 2 Ctrl Alte4 gt Ctrl Q IP Statistics Details Shortcut Ctrl P Sidebar Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management 276 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance IP Statistics Screen IP Statistics IP Address m Total Packets Transmitted Received UDP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors m TCP Packets Transmitted Received Retransmitted Received with Errors THI M RTP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors m RTCP Packets Transmitted Received Received with Errors Jd UDP Versus TCP User Datagram Protocol versus Transmission Control Protocol UDP provides unguaranteed connectionless transmission of data across an IP network By contrast TCP provides reliable connection oriented transmission of data Both TCP and UDP split data into packets called datagrams However TCP includes extra headers in the datagram to enable retransmission of lost packets and reassembly
171. er Test 1 999 This field determines how many pings will be generated by the Start Now command Response 500 5000 The duration after which a ping Timeout milliseconds will be considered to have failed Ping Size in Bytes 32 128 bytes This field determines how long or large the ping will be Timer Interval 0 or 30 6000 This field determines how long of between Pings minutes a wait there is between one ping and the next Start Now Initiates pinging command button Clear z Erases ping parameters in command Monitor Link field group and button restores default values Link Status Parameters These fields summarize the results of pinging IP Address a b c d Target of ping column 0 255 No of Pings as listed Number of pings sent to target Sent endpoint No of Pings as listed Number of pings received by Received target endpoint Round Trip as listed Displays how long it took from Delay in milliseconds time ping was sent to time ping Min Max response was received Avg Last Error as listed Indicates when last data error occurred 283 Operation and Maintenance About ISDN BRI Statistics MultiVOIP User Guide Accessing BRI Statistics Pulldown Sidebar ISDN BRI Statistics Ctrl Q Shortcut E Statistics i j Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management SDN BRI Statistics Ctrl Q ISDN BRI
172. er end into the PC serial port See Figure 3 5 If your computer has only USB2 0 ports and no serial ports you will need a serial to USB2 0 adapter 3 Connect a network cable to the ETHERNET 10BASET connector on the back of the MultiVOIP Connect the other end of the cable to your network 61 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide 4 Terminal Mode When a voip ISDN connector is to be connected to a PBX extension line or to a telco line select Terminal as the Layer 1 Interface in the ISDN Parameters screen When making cable connections an NT1 device will be needed between the MultiVOIP and the PSTN or between the MultiVOIP and any PBX with a U interface For more information see Appendix B Cable Pinouts in this manual Connect cables between voip ISDN connectors and network equipment NOTE In order to operate in Terminal mode the network equipment to which you will be connecting e g PBX must support D channel signaling in its ISDN S T interface 62 MultiVOIP User Guide Mechanical Installation amp Cabling IP Parameters Ctrl Alt Voice Channels Ctr H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters CtriA SMTP Parameters CtrleAlt S Ctrl Alt O ISDN BRI Parameters Select BRI Interface ERIN ie Dialing Options Inter Digit Timer 2000 me 9 Network e Switch Information Numbering Details PCM Law Country C ALaw Calling Party Operator C MU Law Number Type Nati
173. erTerminal or equivalent Normally this should be disabled because it uses MultiVOIP processing resources Console messages are meant for tech support personnel Filters button Click to access secondary screen on where console messages can be included excluded by category and on a per channel basis See the Console Messages Filter Settings screen on subsequent page Turn Off Logs Y N Check to disable log reporting function Logs Buttons Only one of these three log reporting methods GUI SMTP or SNMP may be chosen GUI Y N User must view logs at the MultiVOIP configuration program SNMP Y N Log messages will be delivered to the MultiVoipManager application program SMTP Y N Log messages will be sent to user specified email address SysLog Server Y N This box must be checked if logging is to be Enable done in conjunction with a SysLog Server program For more on SysLog Server see Operation amp Maintenance chapter IP Address n n n n IP address of computer connected to voip for n network on which SysLog Server program is 0 255 running Port 514 Logical port for SysLog Server 514 is commonly used Online Statistics integer Set the interval in seconds at which Updation logging information will be updated Interval 158 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration To customize console messages by category and or by channel click on Fil
174. ers Regional Parameters etc Phone Book numeric Indicates the version of the inbound Version and outbound phonebook portion of the MultiVOIP software Mac alpha Denotes the number assigned as the Address numeric voip unit s unique Ethernet address Up Time days Indicates how long the voip has been hours running since its last booting mm ss Hardware alpha Indicates the version of the ID numeric MultiVOIP unit s circuit board and components The frequency with which the System Information screen is updated is determined by a setting in the Logs screen Logs _ lt MV Enable Console Messages Logs I Turn Off Logs GUI C SMTP SNMP gt SysLog Serve 175 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 20 Set Baud Rate The Connection option in the sidebar menu has a Settings item that includes the baud rate setting for the COM port of the computer running the MultiVOIP software pao RE 5B 19200801 First it is important to note that the default COM port established by the MultiVOIP program is COM1 Do not accept the default value until you have checked the COM port allocation on your PC To do this check for COM port assignments in the system resource dialog box es of your Windows operating system If COM1 is not available you must change the COM port setting to COM2 or some other COM port that you have confirmed as being
175. ervices Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl AlteyY Call Signaling Alte RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl Alt S ft ISDN BRI Ctrl F gt Multi olP Multi OIP 5 08 DP Firmw Shortcut Sidebar Ctrl Alt U Configuration Ethernet IP Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces 151 Technical Configuration RADIUS Server Address Accounting Pott Retransmission Interval Number of Retransmissions Shared Secret m Radius Attributes IV Select All Attributes IV Channel Number IV Duration IV Packets Sent IV Bytes Sent IV Packets Lost M Outbound Digits IV Call Status From Details IV Gateway Name IV IP Address IV Description IV Options MultiVOIP User Guide Cancel Select Attributes Help Start Date Time Call Mode Packets Received Bytes Received Coder Prefix Matched To Details JV Gateway Name IV IP Address IV Description IV Options The fields of the RADIUS screen are described in the table below 152 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration RADIUS Screen Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable Y N When checked the MultiVOIP will Accounting access the accounting functionality of the Server n n nn IP address of the RADIUS server that Address 0 255 handles accounting billing for the current MultiVOIP unit Accoun
176. esessteeees 143 Cadence 3 ricrescere 143 Cadence 4 0 ececcesseeeeeereeees 143 Frequency 1 0 eeeeeeereeeseeees 142 Frequency 2 o eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 142 Gain heise eee Kees 142 GAN 2 ec Resende iid 142 TonetPaitys 2 260 dacs 142 customized log email 147 149 customized RADIUS Accounting 154 customized RADIUS accounting parameters eee eects 155 D Channel Information fields ISDN BRI Statistics ccceeeeseeeee 286 data Capacity sesser 9 10 366 MultiVOIP User Guide data COMPFeSSION eceeceeeeeteees 11 Date amp Time Setup program menu option command eee 301 Date and Time Setup option description MultiVOIP program MENU ccc see reen earne 298 debugging Messages 158 Default Supplementary Services fielde rores ie ee ee 172 Default Voice FAX field 100 default baud rate MultiVOIP software connection 176 default configuration user 177 default IP address of Multi VOIP 76 default IP address of MultiVOIP units E ERA E 26 default values software 310 delay packets eee 107 delay versus voice quality 108 Delete File button Logs Statistics screen 273 Description callee location Bi E RERE 237 Tl E S 194 Description callee outbound phonebook Bl E E beled 229 A EET 186 Description field Registered Gateway Details imorn ne 290 Description From De
177. est level gatekeeper Alternate Proxy 1 is second Alternate Proxy 2 is the lowest order SIP proxy server TTL Value The SIP proxy Time to Live value As soon as a in seconds MultiVOIP gateway registers with a SIP proxy server allowing the proxy server to control its call traffic a countdown timer begins The TTL Value is the interval of the countdown timer Before the TTL countdown expires the MultiVOIP gateway needs to register with the gatekeeper in order to maintain the connection If the MultiVOIP does not register before the TTL interval expires the MultiVOIP gateway s registration with the proxy server will expire and the proxy server will no longer permit call traffic to or from that gateway Calls in progress will continue to function even if the gateway becomes de registered 119 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 120 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The tables below describes all fields in the general SPP Call Signaling screen SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Single Port Protocol SPP Mode Direct SPP voip systems can operate Client or in two modes Registrar in the direct mode where all voip gateways have static IP addresses assigned to them or in the registrar client mode where one voip gateway serves as registrar and all other gateways being its clients point to that
178. etimes 8 must be dialed on a PBX phone to divert calls onto a leased line or to a voip system However sometimes PBX systems are smart enough to route calls to a voip system without a special access code so that 9 might still be used for all calls outside of the building There are also digits special access codes that must be dialed to gain access to a particular discount long distance carrier or to some other closed or proprietary telephone system c local exchange numbers Within any calling area there will be many local exchange numbers A single exchange may be used for an entire small town In cities an exchange may be used for a particular neighborhood although exchanges in cities do not always cover easily discernible areas Organizations like businesses governments schools and universities are also commonly assigned exchange numbers for their exclusive use In some cases these organizational assigned exchanges can become non localized because the exchange is assigned to one facility and linked by the organization s private network to other sometimes distant locations d specialized codes Some proprietary voip units assign to sites and phone stations numbers that are not compatible with PSTN numbering This can also occur in PBX or key systems These specialized numbers must be handled on a case by case basis 3 Knowing When to Drop Digits Example When calling area codes and Area code for Inner
179. etup 298 Date amp Time Setup eee 298 Download Factory Defaults 299 Download Firmware 299 Download IFM Firmware 299 Set Password 299 Unittistall sss eset scs rresia 299 Upgrade Software eee 299 MultiVOIP program menu option descriptions sees 298 299 MultiVOIP software installing 0 ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 location of files 0 eee 69 program icon location 70 uninstalling eee eeeee 72 321 MultiVOIP software moving around iN eee 86 MultiVoipManager not supported for 5 08 VOIDS eee eeeetecneeeeeeeeee 132 musical jingle during call transfer 165 MVP410ST cabling procedure 61 QLOUNCING eee eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 unpacking 57 MVP810ST cabling procedure 61 grounding eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Unpack gisi iniiae 57 Name IP Server field 161 NAT Traversal screen fields 374 MultiVOIP User Guide Enable seeen 161 Keep Alive Timers 161 Name IP Server ceee 161 POTT iesper ernea 161 Port Servet cccccsccessseeeeestteeeees 161 national rate calls to foreign voip sites l A AE essed tree ectesuptuetee 221 Netcoder coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX oo eeeeecseceseceseeesteeeeees 296 network access 0 eee eee eee eee 134 Network Disconnection field 110 network terminal settings voip and PBX COPE E EOR 127 No of Ent
180. f the party that is originating the call occurring on a specific channel This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is originating the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Calling Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field When channel 2 of the Omaha voip is used to make a call to any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Calling Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip 168 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Alerting If the home voip unit is receiving the Party call and Alerting Party is selected Allowed then the identifier from the Caller Id Name Type field will tell the originating remote CNI voip unit that the call is ringing This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Alerting Par
181. ffice Area 520 204 16 49 75 8 Channel Analog VolP MVP810 r PBX System Main Number remote site Whenever an out of town employee dials a 12 digit number beginning with the listed 5 digit destination pattern 9 1 area code of another company location the PBX hands the call to the voip system The local voip strips off the 9 and directs the call to the IP address of the remote voip Theremote voip receives the call and hands it to its PBX The PBX then completes the call to the PSTN The one digit Outbound destination patterns pertain to 3 digit calling between company employees a 45 Phonebook Example MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Voip Sites with Phonebooks l Boise Office I Boise Voip Boise Voip l Area 208 I Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook PBX System l Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefixto Prefix IP Description 1 Main Nene l Remove to Add Incoming Calls pattern Digits Remove to Add Addar Outgoing Calls in Number 1 333 2700 T 91208 9 Incoming call 91505 12 none none 204 Outgoing calls I I to PSTN 16 49 to Santa Fe I I Boise Area is area I I 7 7 incoming calls 2 3 none none 204 3 digit calls to to extensions 16 49 Santa Fe
182. finitions cont d Field Name Values Description Supplementary Services Status Call on Hold alphanumeric Describes held call by its IP address source location gateway identifier and hold duration Location gateway identifiers comes from Gateway Name field in Phone Book Configuration screen of remote voip Call Waiting alphanumeric Describes waiting call by its IP address source location gateway identifier and hold duration Location gateway identifiers comes from Gateway Name field in Phone Book Configuration screen of remote voip Caller ID There are four values Calling Party identifier Alerting Party identifier Busy Party identifier and Connected Party identifier This field shows the identifier and status of a remote voip which has Call Name Identification enabled with which this voip unit is currently engaged in some voip transmission The status of the engagement Connected Alerting Busy or Calling is followed by the identifier of a specific channel of a remote voip unit This identifier comes from the Caller Id field in the Supplementary Services screen of the remote voip unit 270 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Status fields Call Status hangup active Shows condition of current call
183. fix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Bismarck 1507 1507 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Rochester area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Rochester 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Cheyenne 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre area PSTN via Site D PBX 31 1615 200 2 9 9 Calls to Pierre PBX 492 extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 209 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 1402 4 Access to Lincoln local PSTN by users at remote VOIP locations via FXO port at Site F 1402 740 0 Gives remote voip users access 263740 to extension of key phone 1402 741 0 system at Site F Lincoln 263741 Because call is completed at key 1402 742 0 system abbreviated dialing 4 263742 digits is not workable Human operator or auto attendant is needed to complete these calls 210 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate
184. ftware You must have this IP information about every VOIP in the system ISDN BRI Telephony Parameters The following parameters must be known about the PBX or telco central office equipment to which the analog MultiVOIP will connect ISDN BRI Phone Parameters Ask phone company or telecom manager ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Parameters 3 Record them for this VOIP Site e In which country is this voip installed e Which operator switch type is used e What type of line coding use required A law or u law e Determine which BRI ports will be network side and which BRI ports will be terminal side Write down the values for these ISDN BRI telephony parameters You will need to enter these values in the ISDN Parameters screen ISDN BRI in the Configuration section of the MultiVOIP software 79 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SMTP Parameters for email call log reporting VOIP call traffic are to be sent by email required if log reports of Optional SMTP Parameters Preparation Task Ask Mail Server administrator to set up email account with password for the MultiVOIP unit itself Be sure to give a unique identifier to each individual MultiVOIP unit well Get the IP address of the mail server computer as To LT Department re email account for VOIP MEMO O ie AE voip
185. g area which includes both Inner London and Outer London Generally local calling rates apply only within a single area code and for all calls outside that area code national rates apply There are however some European cases where local calling rates extend beyond a single area code Local rates between Inner and Outer London are one example of this It is also possible in some locations that calls within an area code may be national calls But this is rare United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Bluebird Zipper Co Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co 5 VOIP PBX Site Paris idani Calls at London local rates Local Calling Area France 219 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Similarly the VOIP system allows Wren Clothing employees in London and Amsterdam to call anywhere in Paris at local rates it allows Wren Clothing employees in Paris and London to call anywhere in Amsterdam at local rates United Kingdom Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam Wren Clothing Co a VOIP PBX Site London pe The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Paris AW 4 Calls at Amsterdam local rates Calls at Paris local rates France Local Calling Areas 220 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration National Rate Calls Within Nation of Remote VOIP Site In
186. general the Inbound Phonebook entries of the local voip unit will match the Outbound Phonebook entries of the remote voip unit Similarly the Outbound Phonebook entries of the local voip unit will match the Inbound Phonebook entries of the remote voip unit There will often be non matching entries but it s nonetheless useful to notice the matching between the phonebooks 8 Simulating Network in lab on benchtop One common method of configuring a voip network is to set up a local IP network in a lab connect voip units to it and perhaps have phones connected on channel banks to make test calls 43 Phonebook Tips MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions NOTES 44 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Example Phonebook Example Boise Office One Common Situation I Area 208 I PBX System Main Number 333 2700 Voip Example This company has offices in three different cities The PBX units all operate alike Notably they all give access to outside lines using 9 They all are smart enough to identify voip calls without using a special access digit 8 is used in some systems Finally the system operates so that employees in any office can dial employees in any other office using only three digits Here are the phonebooks needed for that system FOB 2 90 extensions 204 16 49 73 24 Channel Digital VolP I I I I I I I I I I f MVP2410 Inbound Phonebo
187. ges I Tum Off Logs must first be selected in the Logs screen SMTP Parameters Password Mail Server IPaddress Port Number Mail Type C Text Subject Call Logs YOIP UNIT 3 ReplyTo Address technician acmetech com Recipient Address Jadmin acmetech com p Mail Criteria Number of Records 500 T Number of Days Email reports can be sent out periodicallyor when a certain numberof phone calls have been logged Reporting Method setene _______Lancel a Help wet Select Fields a Custom Fields lets the user determine ich technical details ofeach phone call to record in the logs Mail Now m Custom Fields I Select All Fields T Channel Number Duration I Packets Sent I Bytes Sent I Packets Lost I Outbound Digits Received W Call Status Call Direction Server Details Disconnect Reason I Start Date Time M Call Mode T Packets Received I Bytes Received T Coder I Prefix Matched M Call Type I DTMF Capability I Outbound digits sent r From Details I GatewayName i PAddress I Description T Options To Details I GatewayName I IPAddress I Description I Options Call Logs SLNo Start Date amp Time Duration Status 01 17 2002 amp 09 43 24 00 01 47 Success 01 17 2002 amp 10 30 33 00 26 46 Success Voice Voice Call Mode The requested 01 17 2002 amp 11 05 22 00 0
188. ght be unnecessary to reach those numbers However to specify only the 30 lines actually used by the key system the destination pattern 018226374 would have to be replaced by three other destination patterns namely 0182263740 0182263741 and 0182263742 In this way calls to 0182 263 7430 through 0182 263 7499 would be properly directed to the PSTN In the Site D outbound phonebook the 30 lines are defined exactly that is without making any adjacent phone numbers unreachable through the voip system 248 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Outbound PhoneBook of the MVP3010 is shown below Outbound Phone Book for MVP3010 Digital VOIP Site D Destin Remov Add IP Comment Pattern e Prefix Address Prefix 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 901189 901189 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to any Note 3 PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP Reading UK 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Carlisle 90182 Calls to Tavistock local PSTN Site F could be arranged by operator or possibly by auto attendant 90182 9 200 2 9 5 Calls to extensions of key 263 phone system at Tavistock 740 office 90182 9 200 2 9 5 263 741 90182 9 200 2 9 5 263 742 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading Note 3 T
189. h and be controllable by the MultiVoipManager software Default disabled Trap Manager Parameters Address 4 places n n n n IP address of MultiVoipManager n 0 255 PC Community A community is a group of VOIP Name endpoints that can communicate with each other Often public is used to designate a grouping where all end users have access to entire VOIP network However calling permissions can be configured to restrict access as needed Port Number 162 The default port number of the SNMP manager receiving the traps is the standard port 162 Community Length 19 First community grouping Name 1 characters max Case sensitive Permissions Read Only If this community needs to change MultiVOIP settings select Read Write Read Write Otherwise select Read Only to view settings Community Length 19 Second community grouping Name 2 characters max Case sensitive Permissions Read Only If this community needs to change MultiVOIP settings select Read Write Read Write Otherwise select Read Only to view settings 134 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 12 Set Regional Parameters Phone Signaling Tones amp Cadences This dialog box can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar Accessing Regional Parameters Pulldown Icon amp Multi olP Multi OIP 5 08 _DP Firmw es Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt l Voice Channel
190. hannel O Outbound digit 7175662 CAS 0 TX ABCD 1 1 1 1 H323IF 0 MasterSlaveStatus Master CAS 0 RX ABCD 1 1 1 1 Pstn State 7 TimeStamp 171105 H323IF 0 Coder used g7231 H323IF 0 FastStart Setup Not Used H323IF 0 Already opened the outgoing logical channel H323IF 0 Coder used g7231 CAS 0 RX ABCD 0 0 0 0 Pstn State 9 TimeStamp 171315 PSTN dialing digit ended on 0 PSTN pstn proceeding indication on 0 CAS 0 RX ABCD 1 1 1 1 Pstn State 12 TimeStamp 172995 CAS 0 TX ABCD 1 1 1 1 PSTN pstn call connected on 0 9 When you see the following message end to end voip connectivity has been achieved PSTN pstn call connected on X where x is the number of the voip channel carrying the call 10 If the HyperTerminal messages do not confirm connectivity go to the Troubleshooting procedure below 53 Troubleshooting MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Troubleshooting If you cannot establish connectivity between two voips in the system follow the steps below to determine the problem 1 Ping both MultiVOIP units to confirm connectivity to the network Command Prompt C gt ping 264 26 122 2 122 2 with 32 bytes of data 26 122 2 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 254 26 122 2 time lt i ms TTL 254 26 122 2 time lt i ms TTL 254 Reply fron 26 122 2 time lt i ms TTL 254 C gt ping 204 26 122 2 122 2 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 26 122 2 b
191. he Logs screen To implement this function you must install a SysLog client program For more info see the SysLog Server Functions section of the Operation amp Maintenance chapter of the User Guide 32 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phone IP Starter Config Phone IP Starter Configuration continued 12 Enable premium H 450 telephony features 13 14 15 Go to Supplementary Services Select any features to be used For Call Hold Call Transfer amp Call Waiting specify the key sequence that the phone user will press to invoke the feature For Call Name Identification specify the allowed name types to be used and a caller id descriptor If Call Forwarding is to be used enable this feature in the Add Edit Inbound Phone Book screen After making changes click on OK in the current configuration screen before moving on to the next configuration screen RADIUS Support If you intend to use a RADIUS server for billing or other accounting purposes enter the server information in the RADIUS screen STUN Support If you are using the SIP protocol with the UDP transmission protocol and if you want the MultiVOIP to operate behind a NAT Network Address Translation server using the STUN protocol Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT enable this feature in the NAT Traversal screen You must also specify the IP address etc of the STUN server you will use The STUN server could be a local device or it cou
192. he correct newest bin file and click Open Lookin aMukVOIP A ES File name mvp Files of type Code Files bin 7 Cancel P A 6 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the file transfer Ww o e 0000000 Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 The MultiVOIP s Boot LED will turn off at the end of the transfer 7 The Download Firmware procedure is complete 309 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Downloading Factory Defaults 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program must be off when invoking the Download Factory Defaults command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Download Factory Defaults command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download Factory Defaults Download Factory Defaults oO P d z Multi OIP 310 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 3 If a password has been established the Password Verification screen will appear Password Yerification Type in the username and password and click OK 4 The MVP___ Firmware screen appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Multi OIP Firmware oR __ cancel _ Click OK to download the factory defaults The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 311 Operation and Maintenance Mu
193. he input port Default 16dB 142 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration 143 Custom Tone Pair Settings Definitions Field Name Values Description Cadence 1 integer time On off pattern of tone durations value in used to denote phone ringing milli seconds phone busy dial tone 0 zero value for indicates continuous tone dial tone survivability and re order indicates Cadence 1 is duration of first continuous tone period of tone being on in the cadence of the telephony signal which could be ring tone busy tone unobtainable tone or dial tone Cadence 2 duration in Cadence 2 is duration of first milliseconds off period in signaling cadence Cadence 3 duration in Cadence 3 is duration of second milliseconds on period in signaling cadence Cadence 4 duration in Cadence 4 is duration of second milliseconds off period in the signaling cadence after which the 4 part cadence pattern of the telephony signal repeats Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 14 Set SMTP Parameters Log Reports by Email The SMTP Parameters screen is applicable when the VOIP administrator has chosen to receive log reports by email this is done by selecting the SMTP checkbox in the Logs Traces screen and selecting Enable SMTP in the SMTP Parameters screen The SMTP Parameters screen can be reached by pulldown menu keyboard shortcut or sidebar
194. he pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 249 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Inbound PhoneBook of the MVP3010 is shown below Inbound Phone Book for MVP3010 Digital VOIP Site D Remove Add Channel Comments Prefix Prefix Number 0207 9 7 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites Note 4 to call local numbers those within the Note 5 Site D area code 0207 Inner London over the VOIP network 0208 9 8 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites Note 4 to call local numbers those in Outer Note 5 London over the VOIP network 0207 3 0 Allows phone users at remote voip sites 39883 to call extensions of the Site D PBX using three digits beginning with 3 Note 4 9 gives PBX station users access to outside line Note 5 The comma represents a one second pause the time required for the user to receive a dial tone on the outside line PSTN Commas can be used in the Inbound Phonebook but not in the Outbound Phonebook 250 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 01189 0118 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to any PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1
195. hernet IP Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional SMTP RADIUS Logs Traces NAT Traversal 156 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration If you enable console messages you can customize the types of messages to be included excluded in log reports by clicking on the Filters button and using the Console Messages Filter Settings screen see subsequent page If you use the logging function select the logging option that applies to your VoIP system design If you intend to use a SysLog Server program for logging click in that Enable check box The common SysLog logical port number is 514 If you intend to use the MultiVOIP web browser GUI for configuration and control of MultiVOIP units be aware that the web browser GUI does not support logs directly However when the web browser GUI is used log files can still be sent to the voip administrator via email which requires activating the SMTP logging option in this screen Logs Console Message Settings M Enable Console Messages Filters Cancel Logs I Tum Off Logs GUI SMTP C SNMP m SysLog Serve IP Address Port Online Statistics Updation Interval 5 Sec 157 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Definitions Field Name Values Description Enable Y N Allows MultiVOIP debugging messages to be Console read via a basic terminal program like Messages Hyp
196. his is Phonebook Configuration and it is discussed in Chapter 6 for North American T1 telephony standards and in Chapter 7 for European E1 telephony standards Loading MultiVOIP Software onto the PC The software loading procedure does not present every screen or option in the loading process It is assumed that someone with a thorough knowledge of Windows and the software loading process is performing the installation The MultiVOIP software and User Guide are contained on the MultiVOIP product CD Because the CD is auto detectable it will start up automatically when you insert it into your CD ROM drive When you have finished loading your MultiVOIP software you can view and print the User Guide by clicking on the View Manuals icon 1 Be sure that your MultiVOIP has been properly cabled and that the power is turned on 67 Software Installation MultiVOIP User Guide 2 Insert the MultiVOIP CD into your CD ROM drive The CD should start automatically It may take 10 to 20 seconds for the Multi Tech CD installation window to display MultiVOIP ISDN BRI Welcome ae Install Java Multi Tech Systems Inc MuitiVOIP ISDN BRI cet Adobe NAL Reader fare version 5 06 and earlier er te r File Transfers Downloads in al e Chapter of the User Guide Multi lechi Systems If the Multi Tech Installation CD window does not display automatically click My Computer then right click the CD ROM drive icon click
197. hone Book Statistics Change Passi Save amp Reboo Logout Help Old Password New Password Reconfirm Password NOTE You can disable the username and password functions by entering a username but then leaving both the New Password field and the Reconfirm Password field blank Then click OK In that case you will not be prompted for username or password when entering the web browser GUI 320 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Un Installing the MultiVOIP Software 1 To un install the MultiVOIP configuration software go to Start Programs and locate the MultiVOIP entry Select Uninstall MVP Vx xx versions may vary Windows98 S By Exploring mvp30 dwg C hE Uninstal 2 Two confirmation screens will appear Click Yes and OK when you are certain you want to continue with the uninstallation process Confirm File Deletion Confirm File Deletion 321 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 3 A special warning message similar to that shown below may appear for the MultiVOIP software s bin file Click Yes ReadOnly File Detected x An option that you selected requires that files be installed to your system or files be uninstalled from your system or both A read only file C ProgramFiles MVP3000 v4 00a mvpt1 bin was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click
198. honebook Prefix to Prefix Description Total Prefix to Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls Digits Remove Outgoing Calls 91505 9 Incoming calls Outgoing calls to PSTN to Boise area Santa Fe local calls 2 2 Incoming calls 7 3 none none 204 3 digit calls to to extensions 16 49 Boise of company s 73 employees PBX system extensions in Santa Fe 700 790 91520 12 none none 204 Outgoing calls 16 49 to Flagstaff 75 area 6 3 none none 204 3 digit calls to 16 49 Flagstaff 75 employees extensions 600 630 Flagstaff Voip Flagstaff Voip Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefix to Prefix IP Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove to Add Addr Outgoing Calls 91520 9 Incoming calls 91505 Outgoing calls to PSTN to Santa Fe Flagstaff local area calls 6 6 Incoming calls 3 digit calls to Santa Fe employees extensions 200 240 47 none Outgoing calls to Boise area 3 digit calls to Boise employees extensions 700 790 Phonebook Example MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Worksheet Voip Location ID Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefix to IP Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove Addr Outgoing Calls Other Details Voip Location ID Inbound Phonebo
199. hoose which configuration settings you will apply to the upgraded software your current configuration settings or the factory default configuration settings Upgrade Configuration r Upgrade Configuration C Download Factory Defaults Retain Current Configuration Cancel Choose one and click OK 4 You can monitor the progress of the upgrade process in the lower left corner of the screen Downloading Firmware Packets Sent 132 Acks received 132 Errors 0 Looking for response from MultiVOIP Please Wait 5 When the booting process is done the GUI will shut down 324 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance FTP Server File Transfers Downloads Special FTP Upgrade Instructions for SW version 5 06 and earlier To upgrade a MultiVOIP from software version 5 06 or earlier an ftp primer file must first be sent to the VOIP This file is located in the Software ftp_Primer folder on the CD and the file name is FTP_Primer bin Before uploading this file it must be renamed mvpttftp bin The VoIP will only accept files of this name This is a safety precaution to prevent the wrong files from being uploaded to the VoIP Once the primer file has been uploaded upload the FTP firmware file If you accepted the defaults during the software loading process this file is located on your local drive at C Program Files Multi Tech Systems MultiVOIP 5 09 The firmware file itself is named
200. ical System4 Notice System1 Critical User Warning System2 Info Local6 Critical Local4 Emerg UUCP Debug Local4 Info User Error Local3 Notice Kernel Info News Info Suctem Critical Hostname 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 1 77NN1 343 Message This is Syslog test message number 0020 This is Syslog test message number 0019 This is Syslog test message number 0018 This is Syslog test message number 0017 This is Syslog test message number 0016 This is Syslog test message number 0015 This is Syslog test message number 0014 This is Syslog test message number 0013 This is Syslog test message number 0012 This is Syslog test message number 0011 This is Syslog test message number 0010 This is Syslog test message number 0009 This is Syslog test message number 0008 This is Syslog test message number 0007 This is Syslog test message number 0006 This is Syslog test message number 0005 This is Syslog test message number 0004 This is Syslog test message number 0003 Thie ic Guelnn tect meceane number NNN 100 61MPH 17 02 09 18 2002 Chapter 9 Warranty Service and Tech Support 344 MultiVOIP User Guide Warranty Service amp Tech Support Limited Warranty Multi Tech Systems Inc MTS warrants that its products will be free from defects in material or work
201. ide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Phonebook Pulldown Menu Phone Book Outbound Phone Book Alt O gt List Entries Ctrl L Inbound Phone Boo Ls Alt gt AddeEntry cCtri 4 Edit Entry Ctrl E Inbound Phonebook Shortcut Outbound Phonebook Shortcut Alt I Alt O Phonebook Sidebar Menu Configuration Advanced Phone Book Outbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Inbound Phone Book List Entries Add Entry Edit Entry Statistics 225 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phonebook Configuration Procedure 1 Select Outbound Phone Book List Entries MuliVorP MultiVOLP vb 0U CP Firmware Jul 22 2005 Configuration Advanced Phone Bock Statistics Download Connection inip ANBZOSCHEtS EN 4D Click Add 226 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration 2 The Add Edit Outbound PhoneBook screen appears r Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details I Accept AnyNumber Destination Pattern ce334 Total Digits l 12 Cancel Remove Prefix 00334 Add Prefix E IP Address 200 002 OOS OOF Description Access to Lyon area r Protocol Type eo m H 323 JV Use GateKeeper GatewyH323ID Gateway Prefix es H 323 Port Number 1720 m SIP I Use Proxy Help Advanced Transport Protocol TCR UDP SIP Port Number 5060 SIP UR
202. ime Duration Length of call Call Voice or fax Mode Packets Total packets sent Packets Total packets Sent in call Received received in call 147 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Custom Fields Definitions cont d Field Description Field Description Bytes Total bytes sent in Bytes Total bytes received Sent call Received in call Packets Packets lost in Coder Voice Coder Lost call Compression Rate used for call will be listed in log Outbound The DTMF dialing Prefix When selected the By ed digits received by Matched phonebook prefix this gateway from matched in the remote processing the call gateway will be listed in log presuming that DTMF is set to Out of Band Call Successful or Call Type Indicates the Call Status unsuccessful Signaling protocol used for the call H 323 SIP or SPP Call Indicates call s DTMF Indicates whether the Capability DTMF dialing digits are carried Inband or Out of Band The corresponding field values differ for the 3 different voip protocols For H 323 this field can display Out of Band or Inband For SIP it can display either Out of Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband Direction originating party 148 MultiVOIP User Guide Te
203. ing functions When using the web browser GUI logging can be done by email the SMTP option 76 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Functional Equivalence of Interfaces The MultiVOIP Windows configuration program is generally used to do the initial configuration that is setting an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit so that the VOIP unit can communicate with the the web browser GUI Management of the VOIP after that point can be done from either of these two programs since they both offer essentially the same functionality Functionally the web browser GUI can replace the MultiVOIP configuration program after the initial configuration is complete with minor exceptions as noted especially logging WARNING Do not attempt to interface the MultiVOIP unit with two control programs simultaneously that is by accessing the MultiVOIP Windows configuration program via the Command Port and the web browser interface via the Ethernet Port The results of using two programs to control a single VOIP simultaneously would be unpredictable 77 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Local Configuration This manual primarily describes local configuration with the Windows GUI After IP addresses have been set locally using the Windows GUI most aspects of configuration logging functions are an exception can be handled through the web browser GUI as well see the Operation and Maintenance chapter of this manual In most as
204. ini a aE iE 82 technical support sesseseseseeeeseeeee e 347 TEI Assignment fields ISDN BRI Statistics Switch Information 286 TEI n Assignment s s s 128 TEI n fields ISDN BRI Statistics Switch Information 286 telecom safety warnings 56 telephony signaling cadences 135 telephony signaling tones 135 telephony toning schemes 141 temperature Operating sann 59 terminal mode amp D channel support E EE E E neste 62 terminal network settings voip and PBX arenie n e as 127 timeout interval voips under H 323 gatekeeper 114 voips under SIP proxy server 119 Timer Interval between Pings Link Management field 283 To gateway statistics logs field 273 toll call savings Bl teint Servs tetera asia 217 a A EAE E AE A E E 179 Tone Pair custom field 142 MultiVOIP User Guide tones signaling eee eeeeeeeeeee 135 Total Digits outbound field BEV EAE 229 TL weet tuesivdertesceesste opseeactesits dents 186 trace on off logging eee 159 Transfer Sequence 163 165 Transmitted RTCP Packets IP Stats field aakri 280 Transmitted RTP Packets IP Stats field atna a 280 Transmitted TCP Packets IP Stats field arr rai 279 Transmitted Total Packets IP Stats Hel Geek Meine 278 Transmitted UDP Packets IP Stats Pel dere Mc ter acess tte AA 279 Transport Protocol SIP field Be eA AON es a ees oe
205. ions for Rack Installations eee eeeeeseeeeeeeee 59 Safety Warnings ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 Safety Warnings Telecom 56 MultiVOIP User Guide Save Setup command 177 saving configuration 177 315 Saving the MultiVOIP Configuration PEE EE R 177 savings on toll calls j a E EE EE 217 A e E E ES 179 Select All RADIUS Attributes field PAE OE E A EEN 154 Select All SMTP logs field 147 Select Attributes RADIUS button EA SEE vi das wetsotpas EE tyes 153 Select BRI Interface field 285 Select BRI Interface ISDN BRI field g sfudasdeiubabbsstsusbifedeesbbossaucated cathe 127 Select Channel field 0 00 100 Select Channel Supplementary Services field ceeeeeeeeeeee 165 Selected Coder field 0 00 103 serial COM port lack of on PC 26 Server Address RADIUS screen field enire nasisi 153 Server Details call progress field 269 Server Details RADIUS Attributes ET a EEE A A E ET 154 Server Details SMTP logs field 149 Server Details statistics logs field EEE E EEE ET 274 Service Records eeeseeeeeeeeees 95 Set Baud Rate oo eee 176 Set Log Reporting Method 156 Set Password program menu option COMMANA sinsin iiiar 317 Set Password web browser GUI command 0 0 eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeee 320 Set Password option description MultiVOIP program menu 299 Set Regional Parameters
206. ired entry in the Pierre Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 1402263742 The call would be directed to the Lincoln voip s IP address 200 2 9 5 Generally on such a call the caller would have to dial an initial 9 But typically the PBX would not pass the initial 9 to the voip If the PBX did pass along that 9 however its removal would have to be specified in the local Outbound Phonebook B The corresponding entry in the Lincoln Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 1402263742 for calls within the office at Lincoln 1402 for calls to the Lincoln local calling area PSTN Call Event Sequence 1 Caller at Pierre dials 914022637424 2 Pierre PBX removes 9 and passes 14022637424 to voip 3 Pierre voip passes remaining string 14022637424 on to the Lincoln voip at IP address 200 2 9 5 4 The dialed string matches an inbound phonebook entry at the Lincoln voip namely 1402263742 5 The Lincoln voip rings one of the three FXS ports connected to the Lincoln key phone system 6 The call will be routed to extension 7424 either by a human receptionist operator or to an auto attendant which allows the caller to specify the extension to which they wish to be connected 214 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Site F calling Site D A voip call from a Lincoln key extension to extension 3117 on the PBX in Pierre South Dakota A
207. iting MV Enable OK Default Retrieve Sequence ical ean Channel Of the features implemented under Supplementary Services three are very closely related Call Transfer Call Hold and Call Waiting Call Name Identification is similar but not identical to the premium PSTN feature commonly known as Caller ID Call Transfer Call Transfer allows one party to re connect the party with whom they have been speaking to a third party The first party is disconnected when the third party becomes connected Feature is invoked by a programmable phone keypad sequence for example 7 Call Hold Call Hold allows one party to maintain an idle non talking connection with another party while receiving another call Call Waiting while initiating another call Call Transfer or while performing some other call management function Invoked by keypad sequence Call Waiting Call Waiting notifies an engaged caller of an incoming call and allows them to receive a call from a third party while the party with whom they have been speaking is put on hold Invoked by keypad sequence Call Name Identification When enabled for a given voip unit the home voip this feature gives notice to remote voips involved in calls Notification goes to the remote voip administrator not to individual phone stations When the home voip is the caller a plain English descriptor will be sent to the remote callee voip identifying 163
208. itional expense over your existing IP network which has ordinarily been data only To access this free voice and fax communication you simply connect the MultiVOIP to your telephone equipment and your existing Internet connection These ISDN Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs inter operate readily with T1 or E1 MultiVOIP units T1 and E1 MultiVOIP units can operate in ISDN Primary Rate Mode ISDN PRI as well Figure 1 1 MVP 410ST 810ST Chassis Capacity MultiVOIP model MVP810ST accommodates four ISDN BRI lines eight B channels and model MVP410ST accommodates two ISDN BRI lines four B channels Both of these MultiVOIP units have a 10 100Mbps Ethernet interface and a command port for configuration Mounting Mechanically the MVP410ST and MVP810ST MultiVOIPs are designed for a one high industry standard EIA 19 inch rack enclosure The product must be installed by qualified service personnel in a restricted access area in accordance with Articles 110 16 10 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Phone System Transparency These MultiVOIPs inter operate with a telephone switch or PBX acting as a switching device that directs voice and fax calls over an IP network The MultiVOIPs have phonebooks directories that determine to who calls may be made and the sequences that must be used to complete calls through the MultiVOIP The phonebooks allow the phone user to interact with the VOIP system
209. ixed Digital Analog VOIP Systems Analog MultiVOIP units like the MVP 210 410 810 are compatible with digital MultiVOIP units like the MVP2410 In many cases digital and analog VOIP units will appear in the same telephony IP system In addition to MVP 210 410 810 MultiVOIP units Series II units legacy analog VOIP units Series I units made by MultiTech may be included in the system as well When legacy VOIP units are included the VOIP administrator must handle two styles of phonebooks in the same VOIP network The diagram below shows a small scale system of this kind one digital VOIP the MVP2410 operates with two Series II analog VOIPs an MVP210 and an MVP410 and two Series I legacy VOIPs two MVP200 units EXAMPLE Digital amp Analog VOIPs Site D in Same System Area Code 615 1 oa as i Other extensions R x3101 x3199 Fe wes Site E ae yey mn ND SSE AR Coe T o inaa Area Code 701 Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook OKO FXS Unit cH 200 cu EJE 421 200 2 9 7 201 t Client I Site F Site B Lincoln NE 77 Area Code 402 SS pie ek aor 200295 AMAS S T ee I Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Ri N Server Client Phonebook _ ie j MVP200 cH f l Unit 100 cH 717 5000 200 2 9 8 Series 1 analog VOIPs 1 Host i Holds phonebook for both f I Ss 507 717 5662 Site C Suburban Rochester 203 T1 Phonebook
210. k Starter Config 4 In the Add Prefix field enter any digits that must be dialed from your local voip to gain access to the PSTN North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system On Seattle PBX 9 is used to On London PBX 9 is used get an outside line to get an outside line Answer 9 is prefix to be Answer 9 is prefix to be added by local added by local Seattle voip London voip Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system On Rotterdam PBX 9 is used to get an outside line Answer 9 is prefix to be added by local Rotterdam voip 5 In the Channel Number field enter Hunting A hunting value means the voip unit will assign the call to the first available channel If desired specific channels can be assigned to specific incoming calls i e to any set of calls received with a particular incoming dialing pattern 39 Phonebook Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions 6 In the Description field it is useful to describe the ultimate destination of the calls For example ina New York City voip system incoming calls to Manhattan office might describe a phonebook entry as might the descriptor incoming calls to NYC local calling area The description should make the routing of calls easy to understand 40 characters max North America Euro National Call Lo
211. ke an 8 or 9 to access an outside line or to access the VOIP network Other PBXs can automatically distinguish between intra PBX calls PSTN calls and VOIP calls Some PBX units can also insert digits automatically when they receive certain dialing strings from a phone station For example a PBX may be programmable to insert automatically the three digit VOIP identifier strings into calls to be directed to analog VOIPs The MVP3010 offers complete flexibility for inter operation with PBX units so that a coherent dialing scheme can be established to connect a company s multiple sites together in a way that is convenient and intuitive for phone users When working together with modern PBX units the presence of the MVP3010 can be completely transparent to phone users within the company 257 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide International Telephony Numbering Plan Resources Due to the expansion of telephone number capacity to accommodate pagers fax machines wireless telephony and other new phone technologies numbering plans have been changing worldwide Many new area codes have been established new service categories have been established for example to accommodate GSM personal numbering corporate numbering etc Below we list several web sites that present up to date information on the telephony numbering plans used around the world While we find these to be generally good resources we wo
212. l of its components Confirm File Deletion x Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components 72 MultiVOIP User Guide Software Installation 3 A special warning message similar to that shown below may appear concerning the MultiVOIP software s bin file Click Yes ReadOnly File Detected X n option you selected requires that files be installed to your system or files be uninstalled from your system or both A read only file C Program Files MYP410 v4 00 myptl bin was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click the Yes button otherwise click No 4 A completion screen will appear InstallShield Wizard Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on the Multi Y OIP Bence Click Finish 73 Chapter 5 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Configuring the MultiVOIP There are two ways in which the MultiVOIP must be configured before operation technical configuration and phonebook configuration Technical Configuration First the MultiVOIP must be configured to operate with technical parameter settings that will match the equipment with which it interfaces There are eight types of technical parameters that must be set These technical parameters pertain to 1 its operation in an IP network 2 its ope
213. ld be a public STUN server accessible on the Internet Traffic Control If you intend to use a traffic control server go to Call Signaling and open the screen for the voip protocol you will use H 323 SIP or SPP For H 323 you can specify a primary and alternate gatekeepers for SIP a primary and alternate proxy servers for SPP a primary and alternate registrar gateways If the voip protocol is SIP note that a separate username number only and password can be specified for each voip channel 16 Go to Save Setup Save and Reboot Click OK This will save the parameter values that you have just entered The MultiVOIP s BOOT LED will light up while the configuration file is being saved and loaded into the MultiVOIP Don t do anything to the MultiVOIP until the BOOT LED is off a loss of power at this point could cause the MultiVOIP unit to lose the configuration settings you have made END OF PROCEDURE 33 Phonebook Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Starter Configuration with remote voip If the topic of voip phone books is new to you it may be helpful to read the PhoneBook Tips section page 41 before starting this procedure To do this part of the quick setup you need to know of another voip that you can call to conduct a test It should be at a remote location typically somewhere outside of your building You must know the phone number and IP address for that site We
214. lected gateway When a client registers all of its inbound phonebook s phone numbers become registered List of Lists all of the registered phone numbers for Registered the selected gateway Numbers 290 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance About Alternate Server Statistics Accessing Alternate Server Statistics Pulldown Statistics Call Progress Ctrl Alt A Logs Ctri 0 IP Statistics Ctrl P Registered Gateway Details Ctrl AlteW Link Management Ctrl 2 E Ctrl Alt 4 gt H323 Gatekeepers Ctl 8 ISDN BRI Statistics SIP Proxies Ctrl 9 E GPP Registrars Ctrl Alternate Serve Shortcut Sidebar El Statistics Call Progress Logs IP Statistics Link Management ISDN BRI Statistics Ctrl Alt 4 Registered Gateway De SIP Proxies SPP Registrars 291 H 323 GateKeepers LIP Address _ Po GKName_ Type Priority Status 65 126 90 143 1719 MYP_LSGK Primary 0 65 126 90 92 1719 MY PGK1 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Registered Predef 0 Not Registere H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Address n n n n The IP address of the gatekeeper for n 0 255 Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the gatekeeper that serves it GK Name alpha numeric Identifier for gatekeepe
215. lient mode but you want to make an exception and use Direct mode for the destination pattern of this particular Add Edit Phonebook entry leave this checkbox unselected Leave this checkbox unselected if your overall voip system is operating in the Direct SPP mode In this mode all voips in system are peers and each has its own static IP address Port Number Values numeric Description When operating in Registrar Client mode this is the port by which the gateway receives all SPP data and control messages from the registrar gateway This ability to receive all data and messages via one port allows the voip to operate behind a firewall with only one port open When operating in Direct mode this is the Port by which peer voips receive data and messages Alternate Phone Number Phone number associated with alternate IP routing numeric Remote Device is Advanced button Y N Check when system includes 1st generation MultiVOIPs to allow inter operation These include MVP 110 120 200 400 800 MultiVOIP units Values N A Description Gives access to secondary screen where an Alternate IP Route can be specified for backup or redundancy of signal paths See discussion on next page For SIP amp H 323 operation only 232 MultiVOIP User Guide MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Clicking on the Advanced button brings up the Alternate Routing s
216. llation prerequisites 78 installation mechanical 10 installing Java vis a vis web GUI 338 integrated phone data networks 218 Intercept Tone and required Interface amp Voice Fax settings 4 137 interface types S EAE ENARA 357 U 357 inter office dialing Bid E R ATES 218 TD a eari teiaa 180 inter operation BRI with T1 E1 PRI voips 4 10 inter operation with phone system 10 Piel dea chet ea oe 275 IP Address caller statistics logs Piel vez eed cyeedeneavad a en 275 IP Address Ethernet IP Parameters feldi so cccavecdehesdeactian edie Gis Sens 91 IP Address H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 292 IP Address IP Statistics field 278 IP Address outbound phonebook BL 3 ei aahinan kinetin 229 Td seh ek aici alate 186 IP Address ping target Link Management field 000 283 IP Address SIP Proxies Statistics Servers field ccccecseesseeeees 293 IP Address SPP Registrars Statistics Servers fieldiiserniseets sises 294 IP Address field Registered Gateway Details 2 3 ataei e 290 IP address of Multi VOIP default 76 IP Address to Ping Link Management field 283 IP address default of Multi VOIP UMA agi heds cece ses Heceesduve datasets Hake 26 371 Index IP Address From Details RADIUS Attributes field eee 155 IP Address From Details SMTP logs field
217. lthough most cadences have only two parts an on duration and an off duration some telephony cadences have four parts Most cadences then are expressed as two iterations of a two part sequence Although this is redundant it is necessary to allow for expression of 4 part cadences Custom Click on the Custom button to button bring up the Custom Tone Pair Settings screen The Custom button is active only when Custom is selected in the Country Region field This screen allows the user to specify tone pair attributes that are not found in any of the standard national regional telephony toning schemes 139 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Regional Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description User Defined Tones fields Type column alphanumeric Name of supervisory tone pair name specified Cannot be same as name of any by user standard tone pair Frequency 1 freq in Hertz Lower frequency of pair Frequency 2 freq in Hertz Higher frequency of pair Gain 1 gain in dB Amplification factor of lower 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute setting This applies to any supervisory tones that the MultiVOIP outputs as audio to the ISDN B channel port Default 16dB Gain 2 gain in dB Amplification factor of higher 3dB to 31dB frequency of pair and mute setting This applies to any supervisory tones
218. ltiVOIP User Guide 5 After the PC gets a response from the MultiVOIP the Dialog IP Parameters screen will appear IP Parameters m Diff Serv Parameters gt 434 Call Control PHB Free Ts TYPE Jl 46 VolP Media PHB IP Parameters I Enable DHCP _ IP Address 192 168 3 143 Cancel IP Mask 25 a 255 2a 0 Help Gateway E The user should verify that the correct IP parameter values are listed on the screen and revise them if necessary Then click OK 6 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the file transfer by 19090000090 Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 inl The MultiVOIP s Boot LED will turn off at the end of the transfer 7 The Download Factory Defaults procedure is complete 312 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Downloading Firmware 1 The MultiVoip Configuration program must be off when invoking the Download Firmware command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Download Factory Defaults command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Download Firmware Programs Download Firmware Windows98 Multi OIP 3 If a password has been established the Password Verification screen will appear Password Yerification EE a ees Type in the username and password and click OK 313 Operation and Mai
219. mail domain 145 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SMTP Parameters Definitions cont d Recipient Address Field Name Values Description Password alpha Login password for MultiVOIP numeric unit s email account Mail Server IP n n n n This is the mail server s IP address Address for n 0 to This mail server must be accessible 255 on the IP network to which the MultiVOIP is connected Port Number 25 25 is a standard port number for SMTP Mail Type text or html Mail type in which log reports will be sent Subject text User specified Subject line that will appear for all emailed log reports for this MultiVOIP unit Reply To email address User specified This email address Address functions as a source email identifier error has occurred email address receive log reports Mail Criteria for the MultiVOIP which of course cannot usefully receive email messages The Reply To address provides a destination for returned messages indicating the status of messages sent by the MultiVOIP esp to indicate when log report email was undeliverable or when an User specified Email address at which VOIP administrator will Criteria for sending log summary by email The log summary email will be sent out either when the user specified number of log messages has accumulated or once every day or multiple days which ever comes first Number of
220. manship for a period of two years from the date of purchase or if proof of purchase is not provided two years from date of shipment MTS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED This warranty does not apply to any products which have been damaged by lightning storms water or power surges or which have been neglected altered abused used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured repaired by the customer or any party without MTS s written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with MTS s instructions MTS s entire obligation under this warranty shall be limited at MTS s option to repair or replacement of any products which prove to be defective within the warranty period or at MTS s option issuance of a refund of the purchase price Defective products must be returned by Customer to MTS s factory transportation prepaid MTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ITS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS Repair Procedures for U S and Canadian Customers In the event that service is required products may be shipped freight prepaid to our Mounds View Minnesota factory Multi Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View MN 55112 Attn Repairs Serial A Returned Materials Authorization RMA is not
221. may be programmable to insert automatically the three digit VOIP identifier strings into calls to be directed to analog VOIPs The MVP2410 offers complete flexibility for inter operation with PBX units so that a coherent dialing scheme can be established to connect a company s multiple sites together in a way that is convenient and intuitive for phone users When working together with modern PBX units the presence of the MVP2410 can be completely transparent to phone users within the company 215 Chapter 7 E1 Phonebook Configuration European Telephony Standards 216 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration E1 Versus T1 Telephony Environments Phonebooks for Series II analog MultiVOIP units MVP130 MVP130FXS MVP210 MVP410 and MVP810 can be operated in either a North American telephony standards environment potentially operating with T1 digital MultiVOIPs or in a European telephony standards environment potentially operating with E1 digital MultiVOIPs The configuration of the phonebook is the same in either case However because the telephony environment is different in each case and the examples used here must reflect those differences we have separate chapters for phonebook configuration in North American T1 environments Chapter 6 and for that in European E1 environments Chapter 7 Consult the chapter that best fits the needs of your voip system Phonebook configuration examples shown for Series II a
222. ments Instructions for Disposal of WEEE by Users in the European Union The symbol shown below is on the product or on its packaging which indicates that this product must not be disposed of with other waste Instead it is the user s responsibility to dispose of their waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or where you purchased the product 352 Appendix A Cable Pinouts 353 Cable Pinouts MultiVOIP User Guide Appendix A Cable Pinouts Command Cable 9 pin female 25 pin male connector DTE connector DCE to PC serial port to voip command port Transmit Data TD Receive Data RD Clear to Send CTS Signal Ground GND Data Set Ready DSR Data Carrier Detect DCD Ethernet Connector The functions of the individual conductors of the MultiVOIP s Ethernet port are shown on a pin by pin basis below RJ 45 Ethernet Connector Pin Circuit Signal Name 1 TD Data Transmit Positive 2983 6 03 2 TD Data Transmit Negative 3 RD
223. messages Alternate Phone Number Phone number associated with alternate IP routing numeric Remote Device is legacy voip Y N When checked this MultiVOIP can operate with first generation MultiVOIP units in the same IP network These include MVP 110 120 200 400 800 Advanced button Values N A Description Gives access to secondary screen where an Alternate IP Route can be specified for backup or redundancy of signal paths See discussion on next page For SIP amp H 323 operation only 189 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Clicking on the Advanced button brings up the Alternate Routing secondary screen This feature provides an alternate path for calls if the primary IP network cannot carry the traffic Often in cases of failure call traffic is temporarily diverted into the PSTN However this feature could also be used to divert traffic to a redundant backup unit in case one voip unit fails The user must specify the IP address of the alternate route for each destination pattern entry in the Outbound Phonebook Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Phone Number Details Destination Pattern Total Digits jo Remove Prefix Add Prefix IP Address Description Alternate Routing Alternate IP Address Round Trip Delay 190 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Alternate Routing Field Definitions Field Values De
224. meter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Ethernet Parameters 802 1p continued 4 Controlled Load Important business applications subject to some form of Admission Control such as preplanning of Network requirement characterized by bandwidth reservation per flow 5 Video Traffic characterized by delay lt 100 ms 6 Voice Traffic characterized by delay lt 10 ms 7 Network Control Traffic urgently needed to maintain and support network infrastructure HIGHEST PRIORITY Call Control Priority VoIP Media Priority 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority Sets the priority for signaling packets Sets the priority for media packets Others Priorities VLAN ID 0 7 where 0 is lowest priority 1 4094 Sets the priority for SMTP DNS DHCP and other packet types The 802 1Q IEEE standard allows virtual LANs to be defined within a network This field identifies each virtual LAN by number 90 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description IP Parameter fields Gateway alphanumeric Descriptor of current voip Name unit to distinguish it from other units in system Enable DHCP Y N Dynamic Host disabled by Configuration Protocol is a default method for assigning IP address and other IP paramete
225. minal is selected it indicates that the MultiVOIP should emulate the subscriber terminal side of the digital connection When Network is selected it indicates that the MultiVOIP should emulate the central office network side of the digital connection If connecting to a telco or PBX then choose Terminal If connecting to an ISDN phone or terminal adapter then choose Network Default Terminal ISDN 1 Terminal Clock Master The BRI VOIP uses an internal crystal as the clock master when any one of the ports is set for Network mode If all ports are set for Terminal mode then the first port to be activated becomes the clock master and it gets its clock from the network The clock master can only be activated on ISDN1 interface in Terminal mode If ISDN1 is selected and any other interface is set to Network mode then clock master can be enabled If enabled ISDN1 is set as the clock master for all time whether or not it is activated This feature enables the BRI VOIP to have all of its interfaces synchronized to other network equipment and allows the terminal devices connected to the VOIP to be synchronized to the network equipment as well 127 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI Parameter Definitions continued Field Name Values Description Dialing Inter Digit Dialing options are relevant when the Options Timer MultiVOIP provides dial tone either during
226. mware Select this to download new versions of firmware as enhancements become available Download User Defaults To be used after a full set of parameter values values specified by the user have been saved using Save Setup This command loads the saved user defaults into the MultiVOIP Set Password Select this to create a password for access to the MultiVOIP software programs Program group commands Windows GUI web browser GUI amp FTP server Only the FTP Server function requires a password for access The FTP Server function also requires that a username be established along with the password Uninstall Select this to uninstall the MultiVOIP software most but not all components are removed from computer when this command is invoked Upgrade Software Loads firmware including H 323 stack and factory default settings from the controller PC to the MultiVOIP unit 299 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Downloading here refers to transferring program files from the PC to the nonvolatile flash memory of the MultiVOIP Such transfers are made via the PC s serial port This can be understood as a download from the perspective of the MultiVOIP unit When new versions of the MultiVoip software become available they will be posted on MultiTech s web or FTP sites Although transferring updated program files from the MultiTech web FTP site to the user s PC
227. n standard protocol developed by Multi Tech SPP is not compatible with the Proprietary protocol used in Multi Tech s earlier generation of voip gateways SPP offers advantages in certain situations especially when firewalls are used and when dynamic IP address assignment is needed However when SPP is used certain features of SIP and H 323 will not be available and SPP will not inter operate with voip systems using H 323 or SIP Data Compression amp Quality of Service The BRI MultiVOIP unit comes equipped with a variety of data compression capabilities including G 723 G 729 and G 711 and features DiffServ quality of service QoS capabilities Gatekeepers For voip systems built with MultiTech s analog gateway units users can have a stand alone gatekeeper gatekeeper software residing in separate hardware Gatekeepers are optional but useful within voip systems The gatekeeper acts as the clearinghouse for all calls within its zone MultiTech s stand alone gatekeeper software performs all of the standard gatekeepers functions address translation admission control and bandwidth control and also supports many valuable optional functions call control signaling call authorization bandwidth management and call management 11 Overview Management Configuration and system management can be done locally with the MultiVOIP configuration software After an IP address has been assigned locally other configuration
228. nalog MultiVOIPs are fully applicable to ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs except where the telephony interface is concerned E1 Standard Inbound and Outbound MultiVOIP Phonebooks Important The MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook Definition lists the phone stations it can call its Inbound phonebook describes the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP and how those calls will be directed When a VOIP serves a PBX system the operation of the VOIP should be transparent to the telephone end user and savings in long distance calling charges should be enjoyed Use of the VOIP should not require the dialing of extra digits to reach users elsewhere on the VOIP network On the contrary VOIP service more commonly reduces dialed digits by allowing users served by PBXs in facilities in distant cities to dial their co workers with 3 4 or 5 digit extensions as if they were in the same facility More importantly the VOIP system should be configured to maximize savings in long distance calling charges To achieve both of these objectives ease of use and maximized savings the VOIP phonebooks must be set correctly NOTE VOIPs are commonly used for another reason as well VOIPs 217 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide allow an organization to integrate phone and data traffic onto a single network Typically these are private networks Free Calls One VOIP Site to Another The most direct use of the VO
229. nated Call Forward Parameters Enable Y N Click the check box to enable the call forwarding feature 194 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Forward Parameters Forward Condition Unconditional When selected all calls received will be forwarded Busy When selected calls will be forwarded when station is busy No Response When selected calls will be forwarded if called party does not answer after a specified number of rings as specified in Ring Count field Uncondit Busy No Resp Forwarding can be conditioned on both Busy and No Response Forward Destination IP address phone number port number etc Phone number or IP address to which calls will be directed For H 323 calls the Forward Destination can be either a Phone Number or an IP Address For SIP calls the Forward Destination can be one of the following a phone number b IP address c IP address port number d phone number IP addr port number e SIP URL or f phone IP address For SPP calls the Forward Destination can be one of the following a phone number b IP address port or c phone number IP address port 195 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont
230. nd PhoneBook match the Outbound PhoneBook entries of the Baltimore VOIP as shown below 199 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide To call the Minneapolis St Paul area a Baltimore employee must dial eleven digits In this case we are assuming that the Baltimore PBX does not require an 8 or 9 to seize an outside phone line If a Baltimore employee dials any phone number in the 612 area code the call will automatically be handled by the company s voip system Upon receiving such a call the Minneapolis voip will remove the digits 1612 But before the suburban Minneapolis voip can complete the call to the PSTN of the Minneapolis local calling area it must dial 9 to get an outside line from the PBX and then a comma which denotes a pause to get a PSTN dial tone and then the 10 digit phone number which includes the area code 612 for the city of Minneapolis which is different than the area code of the suburb where the PBX is actually located 763 A similar sequence of events occurs when the Baltimore employee calls number in the 651 and 952 area codes because number in both of these area codes are local calls in the Minneapolis St Paul area The simplest case is a cal from Baltimore to a phone within the Minneapolis St Paul area code where the company s voip and PBX are located namely 763 In that case that local voip removes 1763 and dials 9 to direct the call to its local 7 digit PSTN
231. nebook configuration 75 phonebook configuration remote 326 Phonebook Configuration icon j A Ea Sashes i avers 224 A i KEE E Ssh hd E 181 Phonebook Configuration Procedure j A E AE ESS 223 Ti RE E ERAS 180 Phonebook Configuration screen Ti E EA EREA 180 phonebook entries coordinating E ae atna teaei eeuk 223 Ted EE E ETT 180 phonebook icons Bd R A EES 224 TAL EE E ARSS 181 phonebook keyboard shortcuts Bd ERR E ETES 225 TAD E TAS 182 phonebook pulldown menu Bl PE ania oie ak 225 T ie ot ani nai ee 182 phonebook sidebar menu Bl E E E niin EE 225 T ae a R 182 phonebooks inbound vs outbound Elpa pie a nh 222 T ernn nian sine 180 phonebooks objectives amp considerations E ratsian evi arte 222 Cd eee EE ener rete Perr rer 179 Phonebooks objectives amp considerations Bl E E EE 217 Ping Size in Bytes Link Management field 283 Pings per Test Link Management field roe neues ik 283 pinout BRI connector eee 356 command cable eee 354 376 MultiVOIP User Guide ethernet cable ceeeeeeeee 354 Polling Interval SPP Call Signaling PION oases SEE EOE 122 Port H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field cccccceeseereees 292 Port SIP Proxies Statistics Servers feld onire nii 293 Port SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ccccssceeseeseees 294 Port SPP General Options field 121 Port field Registered Gateway Details
232. ng Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system Possible Description Possible Description Free Seattle access all Local rate London access employees all empl Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system Possible Description Local rate Rotterdam access all empl 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each inbound phonebook entry When all entries are complete go to step 8 8 Click OK to exit the inbound phonebook screen 9 Click on Save Setup Highlight Save and Reboot Click OK Your starter inbound phonebook configuration is complete 40 Phonebook Tips MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Tips Preparing the phonebook for your voip system is a complex task that at first seems quite daunting These tips may make the task easier 1 Use Dialing Patterns Not Complete Phone Numbers You will not generally enter complete phone numbers in the voip phonebook Instead you ll enter destination patterns that involve area codes and other digits If the destination pattern is a whole area code you ll be assigning all calls to that area code to go to a particular voip which has a unique IP address If your destination pattern includes an area code plus a particular local phone exchange number then the scope of calls sent through your voip system will be narrowed only calls within that local exchange will be handled by the designated voip not all calls in that whole area
233. nit there must also be a matching phone number entry in the Outbound Phonebook One use of this feature would be for emergency use where a user goes off hook but does not dial possibly indicating a crisis situation The Offhook Alert feature uses the Intercept Tone as listed in the Regional Parameters screen This tone will be outputted on the phone that was taken off hook but that did not dial The other end of the connection will hear audio from the crisis end as is it would during a normal phone call 105 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Voice Fax Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description AutoCall Offhook Alert Parameters Auto Call AutoCall Offhook Offhook Alert Alert continued from previous page Both functions apply on a channel by channel basis It would not be appropriate for either of these functions to be applied to a channel that serves in a pool of available channels for general phone traffic Either function requires an entry in the Outgoing phonebook of the local MultiVOIP and a matched setting in the Inbound Phonebook of the remote voip Generate Local Dial Tone Y N Used for AutoCall only If selected dial tone will be generated locally while the call is being established between gateways The capability to generate dial tone locally would be particularly useful when there is a lengthy network delay Offhook
234. nnection to Command PC 21 Save the MultiVOIP configuration 22 Create a User Default Configuration optional When technical configuration is complete you will need to configure the MultiVOIP s inbound and outbound phonebooks This manual has separate chapters describing T1 Phonebook Configuration for North American influenced telephony settings and E1 Phonebook Configuration for Euro influenced telephony settings Local Configuration Procedure Detailed You can begin the configuration process as a continuation of the MultiVOIP software installation You can establish your configuration or modify it at any time by launching the MultiVOIP program from the Windows Start menu 1 Check Power and Cabling Be sure the MultiVOIP is turned on and connected to the computer via the MultiVOIP s Command Port DB9 connector at computer s COM port or at USB2 0 port using serial to USB2 0 adaptor if no serial port is available and RJ45 connector at MultiVOIP 2 Start MultiVOIP Configuration Program Launch the MultiVOIP program from the Windows Start menu from the folder location determined during installation fH MultivorP 5 09 B Configuration Port Setup Programs B Date and Time Setup Download Factory Defaults 5 Download Firmware Settings 2 Download User Defaults B set Password 5 Uninstall Help and Support 2 Upgrade Software Documents Search 83 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP
235. ns Field Name Values Description Country USA Japan UK Name of a country or region that Region Custom uses a certain set of tone pairs for dial tone ring tone busy tone unobtainable tone fast busy tone survivability tone tone heard briefly 2 seconds after going offhook denoting survivable mode of VOIP unit and re order tone a tone pattern indicating the need for the user to hang up the phone In some cases the tone pair scheme denoted by a country name may also be used outside of that country The Custom option button assures that any tone pairing scheme worldwide can be accommodated 137 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Regional Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Country USA Japan UK Name of a country or region that Region Custom uses a certain set of tone pairs for Note dial tone ring tone busy tone and Survivability unobtainable tone fast busy tone indicates a tone survivability tone tone special type of heard briefly 2 seconds after going call routing offhook denoting survivable mode redundancy of voip unit and re order tone a tone pattern indicating the need for the user to hang up the phone In some cases the tone pair scheme denoted by a country name may also be used outside of that country The Custom option button assures that any tone pairing scheme worldwide can be accommo
236. ntenance MultiVOIP User Guide 4 The MultiVOIP ___ Firmware screen appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Multi OIP Firmware x Multi VOIP is Up Reboot to Download Firmware Click OK to download the firmware The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 5 The program will locate the firmware bin file in the MultiVOIP directory Highlight the correct newest bin file and click Open Look in mutvoep x c File name mvp Files of type Code Files bin x Cancel Z 6 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the file transfer aooo m 0000000 Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 The MultiVOIP s Boot LED will turn off at the end of the transfer 7 The Download Firmware procedure is complete 314 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Setting and Downloading User Defaults The Download User Defaults command allows you to maintain a known working configuration that is specific to your VOIP system You can then experiment with alterations or improvements to the configurations confident that a working configuration can be restored if necessary 1 Before you can invoke the Download User Defaults command you must first save a set of configuration parameters by using the Save Setup command in the sidebar me
237. nterface 0 285 Status field ISDN BRI Statistics SPIDO cen aise a SEA 286 Status field ISDN BRI Statistics SPIDI innan aves 287 Status field Registered Gateway Det ils jeere iiare 290 STUN clients and servers 160 Subject email logs field 146 Suffix Voice Fax Params field 109 Supplementary Telephony Services eRe eae Se ae a ene AST A T 14 Supplementary Services Alerting Party 169 170 171 Call Hold ereen ea 163 Call Hold Enable 166 Call Name Identification 163 Call Transfer 00 ccccceeeee cece 163 Call Transfer Enable 165 Call Waiting 163 Call Waiting Enable 166 Caller Name Identification Enable RE dite os NEE AELA Reise Boke 167 Calling Party o oo 168 Enable Call Hold 00 00 166 Enable Call Transfer 165 Enable Call Waiting 166 381 Index Enable Caller Name Identification pra tnesMeliinn GS ech ee ee 167 Hold Sequence ou eee 166 Retrieve Sequence 166 Select Channel ee 165 Transfer Sequence 165 Supplementary Services Info LOSS LOL sores tees eet sints cseeseenetss 276 Supplementary Services Parameter buttons Copy Channel eee 172 Default css scetscuset continents 172 Supplementary Services Parameter Definitions 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Supplementary Services Parameter fields Call Waiting Enable
238. nu of the MultiVOIP software 2 Before the setup configuration is saved you will be prompted to save the setup as the User Default Configuration Select the checkbox and click OK PNE E EE ENEN EE E SesuseSeseosereseeussesuq MultiVOIP will be brought down OK Cancel Help A user default file will be created 3 The MVP____ Firmware screen appears saying MultiVOIP model number is up Reboot to Download Firmware Multi OIP Firmware Fa Multi OIP is Up Reboot to Download Firmware Click OK to download the factory defaults The Boot LED on the MultiVOIP will light up and remain lit during the file transfer process 315 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 4 Progress bars will appear at the bottom of the screen during the file transfer bg SSS 9 9000000 Downloading Configuration Packets Sent 2 Acks received 2 Errors 0 Hall 5 When the file transfer process is complete the Dialog IP Parameters screen will appear Dialog m IP Parameters m Diff Serv Parameters Call Control PHB Frame Type T YPE I VolP Media PHB m IP Parameters I Enable DHCP IP Address 192 168 3 143 IP Mask Zoe codon coon a0 Gateway 6 Set the IP values per your particular VOIP system Click OK Progress bars will appear as the MultiVOIP reboots itself 316 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Set
239. ny PSTN phone in Reading area using the FXO channel channel 1 of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading 01822 01822 200 2 9 5 Calls to Tavistock area PSTN via FXO channel of the Site F VOIP 0182 200 2 9 5 Calls to Tavistock 26374 key system operator or auto attendant 0207 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to London area PSTN via Site D PBX 8 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to London 398 PBX extensions with four digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 253 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 421 1 Call Completion Summaries Site A calling Site C Method 1 1 Dial 101 2 Hear dial tone from Site B 3 Dial 9435632 4 Await completion Talk Site A calling Site C Method 2 5 Dial 101 9435632 6 Await completion Talk Note Some analog VOIP gateways will allow completion by Method 2 Others will not Site C calling Site A 1 Dial 9436161 2 Hear dial tone from Site B VOIP 3 Dial 201 4 Await completion Talk 254 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Site D calling Site C 1 Dial 901189435632 2 9 gets outside line On some
240. o which Number Hunting the call will be assigned as it enters the local telephony equipment often a local PBX Hunting directs the call to any available channel Description Describes the facility or geographical location at which the call originated Call Forward Parameters Enable Y N Click the check box to enable the call forwarding feature Forward Uncondit Unconditional When selected Condition Busy all calls received will be No Resp forwarded Busy When selected calls will be forwarded when station is busy No Response When selected calls will be forwarded if called party does not answer after a specified number of rings as specified in Ring Count field Forwarding can be conditioned on both Busy and No Response 237 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Forward Phone number or IP address to which calls Destination will be directed IP address For H 323 calls the Forward Destination can phone number be either a Phone Number of an IP Address port number For SIP calls the Forward Destination can be etc one of the following a phone number b IP address c IP address port number d phone number IP addr port number e SIP URL or f phone IP address For SPP calls the Forward Destination can be one
241. ocally at first to establish an IP address for the MultiVOIP unit However you can configure the MultiVOIP remotely from the start by using the web browser GUI and accessing the MultiVOIP unit at its default IP address which is 192 168 3 143 Remember however that 75 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 192 168 3 143 is the default IP address set at the factory for all MultiVOIP units Once you have established contact you will need to set up a different IP address that better fits your system Changes to this initial configuration can be done either locally or remotely Local configuration is done through a connection between the Command port of the MultiVOIP and the COM port of the computer the MultiVOIP configuration program is used Remote configuration is done through a connection between the MultiVOIP s Ethernet network port and a computer connected to the same network The computer could be miles or continents away from the MultiVOIP itself The MultiVOIP web browser interface program is the only remote configuration program that is supported for the BRI MultiVOIP units There is a GUI screen for SNMP which relates to the MultiVoipManager program However neither SNMP nor MultiVoipManager are supported for the BRI MultiVOIP units Web Browser Interface The MultiVOIP web browser GUI gives access to the same commands and configuration parameters as are available in the MultiVOIP Windows GUI except for logg
242. of packets into their correct order if they arrive out of order UDP does not provide this Lost UDP packets are unretrievable that is out of order UDP packets cannot be reconstituted in their proper order Despite these obvious disadvantages UDP packets can be transmitted much faster than TCP packets as much as three times faster In certain applications like audio and video data transmission the need for high speed outweighs the need for verified data integrity Sound or pictures often remain intelligible despite a certain amount of lost or disordered data packets which appear as static 277 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide IP Statistics Field Definitions Field Values Description Name IP n n n n IP address of the MultiVOIP For an IP Address 0 255 address to be displayed here the Multi VOIP must have DHCP enabled Its IP address in such a case is assigned by the DHCP server Clear Clears packet tallies from memory button Total Packets Sum of data packets of all types Transmit integer Total number of packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the Multi VOIP software Received integer Total number of packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the Multi VOIP software Received integer Total number of error laden packets
243. of the Site B VOIP 102 200 2 9 8 To originate calls to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP Reading 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Carlisle 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner London area PSTN via Site D PBX 0208 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner London area PSTN via Site D PBX 3 0207 200 2 9 9 Calls to Inner 398 London PBX 8 extensions with three digits Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 251 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 01822 2 4 Calls to Tavistock local PSTN through FXO port Port 4 at Site F 0182 740 0 Gives remote voip users access 263 to extensions of key phone 740 system atTavistock office 0182 741 0 Because call is completed at key 263 system abbreviated dialing 3 741 digits is not workable 0182 742 0 Human operator or auto 263 attendant is needed to 742 complete these calls 252 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP210 Analog VOIP Site E Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Prefix Prefix Address 201 200 2 9 7 To originate calls to Site A Birmingham 01189 0118 101 200 2 9 8 To originate calls Note 3 to a
244. of the following a phone number b IP address port or c phone number IP address port Ring Count integer When No Response is condition for forwarding calls this determines how many unanswered rings are needed to trigger the forwarding Registration In an H 323 voip system gateways can Option register with the system using one of these Parameters identifiers a an E 164 identifier b a Tech Prefix identifier or c an H 323 ID identifier In a SIP voip system gateways can register with the SIP Proxy In an SPP voip system gateways can register with the SPP Registrar voip unit 5 When your Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries are completed click on Save Setup in the sidebar menu to save your configuration You can change your configuration at any time as needed for your system 238 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Remember that the initial MultiVOIP setup must be done locally or via the built in Remote Configuration Command Modem using the MultiVOIP program However after the initial configuration is complete all of the MultiVOIP units in the VOIP system can be configured re configured and updated from one location using the MultiVOIP web GUI software program or the MultiVOIP program in conjunction with the built in modem E1 Phonebook Examples To demonstrate how Outbound and Inbound PhoneBook entries work in an international VOIP system we will re vi
245. ogram menu 298 Configuration Parameter Groups ACCESSING E EOE ETE 86 Configuration Port Setup option description Multi VOIP program configuration procedure local 365 Index detailed aiieieo ouies 83 SUIMIMALY ione ia 82 Configuration Version System Info oseese 175 Configur ation Version System Info sses 262 configuration local eeeeee 78 configuration phonebook Elias E 223 Tah ieacia aed E antes 180 configuration SAVING 177 USED E covstexy eesetsvecssseescntsesvesssetes 315 configuration user default 177 Configuring MultiVOIP phonebooks general A EEE EEAS 217 A A ERETT 179 Connection Problems Solving 85 Consecutive Packets Lost field 110 Console Message Settings Filters for a aa raaa a raie eais 159 console messages enabling 157 console parameters tracked 159 contacting technical suppott 347 coordinated phonebook entries Bl isha dveisg dig inion ated 223 PA cid E ET 180 Copy Channel command Voice Fax Parameters cccsscceessseeeesees 99 Copy Channel field 0 0 eee 100 Copy Channel Supplementary Services command eee 164 Copy Channel Supplementary Services field eee eeeeeeeeees 172 Copy Interface command 126 Count of Registered Numbers field Registered Gateway Details 290 Country definitions 10 0 0 eee 131 Country field oe eeeeeeeeeeee 128 Country Region t
246. ok Each Inbound Phonebook contains Santa Fe Office two entries The first entry 4 digits Area 505 specifies how incoming calls from the n other voip sites will be handled if 204 16 49 74 they go out onto the local PSTN Essentially all those calls come to the receiving voip with a pattern beginning with 1 area code The local voip removes those four digits because they aren t needed when dialing locally The local voip attaches a 9 at the beginning of the number to get an outsideline The PBX then completes the call to the PSTN 8 Channel Analog VoIP MVP810 PBX System Main Number 444 3200 The second Inbound Phonebook entry 1 digit is for receiving calls from company employees in the other two cities The out of town employee simply dials 3 digits The first of the three digits is uniquely used at each site and so acts as a destination pattern Boise extensions are 7xx Santa Fe extensions 2xx Flagstaff extensions 6xx The local voip sees the pattern in its inbound phone book and notes the first digit here either 2 5 or 6 Each Outbound Phonebook contains two pairs of entries two entries for each To make the match this first digit 2 5 or 6is put in the Remove Prefix field This first digit must then be added back once again so that the voip will send all three digits to the PBX The PBX can then dial the specific extension identified by the three digit number i Flagstaff O
247. ok Outbound Phonebook Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefix to Prefix IP Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls J Pattern Digits Remove to Add Addr Outgoing Calls Other Details Voip Location ID Inbound Phonebook Outbound Phonebook Prefix to Prefix Description Destin Total Prefix to Prefix IP Description Remove to Add Incoming Calls Pattern Digits Remove to Add Addr Outgoing Calls Other Details 48 Phonebook Example MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Enlarged Phonebook Worksheet syed 3uro3mo uondiiosoq Ippy PPY MWy SBIA ured dl Xo g 0 XIJOIg OL uysoq s e 3uruoou uondiosoq d1 U0ne907 dio s 12 9q 19470 AOUN 0 XIJ Id 49 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Connectivity Test Connectivity Test The procedures Phone IP Starter Configuration and Phonebook Starter Configuration must be completed before you can do this procedure 1 These connections must be made MultiVOIP to local PBX or telco MultiVOIP to command PC MultiVOIP to Internet 2 Inbound Phonebook and Outbound Phonebook must both be set up with at least one entry in each These entries must allow for connection between two voip units 3 Console messages must be enabled If this has not been done already go in the MultiVOIP GUI to Configuration Logs and select the Console Messages checkb
248. ol When no external routing device is used If Accept Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the IP Address in the Add Edit Outbound Phone Book screen Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Destination Patterns When external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls to phone numbers not matching a listed Destination Pattern will be directed to the external routing device used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol The IP Address of the external routing device must be set in the Phone Book Configuration screen 185 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Destination prefixes Defines the beginning of Pattern area codes dialing sequences for calls exchanges that will be connected to line another VOIP in the system numbers Numbers beginning with extensions these sequences are diverted from the PTSN and carried on Internet or other IP network Total Digits as needed This field currently disabled number of digits the phone user must dial to reach specified destination Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination Add Prefix dialed digits digits to
249. on H 323 fields Use Gatekeepr Y N Indicates whether or not gatekeeper is used Gateway H 323 alpha The H 323 ID assigned to the ID hum e destination MultiVOIP Only valid if Use Gatekeeper is enabled for this entry Gateway numeric This number becomes Prefix registered with the GateKeeper Call requests sent to the gatekeeper and preceded by this prefix will be routed to the VOIP gateway H 323 Port 1720 This parameter pertains to Number Q 931 which is the H 323 call signaling protocol for setup and termination of calls aka ITU T Recommendation 1 451 H 323 employs only one well known port 1720 for Q 931 signaling If Q 931 message oriented signaling protocol is used the port number 1720 must be chosen 230 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description SIP Fields Use Proxy Y N Select if proxy server is used Transport TCP or Voip administrator must choose Protocol UDP between UDP and TCP transmission protocols UDP is a high speed low overhead connectionless protocol where data is transmitted without acknowledgment guaranteed delivery or guaranteed packet sequence integrity TCP is slower connection oriented protocol with greater overhead but having acknowledgment and guarantees delivery and packet sequence integrity SIP Port 5060 or other The SIP Port N
250. on Ratio 139 Index type Of tone 138 Regional Parameters fields Country Selection for Built In Modem ised rinn 139 regional parameters setting 135 Register Duration field Registered Gateway Details 0 0 eee 290 Register with Gatekeeper H 323 Call Signaling field ot eee eee 112 Registered Gateway Details Statistics screen accessing 290 Registered Gateway Details Statistics function 288 290 Registered Gateway Details screen290 Registered Gateway Details screen fields Description 290 IP Address siisii seitec 290 No of E trieS isisieisniicissiisesa 290 POTK SA E ES 290 Register Duration s eee eseeeee 290 STATUS isibe aiast s 290 Registered Gateway Details screen fields insana 290 Registrar IP Address field 122 Registrar Options SPP Call Signaling fields 122 Registrar Port field 122 Registration Option Parameters Inbound Phone Book Bl E 238 Tlia havi AEREE sai 196 remote control configuration web GUI and eee 338 Remote Device is legacy voip Outbound Phonebook Tle ssads saia E ie 189 Remote Device is legacy Multi VOIP ChecKDOX sssi ieee 232 remote phonebook configuration 326 remote voip configuration 76 Remote Voip Management 132 Remove Prefix inbound field Bl E EE E 236 A A E AE E E EE EEE 194 Remove Prefix outbound field EDren ana manar Six 229 A a DE E E
251. onal X IA s spina Called Party Number Type National r Number Plan SDN Telephony TEI Assignment C Automatic Point to Multipoint C Automatic Point to Point C Fixed Point to Point 0 63 mo p m poo S Cancel MSN Details Copy Interface MSN1 Dial Number 1 Hel Help MSN 2 Dial Number 2 MSN 3 Dial Number 3 Dial Number 4 Dial Number 5 Dial Number 6 Dial Number 7 Dial Number 8 Network Mode When a voip ISDN connector is to be connected to an ISDN phone station or to an ISDN terminal adapter TA select Network as the Layer 1 Interface in the ISDN Parameters screen of the MultiVOIP software Connect cables between voip ISDN connectors and phone or TA NOTE Any ISDN phone stations connected to the MVP 410ST 810ST must provide their own operating power That is the MVP 410ST 810ST does not supply power for ISDN phone stations 63 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide 5 Repeat the above step to connect the remaining ISDN telephone equipment to each ISDN connector on your MultiVOIP Be aware that you can assign each ISDN line separately and independently to either Network mode or Terminal mode That is all ISDN lines do not have to be assigned in to the same operating mode Command Port Connection aa 4 v ISDN BRI Connections ISDN1 amp ISDN2 MVP410ST 10ST ISDN3 amp ISDN 4 _MVP81 0ST only
252. one schemes field REEE EEA 137 138 Creating a User Default Configuration EE E E EE 177 Custom tones Regional field 139 CUSTOM CACENCES ceceeeeeeteeeeeee 143 custom DTMF 142 Custom Fields SMTP definitions Mise iat cate aee e 147 148 Index Custom Fields SMTP log email Bytes Received s s s 148 Bytes Sentu sorer 148 Call Direction cceeeeeeeeee 148 Call Mode oe ceeecccsseceeseeeseeeee 147 Call Status ccceeeeeereeees 148 Call Py PG ise daca de ge tesso 148 Channel Numbet 08 147 COED ar n e eni 148 OPHONS eenei 149 OPHODS s en eei ee 149 Description callee 5 149 Description caller 0 149 Disconnect Reason 000 149 DTMF Capability 148 Duration ccceecceesseceeseeeseeeeee 147 From Gateway Number 149 From IP Address 008 149 Outbound Digits Received 148 Outbound digits sent 149 Packets LoSt c ccccseeceeesreeeees 148 Packets Received c cccee 147 Packets Sentiers 147 Prefix Matched cc ccsccee 148 Select All vo cceccecceseesteeeeees 147 Server Details cccccccesseeerees See Start Date Time 147 To Gateway Numbet 149 To IP Address cceceeeseeees 149 Custom Tone Pair Settings definitions Ahaha ele T 142 143 Custom Tone Pair Settings fields Cadence Linike arene 143 Cadence 2 eeececcecesssec
253. onnect to the PSTN Generally 1 or 11 or 0 must be dialed as a prefix for calls outside of the calling code area long distance calls national calls or international calls On a sheet of paper write down the digits you must dial before you can dial a remote area code North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system Seattle voip works with London voip works with PBX that uses 8 for all PBX that uses 9 for all voip calls 1 must out of building calls immediately precede area whether by voip or by code of dialed number PSTN 0 must immediately precede area anwar e ag code of dialed number Answer write down 90 Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system Rotterdam voip works with PBX where 9 is used for all out of building calls 0 must precede all international calls Answer write down 90 35 Phonebook Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions 5 In the Destination Pattern field of the Add Edit Outbound Phonebook screen enter the digits from step 4 followed by the digits from step 3 North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system Answer enter 81312 as Leading zero of Destination Pat Birmingham area code is tern in Outbound dropped when combined Phone book of with national dialing Seattle
254. onnect to the earth ground of the building s electrical wiring system and the ground connection must use a screw terminal or other reliable means of fastening The ground connection must not be as easily disconnected as for example a power cord Product Ground Screw MultiVOIP Ground Unit lee a Size 18AWG k or thicker Earth Ground Screw Pan Connected to Permanent Earth Ground of Building s Grounding connectors Electrical System must be secured permanently to product ground screw and earth ground screw Figure 3 7 Earth Ground Details 8 Turn on power to the Multi VOIP by placing the ON OFF switch on the back panel to the ON position Wait for the Boot LED on the Multi VOIP to go off before proceeding This may take a few minutes Proceed to Chapter 4 to load the Multi VOIP software Proceed to Chapter 4 to load the MultiVOIP software 65 Chapter 4 Software Installation MultiVOIP User Guide Software Installation Introduction Configuring software for your MultiVOIP entails three tasks 1 loading the software onto the PC this is Software Installation and is discussed in this chapter 2 setting values for telephony and IP parameters that will fit your system this is Technical Configuration and it is discussed in Chapter 5 and 3 establishing phonebooks that contain the various dialing patterns for VOIP calls made to different locations t
255. oo eee 117 User Name proxy server 118 SIP Fields Outbound Phonebook B s E ERE 231 Pil E E EE ET 188 SIP incompatibility with H 450 Supplementary Services 11 162 DONC AL sues eoten e reei Ni 11 SIP Port Number field Bl Svcd stiles cities simi as 231 Pil E E ET 188 SIP port number standard A E E EE 231 Pla esantiiiieiaiinkenietitess 188 SIP Proxies Statistics Servers Index IP Addis Siinses cenre 293 Porterio tennie 293 SLALUS eieiei 293 TY PC E E ER 293 SIP Proxy Parameters 0 00 117 SIP URL field Eberron epedats eyes 231 TLD E E EER 188 SMTP log reporting type button 158 SMTP logs by email illustration 150 SMTP Parameters definitions 146 SMTP Parameters fields Enable SMTP 145 Login Name sses 145 Mail Server IP Address 146 Maal Type ciretta 146 Number of Days 146 Number of Records 0 146 Password enoia 146 Port Number eeceeeeeeseeeeee 146 Recipient Address eee 146 Reply To Address 0 146 Requires Authentication 145 SUBJECT se sisssssesstvsstecseveoessseessees 146 SMTP parameters accessing 144 SMTP parameters setting 144 SMTP port standard 146 SMTP prerequisites 00 0 0 eee 80 SMTP enabling 0 0 eee 144 SNMP log reporting type button 158 SNMP agent enabling 132 SNMP not supported for 5 08 BRI VOIDS eire ee r EEE KEENE eeek
256. or H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol The IP Address of the external routing device must be set in the Phone Book Configuration screen 228 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Destination prefixes Defines the beginning of Pattern area codes dialing sequences for calls exchanges that will be connected to line another VOIP in the system numbers Numbers beginning with extensions these sequences are diverted from the PTSN and carried on Internet or other IP network Total Digits as needed number of digits the phone user must dial to reach specified destination Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination IP Address nn n n the IP address to which the for 0 255 call will be directed if it begins with the destination pattern given Description alpha Describes the facility or numeric geographical location at which the call will be completed Protocol Type SIP H 323 Indicates protocol to be used in or SPP outbound transmission 229 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Descripti
257. or different physical equipment e g modem phone instrument fax machine etc When specifying MSN Numbers don t enter the whole number but only enough of the right most digits so that the numbers allocated to the line can be distinguished Right now a maximum of eight MSN Numbers is supported For all ISDN incoming calls when the dialed digits are matching with the configured MSN number then if the Dial Number corresponding to the matched MSN number is present then using that Dial Number an IP outgoing call is made Otherwise for the matched MSN number if no Dial Number is present dial tone is provided to the user to dial the actual digits with which to make the IP outgoing call Copy Interface button Copies the ISDN BRI attributes of one interface to another interface Attributes can be copied to multiple interfaces or to all interfaces at once MSN details are not copied due to the nature of MSN assignment 130 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration Country and Operator options for the MVP 410ST 810ST voip units are listed below Australia Europe France Hong Kong ETS A law AUSTEL_1 A law ETSI A law FT_VNG A law FT_VNG A law default mu law ETSI A law NTT mu law KDD mu law default mu law N_ISDN 1 mu law N_ISDN2 mu law ATT_5E10 mu law NT_DMS100 mu la Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 11 Set SN
258. out Log Seip eie or eaaa ae E a E ENESE EE EE oA DRR aa 272 ADOUE IP Statisties aeeie rierren aaae suite jos nE ae iaae rE cdejethaatbeses Bosee 276 MultiVOIP User Guide Contents About Link Management ccsccceseceesseceseeeesseceseeesacecesceeeaceceaeeeeacecuseeeeaeecnaeensaes 281 About ISDN BRI Statistics ccccccccccsccesesccecesesececuesceeesssececessaececuaaaesessueaeensaees 284 About Registered Gateway Details ccccesccscssscsseescsseeeceseeeeeeceseeseesecaeeseeeeeees 288 About Alternate Server Statistics cccccccccccccessscececsecesssseecsessececusaeeeesseseenssseees 291 About Packe tization Time cccccccccccccecsseceesscceceessececusscecesssseecsesaececseaseseessaeenssaeees 295 MULTIVOIP PROGRAM MENU ITEMS 1 0 0 sceeceecseeceeseeseceeceseceseceaecsaecaeesaeeeaeeeeeens 298 Configuration OPTION csc ceacicet capes orea ee hts Mie eeds 4G tied a hss a ae 300 Configuration Port SCtup scccsccescssecssecreesseescesscesccesecesecesecsecsaecnaecnecaesnaeens 300 Dat and Time Setups r sa casins fe ssease A uae Regees kya cous pas cong ate epee ees 301 Obtaining Updated Firmware csccesccscssscssesecesessceseeseesecaseseesecasesecueeeeenaseeeeases 302 Implementing a Software Upgrade ccccccsccscesccsseecesesscesecneeseesecnseeecneeeeensseeeens 306 Identifying Current Firmware Version ccccccesesesessseseeseesceseeeeeseeseesseeseeeeeaeeaes 306 Downloading Firmware csceeeseeeereeee Downlo
259. oward Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites Histoy Mail Print Edit Address http 204 26 122 105 Links Best ofthe Web Channel Guide Customize Links Free HotMail 4 Intemet Stat 4 Microsoft 4 Windows Update MultiVOIP_ 4108T Configuration Advanced Phone Book Statistics Change Password Save amp Reboot Logout MultiVOIP 410ST Web Based Configuration Help a oe ae X Multi Voice Fax over IP Networks Multi eal Mukti Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View MN 55112 USA TEL 763 785 3500 FAX 763 785 3702 Applet dirstrut started You can control the MultiVOIP unit with a graphic user interface GUI based on the common web browser platform Qualifying browsers are InternetExplorer6 and Netscape6 MultiVOIP Web Browser GUI Overview Function Remote configuration and control of MultiVOIP units Configuration Local Windows GUI must be used Prerequisite to assign IP address to MultiVOIP Browser Version Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher or Requirement Netscape 6 0 or higher Java Requirement Java Runtime Environment version 1 4 0_01 or higher this application program is included with MultiVOIP Video Usability large video monitor recommended 336 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The initial configuration step of assigning the voip unit an IP address must still be done locally using the Windows G
260. ox 50 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Connectivity Test 4 You now need to free up the COM port connection currently being used by the MultiVOIP program so that the HyperTerminal program can use it To do this you can either a click on Connection in the sidebar and select Disconnect from the drop down box or b close down the MultiVOIP program altogether 5 Open the HyperTerminal program asdf HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dis 513 26 2l Print echo Auto detect 1152008 N1 SCROLL CAPS NUM_ Capture Disconnected 6 Use HyperTerminal to receive and record console messages from the MultiVOIP unit To do so set up HyperTerminal as follows setup shown is for Windows NT4 details will differ slightly in other MS operating systems In the upper toolbar of the HyperTerminal screen click on the Properties button In the Connect To tab of the Connection Properties dialog box click on the Configure button In the next dialog box on the General tab set Maximum Speed to 115200 bps On the Connection tab set connection preferences to Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 Click OK twice to exit settings dialog boxes 51 Connectivity Test MultiVOIP Quick Start Guide 7 Make VOIP call for ISDN BRI MultiVOIPs MVP 410ST 810ST in terminal mode Make call from an extension of the local PBX
261. pects of configuration the Windows GUI and web browser GUI differ only graphically not functionally Pre Requisites To complete the configuration of the SS MultiVOIP unit you must know several things about the overall system Before configuring your MultiVOIP Gateway unit you must know the values for several IP and telephone parameters that describe the IP network system and telephony system PBX or telco central office equipment with which the digital MultiVOIP will interact If you plan to receive log reports on phone traffic by email SMTP you must arrange to have an email address assigned to the VOIP unit on the email server on your IP network A summary of this configuration information appears on page 46 Config Info CheckList 78 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration IP Parameters The following parameters must be known about the network LAN WAN Internet etc to which the MultiVOIP will connect Ask your computer network Info needed to operate administrator all MultiVOIP models IP Network Parameters 3 Record for each VOIP Site lt in System e IP Address e IP Mask e Gateway e Domain Name Server DNS Info e If SIP protocol is used determine whether or not 802 1p Packet Prioritization will be used Write down the values for these IP parameters You will need to enter these values in the IP Parameters screen in the Configuration section of the MultiVOIP so
262. phic layout of the web GUI is also somewhat larger scale than that of the Windows GUI For that reason it s helpful to use as large of a video monitor as possible The primary advantage of the web GUI is remote access for control and configuration The controller PC and the MultiVOIP unit itself must both be connected to the same IP network and their IP addresses must be known In order to use the web GUI you must also install a Java application program on the controller PC This Java program is included on the MultiVOIP product CD Java is needed to support drop down menus and multiple windows in the web GUI To install the Java program go to the Java directory on the MultiVOIP product CD Double click on the EXE file to begin the installation Follow the instructions on the Install Shield screens InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Java 2 Runtime Environment SE 1 4 0_01 The InstallShield Wizard will install Java 2 Runtime Environment SE 1 4 0_01 on your computer To continue click Next 338 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance During the installation you must specify which browser you ll use in the Select Browsers screen InstallShield Wizard Select Browsers istellStiela When installation is complete the Java program becomes accessible in your Start Programs menu Java resources are readily available via the web However the Java program runs
263. phone call log records to the Voip Administrator by email Select Enable SMTP You should have already obtained an email address for the MultiVOIP itself this serves as the origination email account for email logs that the MultiVOIP can email out automatically Enter this email address in the Login Name field Type the password for this email account Enter the IP address of the email server where the MultiVOIP s email account is located in the Mail Server IP Address field 31 Phone IP Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Typically the email log reports are sent to the Voip Administrator but they can be sent to any email address Decide where you want the email logs sent and enter that email address in the Recipient Address field Whenever email log messages are sent out they must have a standard Subject line Something like Phone Logs for Voip N is useful If you have more than one MultiVoip unit in the building you ll need a unique identifier for each one select a useful name or number for N In this Subject field enter a useful subject title for the log messages In the Reply To Address field enter the email address of your Voip Administrator 11 Go to Configuration Logs Select Enable Console Messages To allow log reports by email if desired click SMTP Click OK To do logging with a SysLog client program click on SysLog Server Enable in t
264. pplementary Services fields are described in the tables below Supplementary Services Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Select Channel 1 4 410ST IL 8 810ST The channel to be configured is selected here Call Transfer Enable Y N Select to enable the Call Transfer function in the voip unit This is a blind transfer and the sequence of events is as follows Callers A and B are having a conversation Caller A wants to put B into contact with C Caller A dials call transfer sequence Caller A hears dial tone and dials number for caller C Caller A gets disconnected while Caller B gets connected to caller C A brief musical jingle is played for the caller on hold Transfer Sequence any phone keypad character The numbers and or symbols that the caller must press on the phone keypad to initiate a call transfer The call transfer sequence can be 1 to 4 characters in length using any combination of digits or characters or The sequences for call transfer call hold and call waiting can be from 1 to 4 digits in length consisting of any combination of digits 1234567890 165 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Call Hold Y N Select to enable Call Hold function in Enable voip unit Call Hold allows one party to maintain an idle non
265. r string Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Predefined which the MultiVOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Priority Priority refers to Status registered not The current status of the gateway either registered registered or unregistered 292 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance SIP Proxies IP Address Pot Type 65 126 90 112 5060 Primary Registered 65 126 90 110 5060 Alternate 1 Not Registered SIP Proxies Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Address n n n n The IP address of the SIP proxy by which for n 0 255 the MultiVOIP is governed Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the SIP Proxy that governs it Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Alternate which the MultiVOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Status registered The current status of the MultiVOIP not registered gateway with respect to the SIP proxy either registered or unregistered 293 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide r SPP Registrars IP Address Pot Type 65 126 90 24 10000 Primary Registered 65 126 90 81 10000 Predef 1 Not Registered gt SPP Registrars Statistics Servers Field Definitions Field Values Description Name Column Headings IP Add
266. r command Link Management button snena eer eeren 283 Client Options fields 122 coder MultiVOIP User Guide bandwidth max cc ccceeees 103 GU Alcatel 103 GT D3 Mase ts cots es ended toate peeitees 103 GT 26 eesti E 103 GITDT EE E 103 C PE PA EE E E 103 Net Cod f sesse 103 Coder RADIUS Attributes field 154 Coder SMTP logs field 148 Coder field acetic cated es 103 coder options packetization rates and 295 Coder Parameters field group 103 coder types voice fax RTP packetization eee 296 COM port conflict resolving eeeee 85 ETOT MESSAGE 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeee 85 COM port allocation cee 176 COM port assignments 176 COM Port Setup screen 85 command cable pinout 354 Command PC COM port requirement 16 non dedicated use Of ee 16 Operating system n se 16 community voip defined 134 Community Name SNMP field 134 compatibility Fast Start 112 compatibility H 450 with H 323 not With SIP sinini aiie 11 162 BRI 3 2 40 nie bisapnieali wan 11 compression silence 104 Compression Silence RADIUS Attributes occ cececseceeeeereeeee 155 Compression Silence SMTP logs PMMA Ai ater ideas arte iies 149 computer requirements 64 16 configuration of voip local versus remote 00 0 0 cee 76 Configuration option description MultiVOIP pr
267. r of data packets received over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes Sent integer value The number of bytes of data sent over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes Revd integer value The number of bytes of data received over the IP network in the course of this call Packets Lost integer value The number of voice packets from this call that were lost after being received from the IP network 267 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call Progress Details Field Definitions cont d From To Details Description Gateway alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway Name from string that handled the origination of this call IP Address X X X X IP address from which the call from where xhasa was received range of 0 to 255 Options SC FEC Displays VOIP transmission options in use on the current call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression Gateway alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway Name to string that handled the completion of this call IP Address X X X X IP address to which the call was to where x has a sent range of 0 to 255 Options SC FEC Displays VOIP transmission 268 options in use on the current call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Call Progress Details Field Definition
268. r the User Name and Password to gain access to the web browser GUI and any part of the MultiVOIP software listed in the Program group menu User Name and Password are both needed for access to the FTP Server residing in the MultiVOIP Password Yerification Sai When MultiVOIP program asks for password at launch of program the program will simply shut down if CANCEL is selected The MultiVOIP program will produce an error message if an invalid password is entered Multi OIP PA 319 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Setting a Password Web Browser GUI Setting a password is optional when using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI Only one password can be assigned and it works for all MultiVOIP software functions Windows GUI web browser GUI FTP server and all Program menu commands e g Upgrade Software only the FTP Server function requires a User Name in addition to the password After a password has been set that password is required to access the MultiVOIP web browser GUI NOTE Record your user name and password in a safe place If the password is lost forgotten or unretrievable the user must contact MultiTech Tech Support in order to resume use of the MultiVOIP web browser GUI a Multi OIP 2410 v4 03 Firmware Sep 06 2002 Microsoft Internet Explorer e File Edit View Favorite aoe Address http 192 168 2 200 acl MultiVOIP 2410 Configuration P
269. ration with telephony equipment 3 its transmission of voice and fax messages 4 its interaction with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol network management software NOTE SNMP is not currently supported for BRI MultiVOIPs 5 certain telephony attributes that are common to particular nations or regions 6 its operation with a mail server on the same IP network per SMTP parameters such that log reports about VoIP telephone call traffic can be sent to the administrator by email 7 implementing some common premium telephony features Call Transfer Call Hold Call Waiting Call ID Supplementary Services and 8 selecting the method by which log reports will be made accessible The process of specifying values for the various parameters in these seven categories is what we call technical configuration and it is described in this chapter Phonebook Configuration The second type of configuration that is required for the MultiVOIP pertains to the phone number dialing sequences that it will receive and transmit when handling calls Dialing patterns will be affected by both the PBX telephony equipment and the other VOIP devices that the MultiVOIP unit interacts with We call this Phonebook Configuration and for analog MultiVOIP units it is described in Chapter 6 The Quick Start Guide presents additional information on phonebook setup Local Remote Configuration The MultiVOIP is typically configured l
270. re both local calls for users at other sites in the VOIP network 255 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Site D calling Site F A voip call from Inner London PBX to extension 7424 on the key telephone system in Tavistock UK A The required entry in the London Outbound Phonebook to facilitate origination of the call would be 90182263742 The call would be directed to the Tavistock voip s IP address 200 2 9 5 Generally on such a call the caller would have to dial an initial 9 But typically the PBX would not pass the initial 9 dialed to the voip If the PBX did pass along that 9 however its removal would have to be specified in the local Outbound Phonebook B The corresponding entry in the Tavistock Inbound Phonebook to facilitate completion of the call would be 0182263742 for calls within the office at Tavistock 01822 for calls to the Tavistock local calling area PSTN Call Event Sequence 1 Caller in Inner London dials 901822637424 2 Inner London voip removes 9 3 Inner London voip passes remaining string 018226374240n to the Tavistock voip at IP address 200 2 9 5 4 The dialed string matches an inbound phonebook entry at the Tavistock voip namely 0182263742 5 The Tavistock voip rings one of the three FXS ports connected to the Tavistock key phone system 6 The call will be routed to extension 7424 either by a human receptionist operator or to an auto attendant
271. registrar The registrar assigns IP addresses dynamically General Options Port The UDP port on which data transmission will occur Each client voip has its own port If two client voips are both behind the same firewall then they must have different ports assigned to them If there are two clients and each is behind a different firewall then the clients could have different port numbers or the same port number Default port number 10000 Re trans If packets are lost as indicated mission by absence of an in ms acknowledgment then the endpoint will retransmit the lost packets after this designated time duration has elapsed Default value 2000 milliseconds Mas Number off times the voip will Re trans re transmit a lost packet if no mission acknowledgment has been received Default value 3 121 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Single Port Protocol SPP continued Client Options Client Option fields are active only in registrar client mode and only for client voip units Primary This is the preferred SPP registrar Registrar gateway for controlling the traffic of the current voip Alternate 23 A first and a second alternate SPP Registrar 1 and Registrar gateway can be 2 specified for use by the current voip for situations where the Prima
272. required Return shipping charges surface will be paid by MTS Please include inside the shipping box a description of the problem a return shipping address it must be a street address not a P O Box number your telephone number and if the product is out of warranty a check or purchase order for repair charges 345 Warranty Service amp Tech Support MultiVOIP User Guide For out of warranty repair charges go to www multitech com documents warranties Extended two year overnight replacement service agreements are available for selected products Please call MTS at 888 288 5470 extension 5308 or visit our web site at www multitech com programs orc for details on rates and coverages Please direct your questions regarding technical matters product configuration verification that the product is defective etc to our Technical Support department at 800 972 2439 or email tsupport multitech com Please direct your questions regarding repair expediting receiving shipping billing etc to our Repair Accounting department at 800 328 9717 or 763 717 5631 or email mtsrepair multitech com Repairs for damages caused by lightning storms water power surges incorrect installation physical abuse or used caused damages are billed on a time plus materials basis 346 MultiVOIP User Guide Warranty Service amp Tech Support Technical Support Multi Tech Systems has an excellent staff of technic
273. ress n n n n The IP address of the gatekeeper for n 0 255 Port TDMA time slot used for communication between MultiVOIP unit and the gatekeeper that serves it Type Primary This field describes the type of gateway as Predefined which the Multi VOIP is defined with respect to the gatekeeper Status registered not The current status of the gateway either registered registered or unregistered 294 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance About Packetization Time You can use the Packetization Time screen to specify definite packetization rates for coders selected in the Voice FAX Parameters screen in the Coder Options group of fields The Packetization Time screen is accessible under the Advanced options entry in the sidebar list of the main voip software screen In dealing with RTP parameters the Packetization Time screen is closely related to both Voice FAX Parameters and to IP Statistics It is located in the Advanced group for ease of use Accessing Packetization Time Pulldown amp MultiVOIP v 04 Shortcut Icon Sidebar none none Configuration Advanced Packetization Time Phone Book Statistics Save Setup Connection Hel 295 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Packetization Time Screen ketization Time E Statistics ic Save Setup E Connection Help eld Channel el o sl jeo xl feo zl EW
274. ributes field definitions ar E EN E EE ERA EEE E EERE S 154 RADIUS screen field Enable Accounting 153 Retransmission Interval 153 RADIUS screen fields Accounting Port seese 153 Server Address cecceceeeeees 153 RAS Port H 323 Call Signaling field EEO AE AAS AE ease vente 113 RAS TTL Value Gatekeeper RAS PEI ar o i a cess 114 RCV channel LED 15 Received RTCP Packets IP Stats PONG AAEE PEE PEET 280 Received RTP Packets IP Stats field PR EEA E EE ST 280 Received TCP Packets IP Stats field PAA A E PAE T TEAT 279 Received Total Packets IP Stats PONG EER A E T 278 Received UDP Packets IP Stats field ccsseccvsgecieneedscsatseeiaveste E 279 Received with Errors RTCP Packets IP Stats field cee eeeeeeeee 280 Received with Errors RTP Packets IP Stats field cee eeeseeeeee 280 Received with Errors TCP Packets IP Stats field cece eeeceeees 279 Received with Errors Total Packets IP Stats field eee eeeeeeeees 278 Received with Errors UDP Packets IP Stats field eee eeeeeeeeee 279 Recipient Address email logs field oR ou esis Si eRe tee 146 recovering voice packets 104 Regional Parameter definitions 137 138 139 140 Regional Parameter fields Caden Cee piein 139 Country Region tone schemes 137 Custom tones cceeeeeseeeeeee 139 Frequency Loo eee eee 138 Frequency 2ce na 138 Gan Teea R 138 Gall Zeyen e eepe rers 138 Pulse Generati
275. ries field Registered Gateway Details cee 290 No of Pings Received Link Management field 283 No of Pings Sent Link Management field iieiea tertre oeaiei 283 no response amp busy E1 forwarding dual conditions 237 no response amp busy T1 forwarding dual conditions 195 NTI device when required for MVP410ST 62 when required for MVP810ST 62 NTI device use of BRI Voip units seses 62 Number of Days email log criteria ET EEE E 146 Number of Records email log CTILETIA eenen eE 146 Number of Retransmissions RADIUS screen field eeeeeceeeeeseees 153 numbering plan resources 258 obtaining updated firmware 302 Offhook alert 105 Offhook Alert Voice Fax Params and Intercept Tone Regional Params csi decsseec rise ea euseestees 105 Offhook Alert Timer Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field 106 Online Statistics Updation Interval field Ogi ingo 158 operating system cee 16 operating temperature 0 0 59 operating voltage cceeeeeeeteeeee 17 Operator definitions MultiVOIP User Guide ISDN BRI uu ee ceeeeeteereeeeeee 131 Operator field ee eeeeeeeeees 128 Optimization Factor field 108 Options callee statistics logs field AN AE E A espace Seetestars ated tte ge 275 Options caller statistics logs field sd EE atk cpecdtese pense eogees tees 275 Options From Details RADIUS Attributes field
276. ris 200 002 009 007 Lyon 200 002 010 003 London company office employ ext 200 002 009 007 Paris company office employee ext The Inbound PhoneBook for the Amsterdam VOIP is shown below 245 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Configuring Digital amp Analog VOIPs in Same System Analog MultiVOIP units like the MVP 210 410 810 are compatible with digital MultiVOIP units like the MVP3010 In many cases digital and analog VOIP units will appear in the same telephony IP system In addition to MVP 210 410 810 MultiVOIP units Series II units legacy analog VOIP units Series I units made by MultiTech may be included in the system as well When legacy VOIP units are included the VOIP administrator must handle two styles of phonebooks in the same VOIP network The diagram below shows a small scale system of this kind one digital VOIP the MVP3010 operates with two Series II analog VOIPs an MVP210 and an MVP410 and two Series I legacy VOIPs two MVP200 units EXAMPLE ien Digital amp Analog VOIPs Inner London UK in Same System Area Code 0207 va 200 2 9 9 Digital VolP IMVP3010 FR otnor extensions R 8301 x8399 af Pa 020 7398 8300 7 Site E ito A Carlisle UK biniien He ieee UK ar ee Oe Area Code 0121 Series 1 Analog MultiVOIP Server Client Phonebook Unit l 1 l 1 1 200 cm PS FO 1 I 2
277. rized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate 351 Regulatory Information MultiVOIP User Guide WEEE Statement Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment July 2005 The WEEE directive places an obligation on EU based manufacturers distributors retailers and importers to take back electronics products at the end of their useful life A sister Directive ROHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances compliments the WEEE Directive by banning the presence of specific hazardous substances in the products at the design phase The WEEE Directive covers all Multi Tech products imported into the EU as of August 13 2005 EU based manufacturers distributors retailers and importers are obliged to finance the costs of recovery from municipal collection points reuse and recycling of specified percentages per the WEEE require
278. rrenetan ae 149 IP address SysLog Server 158 IP Address To Details RADIUS Attributes field 155 IP Address To Details SMTP logs felda ene ran 149 IP Call Direction call progress field svtued eld eovetiustees cuvedvctiasteecendetensiet 266 IP Call Type call progress field 266 IP datagram and DiffServ 93 IP Direction statistics logs field 273 IP Mask field ceeeesceeseeesseeeeees 91 IP Statistics field P Address ys ices 2 ut a 278 IP Statistics field definitions 278 279 IP Statistics fields Cle ateessci et cates eth 278 Received RTCP Packets 280 Received RTP Packets 280 Received TCP Packets 279 Received Total Packets 278 Received UDP Packets 279 Received with errors RTCP Packets cccsssecesssseeceseees 280 Received with errors RTP Packets E E sees Bi aicecee nk EEEE 280 Received with errors TCP Packets E EA EEA EENT 278 Received with errors Total Packets lt lt cccn ietaicbeeteies 279 Received with errors UDP Packets isecen rcns 279 Transmitted RTCP Packets 280 Transmitted RTP Packets 280 Transmitted TCP Packets 279 Transmitted Total Packets 278 Transmitted UDP Packets 279 IP Statistics function 0 276 ISDN BRI Interface screen fields Status Layer 1 Interface 285 Status SPIDO eee 286 Status SPID1 oo
279. rs Ctri R SMTP Parameters Ctri Alt S Logs Traces Ctri Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctrl AleY Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctrl Alt U NAT Traversal Ctrl AlteS tte ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar El Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl F Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI 124 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration In the ISDN BRI Parameters screen select one of the BRI interfaces and configure it for the particular implementation of ISDN that you will use Configure each BRI interface per the requirements of your voip system The MVP410ST has two ISDN BRI interfaces and four channels the MVP810ST has four ISDN BRI interfaces and eight channels gt MultiVoIP MultiVOIP 5 08 DP Firmw Configuration Ethernet IP Parameters Ctrl Alt l Voice Channels Ctrl H SNMP Parameters CtrleM Regional Parameters CtreR SMTP Parameters CtreAlt S Logs Traces Ctrl Alt L Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctr Alt Y Call Signaling Alb RADIUS CtrtAlt U NAT Traversal CtrleAlt Sttey ISDN BRI Ctrl F ISDN BRI Parameters Select BRI Interface RSNA X Layer 1 Interface Dialing Options Terminal Temna AE Inter Digit Timer 2000 T C Network Switch Information Numbering Details PCM Law Calling Part Country Europe SRR alling Party Number Type National hd Operator JETSI gt C MU Law Called Party Number Type Na
280. rs to computers on the IP network in a single message with great flexibility IP addresses can be static or temporary depending on the needs of the computer IP Address 4 places 0 255 The unique LAN IP address assigned to the MultiVOIP IP Mask 4 places 0 255 Subnetwork address that allows for sharing of IP addresses within a LAN Gateway 4 places 0 255 The IP address of the device that connects your MultiVOIP to the Internet 91 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet IP Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description DiffServ Parameter fields DiffServ PHB Per Hop Behavior values pertain to a differential prioritizing system for IP packets as handled by DiffServ compatible routers There are 64 values each with an elaborate technical description These descriptions are found in TCP IP standards RFC2474 RFC2597 and for present purposes in RFC3246 which describes the value 34 34 decimal 22 hex for Assured Forwarding behavior default for Call Control PHB and the value 46 46 decimal 2E hexadecimal for Expedited Forwarding behavior default for Voip Media PHB Before using values other than these default values of 34 and 46 consult these standards documents and or a qualified IP telecommunications engineer To disable DiffServ configure both fields to 0 decimal The next page explains DiffServ in the context of the IP datagram
281. ry Caution A lithium battery on the voice fax channel board provides backup power for the timekeeping capability The battery has an estimated life expectancy of ten years When the battery starts to weaken the date and time may be incorrect If the battery fails the board must be sent back to Multi Tech Systems for battery replacement Warning There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Safety Warnings Telecom 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 This product must be disconnected from power source and telephone network interface when servicing 3 This product is to be used with UL and cUL listed computers 4 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 5 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines 6 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning 7 Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak not even to report a gas leak 8 To reduce the risk of fire use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord 9 Never install a telephone jack in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations 20 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Task Collecting Phone IP Details vital Placement Command Control Computer Setup
282. ry Registrar gateway is busy or otherwise unavailable Registrar IP n n n n This is the IP address of the Address registrar voip to which this client is assigned Default value 0 0 0 0 effectively there is no useful default value Registrar 10000 or This is the port number of the Port other registrar voip to which this client is assigned Default port number 10000 Polling integer The interval between the voip Interval 60 300 gateway s successive attempts to connect to and be governed by a higher level SPP registrar gateway The Primary Registrar is the highest level registrar gateway Alternate Registrar 1 is second Alternate Registrar 2 is the lowest order SPP registrar gateway Registrar Options Registrar Option fields are active only in registrar client mode and only for registrar voip units Keep Alive 30 300 Time out duration before a in sec seconds registrar will unregister a client that does not send its Tm here signal Client normally sends its I m here signal every 20 seconds Timeout default 60 seconds 122 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SPP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Proxy NAT Device Parameters Behind Y N Enables MultiVOIP running Proxy NAT in SPP Registrar mode to device operate behind a proxy NAT Address Translation Proxy NAT
283. s Total Number of Logs 0 p Call details Voice coder Disconnect Reason DTMF Capability Outbound Digits Recvd Outbound Digits Sent Server Details m From details Logt StartDate Time Duration Type Status IP Dir Mode From Packets sent Packets recvd Packets lost Bytes sent Exit Bytes recvd Help Delete File Gateway Name IP Address Options r To details Gateway Name IP Address Options SC Silence Compression r Supplementary Services Info FEC Forward Error Correction Call Transferred To Call Forwarded To 272 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Logs Screen Details Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Log column 1 or higher All calls are assigned an event number in chronological order with the most recent call having the highest event number Start Date Time column dd mm yyyy hh mm ss The starting time of the call event The date is presented as a day expression of one or two digits a month expression of one or two digits and a four digit year This is followed by a time of day expression presented as a two digit hour a two digit minute and a two digit seconds value statistics logs field Duration column hh mm ss This describes how long the call event lasted in hours minutes and seconds Type H 323 SIP or
284. s cont d DTMF Other Details Field Name Values Description Prefix specified Displays the dialed digits that Matched dialing digits were matched to a phonebook entry Outbound 0 9 The digits transmitted by the Digits Sent MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for this call Outbound 0 9 Of the digits transmitted by the Digits MultiVOIP to the PBX telco for Received this call these are the digits that were confirmed as being received Server Details n n n n The IP address etc of the traffic DTMF Capability for n 0 255 and or other server IP related descriptions inband out of band Expressions differ slightly for different Call Signaling protocols H 323 SIP or SPP control server if any being used whether an H 323 gatekeeper a SIP proxy or an SPP registrar gateway will be displayed here if the call is handled through that server Indicates whether the DTMF dialing digits are carried Inband or Out of Band The corresponding field values differ for the 3 different voip protocols For H 323 this field can display Out of Band or Inband For SIP it can display either Out of Band RFC2833 or Out of Band SIP INFO to indicate the out of band condition or Inband to indicate the in band condition For SPP it can display Out of Band RFC2833 or Inband 269 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Call Progress Details Field De
285. s field definitions 266 267 268 269 270 271 Call Progress Details statistics screen field Call On Hold eee 270 Call Waiting eee 270 Caller IDa sneue nousin 270 Call Progress Details statistics screen fields Channel 266 Duration cccceeecseceeeeeeeeees 266 Mode 266 Voice Coder cceeccccccceeeeeeees 266 IP Call Type isisisi 266 IP Call Direction 0006 266 Packets Sent ccccccceeees 267 Packets Received 00065 267 Bytes Sentis sosirii 267 Bytes Received cee 267 Packets LOSt cccccccceeeees 267 Outbound Digits Sent 269 Outbound Digits Received 269 Prefix Matched 00000 269 Server Details cce 269 DTMF Capability 269 Call On Hold 270 Call Waiting eee 270 Caller IDs a 270 Call Status eeees 271 Call Control Status 271 Silence Compression 271 Forward Error Correction 271 Gateway Name from and to 268 IP Address from and to 268 Options from and to 268 Gateway Name from 0 268 IP Address from cccccceesseeeee 268 Options from sssr 268 Gateway Name tO eee 268 IP Address tOnsocsen norisa 268 OPTIONS tO eee eee eeeeeecteeeeeeeeeees 268 Call Status call progress field 271 364 MultiVOIP User Guide Call Status RADIUS Attributes field Le EAER E AEE tenets 154 Call S
286. s to phone connected to FXS port channel 2 of the Site B VOIP 421 200 2 9 6 Calls to Site E Cheyenne 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to Lincoln area local PSTN via FXO channel CH4 of the Site F VOIP 1402 200 2 9 5 Calls to extensions 263 thirty of key 740 system at Site F 1402 200 2 9 5 Lincoln Human 263 operator or auto 741 attendant is 1402 200 2 9 5 needed to 263 complete these 742 calls Note 3 The pound sign is a delimiter separating the VOIP number from the standard telephony phone number 207 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Inbound Phonebook for MVP2410 Digital VOIP Site D Remove Add Channel Comment Prefix Prefix Number 1615 9 0 Allows phone users at remote Note 4 voip sites to call non toll Note 5 numbers within the Site D area code 615 Pierre SD over the VOIP network 1615 31 0 Allows voip calls directly to 49231 employees at Site D at extensions x3101 to x3199 Note 4 9 gives PBX station users access to outside line Note 5 The comma represents a one second pause the time required for the user to receive a dial tone on the outside line PSTN The comma is only allowed in the Inbound phonebook 208 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration Outbound Phone Book for MVP410 Analog VOIP Site F Destin Remove Add IP Comment Pattern Pre
287. s Ctrl H SNMP Parameters Ctrl M Regional Parameters Ctrl R SMTP Parameters Ctri Alt S Logs Traces Ctr AlteL Supplementary Services Ctrl Alt H System Information Ctr AlteY Call Signaling Alt C RADIUS Ctri Alt U NAT Traversal CtrleAlteS tA ISDN BRI Ctrl F Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ctrl R Ethernet Z IP Voice Fax Call Signaling ISDN BRI SNMP Regional 135 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Regional Parameters screen will appear For the country selected the standard set of frequency pairs will be listed for dial tone busy tone unobtainable tone fast busy or trunk busy ring tone and other more specialized tones Regenal Parameters Countiy Begion SA Optom Starvdsed Tones Fiequency Frequency Cadena Ez 4 aC st Add Edi Tone County Selection For Dulin Modem Ures States US Tore Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Custom Tone Paw Settings Cadence 1 Tone Pai Due E Tone Par Values Erequency 350 Hz Cadence 0 These tone ne Carad pairs sii f serve the same a aa CUE RULES Gon 16 T B Cadenceg I standard tones but use different frequencies In each field enter the values that fit your particular system 136 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration The Regional Parameters fields are described in the table below Regional Parameter Definitio
288. s Gathering Phone IP Details Identify Remote VOIP Site to Call When you re done installing the MultiVOIP you ll want to confirm that it is configured and operating properly To do so it s good to have another voip that you can call for testing purposes You ll want to confirm end to end connectivity You ll need IP and telephone information about that remote site If this is the very first voip in the system you ll want to coordinate the installation of this MultiVOIP with an installation of another unit at a remote site Identify VOIP Protocol to be Used Will you use H 323 SIP or SPP Each has advantages and disadvantages Although it is possible to mix protocols in a single VOIP system it is highly desirable to use the same VOIP protocol for all VOIP units in the system SPP is a non standard protocol developed by Multi Tech SPP is not compatible with the Proprietary protocol used in Multi Tech s earlier generation of voip gateways 25 Voip Placement amp PC Settings MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Placement Mount your MultiVOIP in a safe and convenient location where cables for your network and phone system are accessible Rack mounting instructions are in Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation amp Cabling of the User Guide Command Control Computer Setup Specs amp Settings The computer used for command and control of the MultiVOIP a must be an IBM compatible PC b must use a Microsoft operating sy
289. s equipment complies with part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission Rules On the outside surface of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number This information must be provided to the telephone company 2 As indicated below the suitable jack Universal Service Order Code connecting arrangement for this equipment is shown If applicable the facility interface codes FIC and service order codes SOC are shown 3 An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details 4 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible 5 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operation or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice to allow you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service 6 If trouble is experienced with this equipment the model of which is indicated below please contact Multi Tech Systems Inc at the address sho
290. s sssssocssetvestectsvestsesteestees 105 AutoCall Voice Fax Params and Pass Through Enable FXS Loop Start oss acti eee eee a saecte 105 AutoCall Offhook Alert field 105 106 Automatic Disconnection field 110 bandwidth code c ceeeee 103 battery caution eee eeeeecreeeeeees 56 baud rate default Multi VOIP software connection 176 baud rate fax ee ceeeeeeeeereees 101 baud rate setting eee 176 Behind Proxy NAT device 123 Boot LED rinnan 15 MVP 410ST 810ST eee 65 Boot Version System Info eee 174 262 booting CHIME eee eee eeeeeecteeeeeeeeee 15 box contents Verifying fave aardietaiian 57 BRI connector pinout s sseseee 356 BRI interface types STand Usancticiiaduscet aos 357 busy amp no response E1 forwarding dual conditions 237 busy amp no response T1 forwarding dual conditions 195 busy tone CUSCOM eeeeeeeeeeeee 142 OUTS 0 0 oe 141 Bytes Received call progress field DARA ted Lead tesco tea dines 267 Bytes Received RADIUS Attributes field 154 Bytes Received SMTP logs field 148 363 Index Bytes received statistics logs field Bytes Sent call progress field 267 Bytes Sent RADIUS Attributes field EE EEE E S 154 Bytes Sent SMTP logs field 148 Bytes sent statistics logs field 275 cabling problem fixing 86 cabling procedure MVP4
291. scription Name Alternate n n n n Alternate destination for outbound data traffic IP where in case of excessive delay in data transmission Address n 0 255 Round milliseconds The Round Trip Delay is the criterion for Trip judging when a data pathway is considered Delay blocked When the delay exceeds the threshold specified here the data stream will be diverted to the alternate destination specified as the Alternate IP Address 191 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 3 Select Inbound PhoneBook List Entries MultiVolP MultiVOIP v5 08 DP Firmware Dec 15 2005 192 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration 4 The Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen appears Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Accept AnyNumber Remove Prefix Add Prefix Channel Number Hunting X Description m Call Forward r Forward Condition I Unconditional I Busy I No Response Forward Destination H323 call Phone or IP address SIP call Phone or IP address or IP address port or Phone IP address port or SIP URL or Ph IP address SPP call Phone or IP address port or Phone IP address port Ring Count jo m Registration Options H323 Register as T E164 I Tech Prefix SPP M H3231D Tl Register With SPP Registrar SIP I Register With SIP Proxy 193 T1 Phonebook Configur
292. ser Guide Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description SIP Fields Use Proxy Y N Select if proxy server is used Transport TCP or Voip administrator must choose Protocol UDP between UDP and TCP transmission protocols UDP is a high speed low overhead connectionless protocol where data is transmitted without acknowledgment guaranteed delivery or guaranteed packet sequence integrity TCP is slower connection oriented protocol with greater overhead but having acknowledgment and guarantees delivery and packet sequence integrity SIP Port 5060 or other The SIP Port Number is a Number UDP logical port number See RFC 3087 The voip will listen for SIP Control of messages at this logical port Servi If SIP is used 5060 is the Context using default standard or well SIP Request known port number to be URI by the used If 5060 is not used Network then the port number used is Working that specified in the SIP roti Request URI Universal Resource Identifier SIP URL sip userphone Looking similar to an email hostserver where aserphone is the telephone number and hostserver is the domain name or an address on the network address a SIP URL identifies a user s address In SIP communications each caller or callee is identified by a SIP url sip user_name host_name The format of a sip url is very simil
293. sie a 13 SysLog client programs availability oseese 341 features amp presentation types 343 SysLog functionality eee 13 SySLog Server oo eee cesses eee eeee 13 SysLog Server Enable field 158 SysLog Server function as added feature ote 341 capabilities Of 343 enabling eiiiai anaa 342 location of 341 SysLog Server IP Address field 158 SysLog Server enabling 157 System Info Parameters Boot Version 174 Configuration Version 175 Firmware Version 174 Hardware ID oe eee 175 Mac Address n se 175 Phone Book Version 175 Up TIME keii niise 175 System Info screen Boot Version 262 Configuration Version 262 Firmware Version s 262 Hardware ID oes 262 Mac Address n se 262 382 MultiVOIP User Guide Phone Book Version 5 262 Uptime n p iin cnt ineei 262 System Information screen for op amp MAIN eee 261 System Information screen accessing PEE EE E ovoaiees she 173 System Information update interval SENE een nanie 173 for op amp maint 263 T1 references in BRI manual about 8 T1 E1 Statistics function 284 table top voip models 06 56 TCP UDP compared BD E oa tested ened 231 IP Statistics context 277 TA E E ETT 188 technical configuration prerequisites tO eee eeeeeeee 78 SUMMA aiina ae 75 technical configuration procedure detailed nasrin eera 83 SUMMAT
294. sing the MultiVOIP Windows GUI firmware and factory default settings can also be transferred from controller PC to MultiVOIP piecemeal using separate commands When using the MultiVOIP web browser GUI to control configure the voip remotely upgrading of software must be done on a piecemeal basis using the FTP Server function of the MultiVOIP unit When performing a piecemeal software upgrade whether from the Windows GUI or web browser GUI follow these steps in order 1 Identify Current Firmware Version 2 Download Firmware 3 Download Factory Defaults When upgrading firmware the software commands Download Firmware and Download Factory Defaults must be implemented in order else the upgrade is incomplete Identifying Current Firmware Version Before implementing a MultiVOIP firmware upgrade be sure to verify the firmware version currently loaded on it The firmware version appears in the MultiVoip Program menu Go to Start Programs MultiVOIP___x xx The final expression x xx is the firmware version number In the illustration below the firmware version is 4 00a made for the E1 MultiVOIP MVP3010 Ee MultiVOlP 3000 4 004 When a new firmware version is installed the MultiVOIP software can be upgraded in one step using the Upgrade Software command or piecemeal using the Download Firmware command and the Download Factory Defaults command 306 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance Download
295. sit our previous example in greater detail It s an international company with offices in London Paris and Amsterdam In each office a MVP3010 has been connected to the PBX system 3 Sites All E1 Example The VOIP system will have the following features 1 Employees in all cities will be able to call each other over the VOIP system using 4 digit extensions 2 Calls to Outer London and Inner London greater Amsterdam and greater Paris will be accessible to all company offices as local calls 3 Vendors in Guildford Lyon and Rotterdam can be contacted as national calls by all company offices Note that the phonebook entries for Series II analog MultiVOIPs MVP 210 410 810 used in Euro type telephony settings will be the same in format as entries for the MVP3010 239 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Toulouse Marseille 240 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration The Netherlands Country Code 31 Groningen Le guwarden 9 0294 Weesp 026 Arnhem Rotterdam 0118 Middelburg 040 Eindhoven 241 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide An outline of the equipment setup in these three offices is shown below Wren Clothing Co London Office Country Code 44 Area Code 0208 E1 PBX 5174 200 2 10 3 SR ra ONO 5171 A 979 5170 Wren Clothing Co Paris Office Country Code 33 Area Code 01 PBX E1 Digital RN
296. sssceeees 74 CONFIGURING THE MULTIVOIP cccccessscccececescssssececececsesseeecececseneneaeeeeeeeeneaees LOCAL CONBIGURATION y oes cs caviganticesssesossah ches n geen E ES P REQUISILOS vcscasassachscosnnscassasntsase deitses atoissar i aE E a nara IP Parameter n I Ee hea tara ais ISDN BRI Telephony Parameters ceseseeeeees SMTP Parameters for email call log reporting Config Info Gheck Liste orrien nerhet caveat ead doh i N eE ko Se eNA ES Local Configuration Procedure Summary sssr Local Configuration Procedure Detailed Modem Rely sisiccsscesssesresssecsacdassesiea ite cies tausoscidecss deta sssticednestssesceveseedeasdasegouecbest CHAPTER 6 T1 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION u sscccssssccessscceesseeees 178 T1 VERSUS E1 TELEPHONY ENVIRONMENTB sesssccececeessseceeececsessseceeececeenens 179 CONFIGURING T1 NAM TELEPHONY MULTIVOIP PHONEBOOKG c 0 008 179 T 1 PHONEBOOK EXAMPLES ccssssccccececsessaececececsessaaecesececeessaaeeececeesesenssaeeeeeeeenes 197 SSites Al TI Example seenen nesnenin eia EEE A ENE ER E 197 Configuring Mixed Digital Analog VOIP Systems ossos 203 Call Completion Summaries ccccsscceseceenseceseeeenseceseeeessecesececaseceaeecnaeceeneeenaeens 212 Variations in PBX CHArACtEr istics ccccccccccccecececececececececececececececececeseseseseseseseens 215 CHAPTER 7 E1 PHONEBOOK CONFIGURATION sseesseoeessecesssecssoseessoceesse 216 E1 VERSUS T1 TE
297. stem c must be connected to your local network Ethernet system and d must have an available serial COM port The configuration tasks and control tasks the PC will have to do with the MultiVOIP are not especially demanding Still we recommend using a reasonably new computer The computer that you use to configure your MultiVOIP need not be dedicated to the MultiVOIP after installation is complete COM port on controller PC You ll need an available COM port on the controller PC You ll need to know which COM port is available for use with the MultiVOIP COM1 COM2 etc If your command computer has only USB2 0 ports and no serial ports you will need a USB2 0 to serial adaptor Work Around Allowing Use of Web GUI Only The default IP address of the MultiVOIP unit as shipped from the factory is 192 168 3 143 By installing the up to date Java program from the MultiVOIP CD temporarily resetting the IP address of the command computer to 192 168 3 x and connecting both to the same physical Ethernet network the MultiVOIP unit s built in web GUI can be contacted and its IP address can be set as needed If this is done all subsequent configuration can be done using the MultiVOIP web GUI and the command computer would not need a serial COM port Therefore in the case of a computer lacking a serial port no USB2 0 to serial adaptor would be needed However under such an arrangement the command computer would remain unable to use the
298. sword will Reboot the MultiVOIP Do you want to continue Cencei Click OK to proceed with establishing a password 317 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide 4 The Password screen will appear If you intend to use the FTP Server function that is built into the MultiVOIP enter a username and password Type your password in the Password field of the Password screen Type this same password again in the Confirm Password field to verify the password you have chosen NOTE Be sure to write down your password in a convenient but secure place If the password is forgotten contact MultiTech Technical Support for advice Ms m Password User Name I New Password Reconfirm Password Cancel Help NOTE You can disable the username and password functions by entering a username but then leaving both the New Password field and the Reconfirm Password field blank Then click OK In that case you will not be prompted for username or password when entering the Windows GUI Click OK 5 A message will appear indicating that a password has been set successfully MultiVOIP x User name and Password has been set successfully After the password has been set successfully the MultiVOIP will re boot itself and in so doing its BOOT LED will light up 318 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance 6 After the password has been set the user will be required to ente
299. t 1P Parameters Ctrl Alt l Ctrl H Ctrl M Ctrl R Ctrl Alt S Ctri Alt L Ctri Alt H Ctri lt y Alt C Ctrl Alt U CtrikAlt S ft Ctrl F gt Multi olP Multi Configuration Configuration Ethernet IP Call Signaling ISDN BRI Shortcut Sidebar Configuration Ethernet IP Ctrl H a pera eee ey POA all Signaling ISDN BRI 97 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide In each field enter the values that fit your particular network Voice Fax Parameters Select Channel immen Voice Gain m Fas Modem parameters IV Fax Relay Enable Input fo zj d Output Zf dB JV Modem Relay Enable m Dtmf m Max Baud Rate 14400 M Copy Channel ain High 4 7 dB Low 7 B Fax Volume 35 y dB Default itter V 400 ms DOREN fo B Jitter Value Mode FRF11 z Help DTMF Out Of Band Fixed Duration x Out Of Band Mode Rfc2833 gt es Info Coder Advanced Features Manual C Automatic IV Silence Compression Selected Coder G 723 1 6 3 kbps b V Echo Cancellation Max bandwidth fi 0 kbps m Auto Call OffHook Alert Auto Call OffHook Alert Uneak Cancel J Forward Error Correction v M Generate Local Dial Tone OffHook Alert Timer 10 secs Phone Number 2411 m Dynamic Jitter Buffer Minimum Jitter Value feo ms CID Manipulation Disable Mode
300. t Instructions 4 Web Browser GUI Setup Optional To do configuration and operation procedures using the web browser GUI you must first set it up To do so follow these steps The browser used must be Internet Explorer 6 0 or above or Netscape 6 0 or above or FireFox 1 0 or above Must be Java Runtime Environment 1 4 2_01 or above NOTE Required on first use of Web Browser GUI only A Be sure an IP address has E Open web browser been assigned to the Note The PC being used must MultiVOIP unit this must be be connected to and have an IP done in the MultiVOIP address on the same IP network Windows GUI that the voip is on B Save Setup in Windows GUI F Browse to IP address of MultiVOIP unit C Close the MultiVOIP G If username and password Windows GUI have been established enter them when prompted by voip D Install Java program from H Use web browser GUI to MultiVOIP product CD configure or operate voip Need more info See Web Browser Interface in Operation amp Maintenance chapter of User Guide Once you ve begun using the web browser GUI you can go back to the MultiVOIP Windows GUI at any time However you must log out of the web browser GUI before using the MultiVOIP Windows GUI 30 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phone IP Starter Config Phone IP Starter Configuration continued 5 Go to Configuration Voice Fax Select Coder Automatic
301. tails RADIUS Attributes field eee 155 Description From Details SMTP logs field noinine 149 Description To Details RADIUS Attributes field eee 155 Description To Details SMTP logs fielde sisaria set 149 Destination Pattern outbound field Bilis E E EE ET 229 Til EE E E EET 186 destination patterns discussion El E E S 222 TIa na chine i e a 180 dial tone custom essesseeeeeeeeseesee 142 Dialing Options field ISDN BRI itetisi 128 dialtone Seac ae 141 MultiVOIP User Guide DiffServ and IP datagram 93 DiffServ PHB Per Hop Behavior VALUE er eeri shed 92 dimensions cceesseceeeceeseeceteeeeeeees 17 Directory of Firmware MTS web SILC A E E 305 Disable checkbox field 109 disabling username password functions web browser GUI 008 320 Windows GUI ceccceeeeereees 318 Disconnect Reason SMTP logs field E vevad eye EE SA 149 Disconnect Reason statistics logs ETE o E EEA TA 274 DNS Server IP Address Ethernet IP Parameters field ccsceeee 94 Download Factory Defaults program menu option command 310 Download Factory Defaults option description Multi VOIP program MENU ieee or aE adie 299 Download Firmware program menu option command 306 307 313 Download Firmware option description Multi VOIP program MENU oreiro irse areias 299 Download User Defaults program menu option command 31
302. tatus SMTP logs field 148 Call Transfer 00cceee 14 163 Call Transfer Enable 00 165 Call Transfer music jingle during hold sis de Raden ecersige decedent A 165 Call Transferred To logs statistics field 276 Call Type SMTP logs field 148 Call Waiting eee 14 163 Call Progress Details statistics feld oaaae 270 Call Progress Details statistics feldene hee 270 Call Waiting call progress field 270 Call Waiting Enable 166 Caller ID i253 ss asesst iste hiaeitietes 163 Call Progress Details statistics Lal ba ieee eee eres eae eet 270 Caller ID call progress field 270 Caller ID Supplementary Services field inio ret terere 172 Caller Name Identification Enable 167 Calling Party Supplementary Services 168 Canadian Class A requirements 350 Canadian Limitations Notice regulatory ee ee eeeeeeeee 351 CD MultiVOIP 0 ec eeeeceeeereees 18 Channel call progress field 266 channel capacity eeeeeeeeeee 9 10 Channel Number inbound field Bl evi ehacciin BRS clea eee 237 Thrane a 194 Channel Number RADIUS Attributes field 00 0000000000000 154 Channel Number SMTP logs field E EEA EE E EOE eed ET 147 channel tracing on off logging 159 CID Manipulation field group 109 Clear button ISDN BRI Statistics SCTEEN asiarra ea ii 287 Clear IP Statistics button 278 Clea
303. teeeeees 296 G729 coders RTP packetization VOICE FAX rrn eirinen 296 Gain 1 custom tone field 142 Gain 1 tone pair scheme 139 140 Gain 2 custom tone field 142 Gain 2 tone pair scheme 139 140 Gatekeeper Discovery Polling Interval H 323 Call Signaling field 114 gatekeeper interaction 0 11 Gatekeeper IP Address H 323 Call Signaling field eee 113 Gatekeeper Name H 323 Call Signaling fields eee eee 113 GateKeeper RAS Parameters 113 114 Gateway Ethernet IP Parameters Piel rennene aasi 9 Gateway H 323 ID Outbound Phonebook field A E E AEE 230 ET ieai o R EER ede oeke 187 Gateway Name callee statistics logs field srirensinis ornes 275 Gateway Name caller statistics logs field iiipn seirena anan 275 Gateway Name Ethernet IP Parameters field cccecceee 91 Gateway Number From Details RADIUS Attributes field 155 Gateway Number From Details SMTP logs field eee 149 Gateway Number To Details RADIUS Attributes field 155 Gateway Number To Details SMTP logs field piine 149 Gateway Prefix outbound phonebook field Blieiatisniisediiekuses 230 Tiripa e e E enced 187 General Options fields 121 Generate Local Dial Tone Voice FAX AutoCall Offhook Alert field cecceeeeeeeeenee 106 Index GK Name H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field 292
304. tekstoause 218 Dl vianadthaveancdciedvintahaiiciaus 180 Accept Any Number inbound Liiarchtavetichine aiden ant 236 Tl vaschina ean ii mi aen 194 Accept Any Number outbound field Bl rasaishaieaadstanraaiciseieasy 228 Di EE E 185 access to network eee 134 accessing Statistics Logs screen is Dah sde seven teal ed ictesetpo nee sarees tees 272 accessing Call Progress Statistics SOTEER oipo epei iea E 264 accessing configuration parameter QTOUPS eera aeneae E EREE 86 accessing Ethernet IP Parameters Sree cries e T N 87 accessing IP Statistics screen 276 accessing ISDN BRI Statistics SCVEOM iit rese Es REE k 284 accessing Logs Statistics screen e EA E 272 accessing logs screen eee 156 accessing Regional Parameters 135 accessing Registered Gateway Details Statistics screen ccceeeeeees 290 accessing Registered Gateway Details screen 00 288 290 accessing RTP Parameters screen 295 accessing SMTP parameters 144 accessing SNMP parameters 132 accessing Supplementary Services SCTE i E E OE 162 accessing System Information screen PE ERE E EE E 173 accessing Voice FAX Parameters ei e A T EER EE EAEE EE 97 361 Index Accounting Port RADIUS screen field enine s 153 Add Inbound Phonebook Entry icons Bl EEEE E E 224 Tila vasa E EET 181 Add Outbound Phonebook Entry icon i EE E E E T 224 Ti E E E T 181 Add Prefix inbound field Bl EEEE EE T 236 Ti EEEE EE
305. ter With SIP Proxy Enter Inbound PhoneBook data for your MultiVOIP unit The fields of the Add Edit Inbound PhoneBook screen are described in the table below 235 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions Field Name Values Description Accept Any Number Y N When checked Any Number appears as the value in the Remove Prefix field The Any Number feature of the Inbound Phone Book does not work when an external routing device is used Gatekeeper for H323 protocol Proxy for SIP protocol Registrar for SPP protocol When no external routing device is used If Any Number is selected calls received from phone numbers not matching a listed Prefix shown in the Remove Prefix column of the Inbound Phone Book will be admitted into the voip on the channel listed in the Channel Number field Any Number can be used in addition to one or more Prefixes Remove Prefix dialed digits portion of dialed number to be removed before completing call to destination often a local PBX Add Prefix dialed digits digits to be added before completing call to destination often a local PBX 236 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration Add Edit Inbound Phone Book Field Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Channel 1 30 or E1 channel number t
306. ter fields Dynamic Jitter Buffer 107 Voice FAX Parameter fields Minimum Jitter Value 107 Voice FAX Parameter fields Maximum Jitter Value 108 Voice FAX Parameter fields Optimization Factor 0 108 Voice FAX Parameter fields CID Manipulation 0 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields Disable checkbox field 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields MO escccit ele het eek 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields User CID field eee 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields Prefix field cccsceseececceveeee 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields Suffix field ceececccceseeneneees 109 Voice FAX Parameter fields Automatic Disconnection 110 Voice FAX Parameter fields Jitter Value ceceeeseeeeeeee 110 Voice FAX Parameter fields Call Duration ccceee eee 110 Voice FAX Parameter fields Consecutive Packets Lost 110 Voice FAX Parameter fields Network Disconnection 110 Voice FAX Parameters screen ACCESSING iinn e ene 97 Voice FAX parameters setting 97 voip email account eee 145 voip management remote 132 Voip Media PHB field 92 MultiVOIP User Guide VoIP Media Priority Ethernet IP parameters field eee 90 voip software HOSE PO ven errre 16 voip system example conceptual E1 calls to remote PSTN 219 foreign calls national rates 221 voip
307. terface ISDN BRiiissaicdisdedecescscsehevve 127 Layer Interface fields ISDN BRI Statistics manearen Souths 285 LED definitions cccceeseeeeees 15 Boot sacar h eneee raat 15 372 MultiVOIP User Guide Ethernet essesi 15 FDX ecuun n eniron 15 ENK erorri sehen 15 PONET eeaeee ae eaS 15 RCV channel 0 eee 15 XMT channel 0 0 eee 15 LED indicators channel operation 14 general operation 14 LED ty DeSiscct ee egs 14 lifting precaution about eee 56 limitations notice regulatory Canadian iiki iois Sessessasestsss 351 limited warranty eee eeeeeees 345 Link Management Statistics fields Clear command button 283 IP Address column 283 IP Address to Ping eee 283 Last ETTOL se sssississsussiessescisiccess 283 No of Pings Received 283 No of Pings Sent eee 283 Ping Size in Bytes eee 283 Pings per Test 283 Response Timeout 283 Round Trip Delay eee 283 Start Now command button 283 Timer Interval between Pings 283 Link Management Statistics screen field definitions 0 0 283 Link Status fields Link Management Statistics S10 Kolo ee ee 283 List of Registered Numbers field Registered Gateway Details 290 lithium battery caution 0 0 56 ENK LED tai ainin enais 15 loading of weight in rack 59 local configuration cccecees 78 local configur
308. ters and use the Console Messages Filters Settings screen ee 1 Console Message Settings IV Enable Console Messages Filters Console Messages Filter Settings Trace Off for Functions Functions Alternate Routing Common Printfs DIFFSERY DSP FTP H 323 H450 HUNTING IGK LOGS Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 7 Channel 9 Channel 10 159 Cancel Trace On for Functions Cancel OK Baer SYSLOG T 38 WEB Trace On for Channels Channel 6 Channel 8 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide 17 Set NAT Traversal parameters You can access the NAT Traversal screen by pulldown menu sidebar menu or keyboard shortcut NAT Network Address Translation parameters are applicable only when the MultiVOIP is operating in SIP mode The use of STUN Simple Traversal of UDP NATs servers to aid networks with NAT devices is described in RFC 3489 m NAT Traversal m STUN Server Name IP Port Cancel Timers Keep alive Help Accessing NAT Traversal Parameters Pulldown Sidebar MultiVolP MultiVOIP v Configuration Ethemet IP Parameters Voice Channels SNMP Parameters Regional Parameters SMTP Parameters Logs Traces Supplementary Services System Information Call Signaling RADIUS ISDN BRI 5 08 DP Firmwe CtrleAltel Ctrl H Ctrl M Ctrl R CtreAleS CtreAlteL Ctrl Alt H
309. the IP network in the course of this call Packets loss lost Bytes sent integer value integer value The number of voice packets from this call that were lost after being received from the IP network The number of bytes of data sent over the IP network in the course of this call Bytes received integer value The number of bytes of data received over the IP network in the course of this call FROM Details Gateway Name alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway string that originated this call IP Address X X X X IP address of the VOIP gateway where x has a from which the call was range of 0 to 255 received Options FEC SC Displays VOIP transmission options used by the VOIP gateway originating the call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression TO Details Gateway Name alphanumeric Identifier for the VOIP gateway string that completed terminated this call IP Address X X X X IP address of the VOIP gateway where x has a at which the call was completed range of 0 to 255 terminated Options Displays VOIP transmission options used by the VOIP gateway terminating the call These may include Forward Error Correction or Silence Compression 275 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Logs Screen Details Field Definitions cont d Supplementary Services Info Call Transferred phone numb
310. the SIP Proxy s IP address will be included as part of the User ID instead of the SIP Proxy s domain name Port Number Logical port number for proxy communications User Name Values alphanumeric Description Identifier used when proxy server is used in network If a proxy server is used in a SIP voip network all clients must enter both a User Name and a Password before being allowed to make a call 118 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration SIP Call Signaling Parameter Definitions cont d Field Name Values amp Description SIP Proxy Parameters Password Values alphanumeric Description Password for proxy server function See User Name description above Re Values numeric in seconds Registration Description This is the timeout interval for Time registration of the MultiVOIP with a SIP proxy server The time interval begins the moment the MultiVOIP gateway registers with the SIP proxy server and ends at the time specified by the user in the Re Registration Time field this field When if registration lapses call traffic routed to from the MultiVOIP through the SIP proxy server will cease However calls in progress will continue to function until they end Proxy Polling integer The interval between the voip Interval 60 300 gateway s successive attempts to connect to and be governed by a higher level SIP proxy server The Primary Proxy is the high
311. the third use of the VOIP system the national calling area of each VOIP location becomes accessible to all of the VOIP system s users As a result international calls can be made at national calling rates Again significant savings are possible For example suppose that the Wren Clothing Company buys its buttons from the Chickadee Button Company in the Dutch city of Rotterdam In that case Wren Clothing personnel in both London and Paris could call the Chickadee Button Company without paying international long distance rates only Dutch national calling rates would be charged This applies to calls completed anywhere in The Netherlands United Kingdom The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site n Amsterdam Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site y K oricadee Button Co Rotterdam Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Paris lt _ Calls at Dutch National Rates France 221 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Similarly the VOIP system allows Wren Clothing employees in London and Amsterdam to call anywhere in France at French national rates it allows Wren Clothing employees in Paris and Amsterdam to call anywhere in the United Kingdom at its national rates Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site London Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Amsterdam The Netherlands Wren Clothing Co VOIP PBX Site Oe aed Calls at French one National Rates KIAN
312. the version of the ation nn nn Multi VOIP configuration software Version alpha numeric Phone Book nn nn Indicates the version of the Version alpha MultiVOIP phone book being used numeric Mac numeric Denotes the number assigned as the Address voip unit s unique Ethernet address Up Time days Indicates how long the voip has been hours running since its last booting mm ss Hardware alpha Indicates version of the MultiVOIP ID numeric circuit board assembly being used 262 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance The frequency with which the System Information screen is updated is determined by a setting in the Logs screen 263 Operation and Maintenance MultiVOIP User Guide Statistics Screens Ongoing operation of the MultiVOIP whether it is ina MultiVOIP PBX setting or MultiVOIP telco office setting can be monitored for performance using the Statistics functions of the MultiVOIP software About Call Progress Accessing Call Progress Statistics Channel Icons Main Screen Lower Left Channel icons are green when data traffic is present red when idle In the web GUI call progress details can be viewed by clicking on an icon one for each channel arranged similarly on the web browser screen Pulldown Icon Call Progress Ctrl Alt A Logs Ctr 0 IP Statistics Ctrl P Registered Gateway Details Ctrl Alt4we Link Management Ctrl 2 Altemate Servers Ctrl
313. through an auto attendant which prompts user to dial the desired extension 0182 200 2 9 5 4 Gives remote voip users access to Tavistock PSTN via FXO port 4 at Site F 3xx 200 2 9 9 0 Allows remote voip users Note 1 to call all PBX extensions at Site D Inner London using only three digits 247 E1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Phone Book for Analog VOIP Host Unit Site B continued VOIP Dir IP Address Channel Comments OR Destination Pattern 0207 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip users XXX Note 2 access to phone numbers XXXX in 0207 area code Inner London in which Site D is located 0208 200 2 9 9 0 Gives remote voip users XXX Note 2 access to phone numbers XXXX in 0208 area code Outer London for which calls are local from Site D Inner London Note 1 The x is a wildcard character Note 2 By specifying Channel 0 we instruct the MVP3010 to choose any available data channel to carry the call Note 3 Note that Site F key system has only 30 extensions x7400 7429 This destination pattern 018226374 actually directs calls to 402 263 7430 through 402 263 7499 into the key system as well This means that such calls which belong on the PSTN cannot be completed In some cases this might be inconsequential because an entire exchange fully used or not might have been reserved for the company or it mi
314. ting numeric TDM time slot at which RADIUS Port 1 65535 accounting information will be transmitted and received Retrans mission If the MultiVOIP sends out a packet to Interval the RADIUS server and doesn t Number of 0 255 receive a response in the retransmit Re transmis interval it will retransmit that packet sions again and wait the retransmit interval again for a response How many times it does this is determined by the setting in the Number of Retransmissions field Shared alpha Client encryption key for the current Secret numeric voip unit Select Gives access to RADIUS Attributes Attributes screen On Attributes screen one can button specify the parameters to be tallied by the RADIUS server for accounting usually billing purposes 153 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The RADIUS Parameters dialog box has a secondary dialog box RADIUS Attributes that allows you to customize accounting information sent to the RADIUS server by the MultiVOIP The MultiVOIP software logs data about many aspects of the call traffic going through the MultiVOIP The RADIUS Attributes screen lets you pick which aspects will be included in the accounting reports sent to the RADIUS server RADIUS Attributes Field Definitions Field Description Field Description Select All Log report to include all fields shown Channel Data channel Start Date and time the Num
315. ting a Password Windows GUI After a user name has been designated and a password has been set that password is required to gain access to any functionality of the MultiVOIP software Only one user name and password can be assigned to a voip unit While a username and password are not absolutely required when communicating with the MultiVOIP via the web browser GUI we highly recommend establishing username password for security reasons NOTE Record your user name and password in a safe place If the password is lost forgotten or unretrievable the user must contact MultiTech Tech Support in order to resume use of the MultiVOIP unit 1 The MultiVoip configuration program must be off when invoking the Set Password command If it is on the command will not work 2 To invoke the Set Password command go to Start Programs MVP x xx Set Password E MultiVOIP 800 v3 01E gt BS Configuration Fal Multi OIP 100 v 01E r a Date and Time Setup 3 MultiVOIP 100 v7 51A gt Z5 Download Factory Defaults Fa RouteFinder Manager 7 28 P 23 Download Firmware H Broadband Manager 7 26 gt 25 Download H 323 PDL A Paint Shop Pro gt 25 Download User Defaults MultiVOIP 100 v7 51B J fa J j5 Uninstall Set Password Multi OIP 3 You will be prompted to confirm that you want to establish a password which will entail rebooting the MultiVOIP which is done automatically MultiVOIP Password x Setting the pas
316. tional x TEI Assignment Number Plan ISDN Telephon C Automatic Point to Point C Fixed Point to Point 0 63 _ x Cancel MSN Details MSNI Dial Number1 1 Help MSN2 Dial Number2 Msng ooo Dial Number3 MSN4 Dial Number4 MSNS Dial Number5 MSN6 ooo Dial Number6 MSNZ Dial Number MSN Dial Number8 125 Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Note that ISDN BRI parameters are applied on an interface by interface basis However once you have established a set of ISDN BRI parameters for a particular interface you can apply this entire set of parameters to another interface by using the Copy Interface button and its dialog box To copy a set of ISDN BRI parameters to all interfaces select Copy to All and click Copy ISDN BRI Parameters Select BRI Interface ISDN 1 x ok Cancel Copy Interface Help Copy Interface Copy Interface 1 BRI Parameters to I Copy to All Interfaces Vv a 126 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration ISDN BRI Parameter Definitions Field Name Values Description Select BRI ISDNn In this field you will choose which Interface ISDN port you are configuring The Layer 1 Interface for n 1 2 410ST for n 1 4 810ST Terminal Network Clock Master 410ST has two ISDN BRI ports or interfaces the 810ST has four ISDN BRI ports or interfaces Each port has two channels When Ter
317. to the voip extension 8 Read console messages recorded on HyperTerminal Console Messages from Originating VOIP The voip unit that originates the call will send back messages like that shown below 00026975 CAS 0 RX ABCD 1 1 1 1 Pstn State 1 TimeStamp 26975 00027190 CAS 0 TX ABCD 1 1 1 1 00027190 PSTN cas seizure detected on 0 00027440 CAS 0 TX ABCD 0 0 0 0 00033290 PSTN call detected on 0 num 17637175662 00033290 H323IF 0 destAddr TA 200 2 10 5 1720 NAME Mounds View TEL 17637175662 17637175662 00033290 H323IF 0 srcAddr NAME New York TA 200 2 9 20 00033440 H323IF 0 cmCallStateProceeding 00033500 H323 0 Remote Information Q931 MultiVOIP T1 00033565 CAS 0 TX ABCD 1 1 1 1 00033675 H323IF 0 MasterSlaveStatus Slave 00033675 H323IF 0 FastStart Setup Not Used 00033690 CAS 0 TX ABCD 1 1 1 1 00033755 H323IF 0 Coder used g7231 00033810 PSTN pstn call connected on 0 52 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Connectivity Test Console Messages from Terminating VOIP The voip unit connected to the phone where the call is answered will send back messages like that shown below 00170860 00170860 00170885 00171095 00171105 00171105 00171110 00171110 00171110 00171315 00172275 00172285 00172995 00173660 00173760 H323 0 New incoming call PSTNIF Placing call on c
318. tuation of multiple area codes Consider a company with offices in Minneapolis and Baltimore 3 Sites All T1 Example Notice first the area code situation in those two cities Minneapolis s local calling area consists of multiple adjacent area codes Baltimore s local calling area consists of a base area code plus an overlay area code eater hear ee ae ea Rl NW 1 Compan VOIFIPB i Baltimore i Outstate MD i Overlay i 443 1 St Paul amp Suburbs 651 Site SW Suburbs i Baltimore 952 410 I I I l 1 I 1 l I w Company 1 VOIP PBX I 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 197 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide An outline of the equipment setup in both offices is shown below Pee aa Sein Local Call Area Codes 612 651 i 952 r Company HQ Minneapolis North Sub area 763 T1 Digital PBX voIP 7 200 2 10 3 5173 mW 717 5170 Overlay Area Code i 443 i g ao Baltimore CJ Sales Ofc area 410 R u T Digital 71 u igita PBX X e 7003 LU 200 2 9 7 7002 325 7001 198 MultiVOIP User Guide T1 PhoneBook Configuration The screen below shows Outbound PhoneBook entries for the VOIP located in the company s Baltimore facility 200 002 010 003 St Paul 200 002 010 003 Minneapolis N Suburbs 200 002 010 003 Minneapolis S Suburbs The entries in the Minneapolis VOIP s Inbou
319. ty has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omaha voip receives a call from any other voip phone station for example the Denver office the message Alerting Party Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 will be sent back and will appear in the Caller Id field of the Statistics Call Progress screen of the Denver voip This confirms to the Denver voip that the phone is ringing in Omaha Technical Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide Supplementary Services Definitions cont d Field Name Values Description Busy Party If the home voip unit is receiving a Allowed call directed toward an already Name Type engaged channel or phone station and CNI Busy Party is selected then the identifier from the Caller Id field will tell the originating remote voip unit that the channel or called party is busy This field is applicable only when the home voip unit is receiving the call Example Suppose a voip system has offices in both Denver and Omaha In the Omaha voip unit the home voip unit in this example Call Name Identification has been enabled Busy Party has been enabled as an Allowed Name Type and Omaha Sales Office Voipchannel 2 has been entered in the Caller Id field of the Supplementary Services screen When channel 2 of the Omah
320. uld note that URLs may change or become nonfunctional and we cannot guarantee the quality of information on these sites URL Description http phonebooth interocitor net wtng The World Telephone Numbering Guide presents excellent international numbering info that is both broad and detailed This includes info on re numbering plans carried out worldwide in recent years to accommodate new technologies http www oftel gov uk numbers number htm UK numbering plan from the Office of Telecommunications the UK telephony authority http www itu int home index html The International Telecommunications Union is an excellent source and authority on international telecom regulations and standards National and international number plans are listed on this site 258 MultiVOIP User Guide E1 PhoneBook Configuration URL Description http kropla com phones htm Guide to international use of modems http www numberplan org National and international numbering plans based on direct input from regulators worldwide Includes lists of telecom carriers per country http www eto dk European Telecommunications Office Primarily concerned with mobile wireless radiotelephony GSM etc http www eto dk ETNS htm European Telephony Numbering Space Resources for pan European telephony services standards etc Part of ETO site http
321. ulti Tech Systems Inc MultiVOIP is a registered trademark of Multi Tech Systems Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft GENERAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT CONTACT Multi Tech Country By E mail By Phone Systems Inc _ a a 2205 Woodale Drive U S amp Canada tsupport multitech com 800 972 2439 Mounds View Minnesota France support multitech fr 33 1 64 61 09 81 55112 USA 763 785 3500 India support multitechindia com 91 124 340778 800 328 9717 Fax 763 785 9874 U K support multitech co uk 44 118 959 7774 www multitech com Rest of World support multitech com 763 785 3500 CONTENTS CHAPTER Te OVERVIEW ssnvesssccssoscssvcvsssesesssecscssseccevesnssenxessesesnestesceveosessesesdeaceveses 7 ABOUT THIS MANUAL cs sc ssvedsssesuscads seston oka vssiatess EAE EE AROE E D VEEE EE ER aih 8 INTRODUCTION TO ISDN BRI MULTIVOIPs MVP410ST amp MVP810ST 10 ISDN BRI MultiVOIP Front Panel LEDS ccccccesceccccceceseesnececececesnesaeceeecensnteaes 14 ISDN BRI MultiVOIP LED Descriptions ssoseseeeseseeseeeereereerreresrrrrerrsreers 15 COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS scssssssecececsssnscesececsensaececececsessaeaeeeeeceeseasseseceeseneaees 16 SPECIFICATIONS ee e erne TE Re EEE EE E EAEE E RE EE R 17 INSTALLATION AT A GLANCE ssseesseessessseseesseesseesseesseersessteseeestesseesseesseessesssessestesse 18 RELATED DOCUMENTATION inenten n a a a t i 18 CHAPTER 2 QUICK STA
322. umber is a Number UDP logical port number See RFC3087 The voip will listen for SIP Control of messages at this logical port Servi If SIP is used 5060 is the Context using default standard or well SIP Request known port number to be URI by the used If 5060 is not used Network then the port number used is Working that specified in the SIP roti Request URI Universal Resource Identifier SIP URL sip userphone Looking similar to an email hostserver where aserphone is the telephone number and hostserver is the domain name or an address on the network address a SIP URL identifies a user s address In SIP communications each caller or callee is identified by a SIP url sip user_name host_name The format of a sip url is very similar to an email address except that the sip prefix is used 231 E1 Phonebook Configuration Add Edit Outbound Phone Book Field Def ns cont d Field Name Values Description SPP Fields Use Registrar Values Y N Description Select this checkbox to use registrar when voip system is operating in the Registrar Client SPP mode In this mode one voip the registrar as set in Phonebook Configuration screen has a static IP address and all other voips clients point to the registar s IP address as functionally their own However if your voip system overall is operating in Registrar C
323. und Phonebook as ieee insite attend epee eter tet aes chee 38 Phonebook Tips rrer toes ote inne secu bate Keert E i EE E ceatts 4 PHONCDOOK Example criss cosets SS arn raea EEE E Eea E sees 45 COMME CLIVILV Test poore reroror oe e eE sus stds A EEEN E EEE EE EEE aeae Eesi ei 50 Troublesho tin t sorse eira ae e a EAEE A EEEE Ra O ri 54 CHAPTER 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION AND CABLING 0008 55 INTRODUCTION aa a a a N E R 56 SAFETY WARNINGS eeaeee ree ea as EE eE EE EE EE E E NEE 56 Lithium Battery Caution sensin enei en eE E a 56 SAPELY Warnings Tele COM LK iscsse sasciceiecvescsssesescewdesiseuvendsvueesuasvasesseseceustssuepeseestvens 56 UNPACKING YOUR MVP 410ST 810ST MULTIVOIP cccccccscscsssseseeeecsensenecseneens 57 RACK MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR MVP410ST amp MVP8IOST cece 58 Safety Recommendations for Rack Installations s s s 59 19 Inch Rack Enclosure Mounting Procedure 60 CABLING PROCEDURE FOR MVP 410ST 8 10ST oo ccccccccecseecseesetecsensesecsenseecseneens 61 Contents MultiVOIP User Guide CHAPTER 4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ccsssscscssssscssssscccsssccccssscecees 66 INTRODUCTION a a E devas vue ue vacdegdavedesQen eas ce setaucsiceveesueasaecas 67 LOADING MULTIVOIP SOFTWARE ONTO THE PC ce cccccececsessececececeesssneceeeeeceenesees 67 UN INSTALLING THE MULTIVOIP CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE scsescsceceeeesenseee 72 CHAPTER 5 TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION csccccssssscesssscccssscccs
324. uration Call Signaling to configure the voip protocol in detail 8 Click OK to exit from the Add Edit Outbound Phonebook screen 37 Phonebook Starter Config MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Inbound Phonebook 1 Open the MultiVOIP program Start MultiVOIP xxx Configuration 2 Go to Phone Book Inbound Phonebook Add Entry 3 In the Remove Prefix field enter your local calling code area code country code city code etc preceded by any other access digits that are required to reach your local site from the remote voip location think of it as though the call were being made through the PSTN even though it will not be North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system Seattle is area 206 Chicago Inner London is 0207 area employees must dial 81 Birmingham employees must before dialing any Seattle dial 9 before dialing any number on the voip system London number on the voip Answer 1206 is prefix to be system removed by local Answer 0207 is prefix to be Seattle voip removed by local London voip Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system Rotterdam is country code 31 city code 010 Bordeaux employees must dial 903110 before dialing any Rotterdam number on the voip system Answer 03110 is prefix to be removed by local Rotterdam voip 38 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phoneboo
325. ve where the interface or BRI port has one or more terminal devices connected to it This option may also help resolve some problems that occur when set for Point to Point Automatic TEI even with only one terminal device connected to the interface Point to Point Automatic TEI is then to be used when there is one network device and one terminal device default setting When selecting Fixed TEL the connection must be Point to Point one network and one terminal device 128 MultiVOIP User Guide Technical Configuration ISDN BRI Parameter Definitions continued Field Name Values Description Numbering Details Calling Party Number Support for the user to select the Calling Type Party Number Type Unknown Local is valid only for AT5 operator local International directory number National There may be cases where the default Type Net_Spf of Number and or Numbering Plan may Subscriber cause conflicts with the network or Local terminal device to which the VOIP is Abbreviated attached Should this be the case then changing to a different Type of Number might resolve the problem Called Party Number Support for the user to select the Calling Type Party Number Type Unknown Local is valid only for AT5 operator local International directory number National There may be cases where the default Type Net_Spf of Number and or Numbering Plan may Subscriber cause conflicts with
326. voip access code Such practices vary by country Answer enter 90121 as Destination Pat tern in Outbound Phonebook of London voip Not 900121 Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system Answer enter 903305 as Destination Pattern in Outbound Phonebook of Rotterdam voip 36 MultiVOIP Quick Start Instructions Phonebook Starter Config 6 In the Remove Prefix field enter the initial PBX access digit 8 or 9 North America Euro National Call Long Distance Example Example Seattle Chicago system London Birming system Answer enter 8 in Remove Answer enter 9 in Remove Prefix field of Prefix field of Seattle Outbound London Outbound Phonebook Phonebook Euro International Call Example Rotterdam Bordeaux system Answer enter 9 in Remove Prefix field of Outbound Phonebook for Rotterdam voip Some PBXs will not hand off the 8 or 9 to the voip But for those PBX units that do it s important to enter the 8 or 9 in the Remove Prefix field in the Outbound Phonebook This precludes the problem of having to make two inbound phonebook entries at remote voips one to account for situations where 8 is used as the PBX access digit and another for when 9 is used 7 In the Protocol Type field group select the voip protocol that you will use H 323 SIP or SPP Use the appropriate screen under Config
327. with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software 278 MultiVOIP User Guide Operation amp Maintenance IP Statistics Field Definitions cont d Field Values Description Name UDP Packets User Datagram Protocol packets Transmit integer Number of UDP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of UDP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden UDP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software TCP Packets Transmission Control Protocol packets Transmit integer Number of TCP packets transmitted by ted value this VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of TCP packets received by this value VOIP gateway since the last clearing or resetting of the counter within the MultiVOIP software Received integer Number of error laden TCP packets with value received by this VOIP gateway since the Errors last clearing or resetting of the counter within th
328. wn below for details of how to have repairs made If the equipment is causing harm to the network the telephone company 350 MultiVOIP User Guide Regulatory Information may request you to remove the equipment form t network until the problem is resolved 7 No repairs are to be made by you Repairs are to be made only by Multi Tech Systems or its licensees Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty 8 Manufacturer Multi Tech Systems Inc Trade name MultiVOIP Model number MVP 810ST 410ST FCC registration number US AU7DDNAN46050 Modular jack USOC RJ 48C Service center in USA Multi Tech Systems Inc 2205 Woodale Drive Mounds View MN 55112 Tel 763 785 3500 FAX 763 785 9874 Canadian Limitations Notice Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an autho
329. y Registrar 122 Registrar IP Address 122 Registrar Options eee 122 Registrar Port ceseeeeeeeee 122 Retransmission SPP General OPtiONS eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 121 Signaling Port SPP General OPtiONS eeeeeeeeeeecseeeeeeeeee 121 SPP Fields Outbound Phonebook Bl E E Bede whens i 232 Telat erei nera iaa a 189 SPP Fields Phonebook Configuration SCHEEMN ese sense e sa SE 121 SPP Registrars Statistics Servers IPAddress aiies tenesi 294 P itel unatu e 294 Typer nis a nokas 294 SPP Registrarss Statistics Servers Stats eeii 294 SPP general description 11 SPP strengths amp compatibilities of 11 MultiVOIP User Guide SRV record eoi ie ate eck s 95 ST interface description sssr 357 Start Date Time RADIUS Attributes field eee 154 Start Date Time SMTP logs field O ceasittte desde Sotladececassen sete tyes 147 Start Date Time statistics logs field si duce dhs chintag se Rees ET 273 Start Now command Link Management button 283 State field ISDN BRI Statistics Layer 1 Interface 0 285 Status H 323 Gatekeepers Statistics Servers field cecceeeteeeees 292 Status SIP Proxies Statistics Servers field ceeceesseeeeees 293 Status SPP Registrars Statistics Servers field ceesecsseeeees 294 Status statistics logs field 273 Status field ISDN BRI Statistics Layer I
330. y number that s local in those two cities To achieve transparency of the VoIP telephony system and to give full access to all types of non toll calls made possible by the VOIP system the VoIP administrator must properly configure the Outbound and Inbound phone books of each VoIP in the system 179 T1 Phonebook Configuration MultiVOIP User Guide The Outbound phonebook for a particular VoIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate locally typically in a PBX in a particular facility and reach any of its possible destinations at remote VoIP sites including non toll calls completed in the PSTN at the remote site The Inbound phonebook for a particular VoIP unit describes the dialing sequences required for a call to originate remotely from any other VOIP sites in the system and to terminate on that particular VOIP Briefly stated the MultiVOIP s Outbound phonebook lists the phone stations it can call its Inbound phonebook describes the dialing sequences that can be used to call that MultiVOIP and how those calls will be directed Of course the phone numbers are not literally listed individually but are instead described by rule Consider two types of calls in the three city system described above 1 calls originating from the Miami office and terminating in the New York Manhattan office and 2 calls originating from the Miami office and terminating in New York
331. ytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 254 26 122 2 time lt i ms TTL 254 26 122 2 time lt i ms TTL 254 Reply from 26 122 2 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 254 Ci gt 2 Verify the telephone connections O Check cabling Are connections well seated To correct receptacle O If terminal equipment is connected to the voip then Network should be selected for that BRI interface in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen Note Each BRI interface is separately configurable E If network equipment such as an ISDN BRI PBX or an ISDN BRI line from a phone company is connected to the voip then Terminal should be selected for that BRI interface in the ISDN BRI Parameters screen Was the proper country and operator chosen Was the proper type of line coding A law or u law chosen 3 Verify phonebook configuration 4 Observe console messages while placing a call Look for error messages indi cating phonebook problems network problems voice coder mismatches etc 54 Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation and Cabling Mechanical Installation amp Cabling MultiVOIP User Guide Introduction When the MVP410ST or MVP810ST MultiVOIP units are to be installed into a rack two able bodied persons should participate Please read the safety notices before beginning installation Safety Warnings Lithium Battery Caution A lithium battery on the voice fax channel board provides backup power for the timekeeping capability Th

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Philips SHE9551  Deltabiol Flow - Quimunsa Quimica de Munguia  パーティションフック組立説明書 警告 警告  Relationship Manager User Manual  Tristar VE-5966 fan  5,600W 240V  U-Line 2115RS Refrigerator User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file